Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM · RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 1 of...

1 SPF-001 (Rev.D1)

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORMPrepared For the U.S. Department of Energy, Assistant Secretary for Environmental ManagementBy Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC., PO Box 850, Richland, WA 99352Contractor For U.S. Department of Energy, Office of River Protection, under Contract DE-AC27-08RV14800

TRADEMARK DISCLAIMER: Reference herein to any specific commercial product, process, or service by trade name, trademark, manufacturer, or otherwise, does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement, recommendation, or favoring by the United States government or any agency thereof or its contractors or subcontractors. Printed in the United States of America.

Release Stamp

1. Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 07

2. Title:Construction Specification for A/AX-Farm Waste Retrieval Project

3. Project Number:T2R02

☐ N/A 4. Design Verification Required:☐ Yes ☒ No

5. USQ Number: ☒ N/AN/A-8

6. PrHA Number Rev. ☐ N/APRHA-02038 00PRHA-02039 00PRHA-02040 00PRHA-02041 00PRHA-02042 00PRHA-02043 00PRHA-02044 00PRHA-02045 00PRHA-02046 00PRHA-02047 00

Clearance Review Restriction Type:public

7. ApprovalsTitle Name Signature DateClearance Review AARDAL, JANIS D AARDAL, JANIS D 02/14/2018Design Authority WITHERSPOON, JP P WITHERSPOON, JP P 02/14/2018Checker HAGENSEN, ALAN R HAGENSEN, ALAN R 02/14/2018Document Control Approval HOOD, EVAN HOOD, EVAN 02/14/2018Originator QUAM, PAUL R QUAM, PAUL R 02/14/2018Other Approver DAHL, MEGAN M DAHL, MEGAN M 02/14/2018Other Approver SNYDER, JOSHUA J SNYDER, JOSHUA J 02/14/2018Other Approver BRYDEN, MICHAEL J BRYDEN, MICHAEL J 02/14/2018Other Approver NELSON, RICK E NELSON, RICK E 02/14/2018PrHA Lead SMITH, RYAN D SMITH, RYAN D 02/14/2018Responsible Engineering Manager HANSON, CARL E HANSON, CARL E 02/14/2018USQ Evaluator SMITH, RYAN D SMITH, RYAN D 02/14/2018

8. Description of Change and JustificationProblem: RPP-SPEC-60023 Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping (13 47 13.13) specifies the use of the pin brazing method to mechanically connect conductors to old and new pipelines. The associated drawings specify the use of exothermic or "cadwelds" to attach conductors to the pipelines. Similarly, the cathodic protection DA prefers the use of exothermic welds. In addition, details regarding the anode junction boxes were unclear. Solution: Remove reference to pin brazing for conductor to pipeline attachments, and replace with exothermic weld instructions and specifications. Update anode junction box specifications. Testing/Analysis: Exothermic welds have been used to connect cathodic protection conductors to pipelines for many years on site. The exothermic weld methodology and execution is well understood and adequate for use. Other minor changes on this revision that do not require testing or analysis include the following: * Sections 40 05 13 and 40 24 10: Clarified piping section by adding Paragraph 3.2.F.8 (and Paragraph 3.2.F.9, respectively) to specify 2-hole position flange orientation. * Section 40 05 13: Clarified Fittings specification in Paragraph 3.5.B Components List to include ASTM A403 for butt weld fittings. * Section 09 91 00: Sherwin Williams has replaced Zinc Clad II with Zinc Clad IV as an equivalent product. * Section 31 23 00: Clarified backfill section to specifically require the preparation of a backfill permit. At Paragraphs 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, and 3.10 added a statement to say that the subcontractor shall prepare the backfill permit and obtain approval prior to commencing. * Throughout: Correct the paragraph number references to the 2016 revision of ACI 301. * Section 40 42 00: Removed the unnecessary requirement in Paragraph 2.2.B.2 that roll jacketing be in compliance with ASTM 1767. * Section 05 50 00: Add additional torques for larger sizes to table in Paragraph 3.3.D. Note - This revision does not modify any sections in which the PE stamp applies to. The stamp on record in revision 4 is still valid. Design checks were performed in accordance with ARES Quality Assurance Procedures (QAP). Because of the nature of the change a graded approach was applied and design verification was not performed as allowed by ARES QAP 3.5, Design Verification.

9. TBDs or Holds ☒ N/A

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 1 of 317

Feb 14, 2018DATE:

FOR PP

FOOOOFONamNam

ORRRRAAA

RRRRRRRR INFORMATON

DALDATHERSPTHERSINAGENSEN, AGENSEN, IN

OD, EVAN, EVANNFPAUL RPAUL R

NFEGAN MAN

FOOSHUA JSHUA JO

HAEL JAEL J

ORRMRMMAMAATATPiping (13 4ping (13 4

specify the specify thds. In addits. In add

TOONLY

with exothermh exother

nes for mannes for man

DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM Doc No: RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev. 07

2 SPF-001 (Rev.D1)

10. Related Structures, Systems, and Componentsa. Related Building/Facilities ☐ N/A b. Related Systems ☐ N/A c. Related Equipment ID Nos. (EIN) ☐ N/A241-A241-A-285241-AX

241-EDS241-PA241-RC241-RW241-WT

A285-PA-V-049A285-RW-BFP-001A285-RW-V-017A285-RW-V-018

11. Impacted Documents – Engineering ☒ N/ADocument Number Rev. Title

12. Impacted Documents (Outside SPF):N/A

13. Related Documents ☐ N/ADocument Number Rev. Title58776-005-RFI-006 00 RFI - Lead Times: Aloyco Valves (Eng Review Nec, RPP-SPEC-60023 R3, DCN-TBD & Clarif Only)DCN-713162 00 Change Valve from Aloyco to Powell for A285 Water SystemRPP-CALC-60167 01 241-AX Farm Buried & Above Grade Water and Chemical Piping ASME B31.3 and B31.9 AnalysisRPP-CALC-60217 00 241-A-285 Air and Water Service Building ASME Piping AnalysisTOC-MT-00070 00 A and AX-Farm Infrastructure Upgrades and AX-Farm Retrieval Equipment Removal/Installation Design Support

14. DistributionName OrganizationATKINS, LARRY B CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONINGBRYDEN, MICHAEL J C-FARM RETRIEVAL ENGRNGCOOK, SHAUN MHOPKINS, GARY P R&C CONSTRUCTIONHULL, KEVIN J ELECTRICAL/AREA/242A-EVAP ENGPARKMAN, DAVID B MARS-BASED RETRIEVAL ENGRNGSTEPHENS, RANDALL FWHITE, JEREMEY C PROJECTS WORK PACKAGE PLANNINGWIKSTRAND, CHRIS B CONSTRUCTION & COMMISSIONINGWITHERSPOON, JP P A/AX RETRIEVAL ENGRNG

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 2 of 317

FOR

haha241241--AXAFF241241-A--A-2828

FFFOFA and AXand AX--Fa

FFFOFORORRR

RMATON

P

INFORM

IINNFNFFOOORRMM CONCON

RMMMMAA/AX RA/AX RMAMAMAMAMAMAMA

ONLY

A-6007-231 (REV 0)

RPP-SPEC-60023

Revision 7

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FORA/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT

Prepared by

PR QuamWashington River Protection Solutions, LLC

Date PublishedFebruary 2018

Prepared for the U.S. Department of EnergyOffice of River Protection

Contract No. DE-AC27-08RV14800

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 3 of 317

Approved for Public Release;Further Dissemination Unlimited

FOR INFORMATON

lutions, LLutions, LL

ONLY

RPP-SPEC-60023, Rev. 7

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION FORA/AX-FARMS WASTE RETRIEVAL PROJECT

February 2018

prepared by

ARES CorporationEnergy Services Division

1100 Jadwin Avenue, Suite 400Richland, Washington 99352

(509) 946-3300

prepared for

Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 4 of 317

FOR INFORMATON

ppreprep

CorporaCorporvices Divivices Divi

nue, Suite nue, Suite on 99352n 99352

ONLY


ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SectionNo. of Pages

Title Pages 2Table of Contents 2

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTSDivision 01 Sections are under separate cover – see WRPS Statement of Work (SOW)

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 41 00 Demolition 3

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETESection 03 15 00 Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts 3Section 03 30 00 Concrete 18

DIVISION 05 – METALSSection 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 8Section 05 53 00 Metal Gratings 5

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITESSection 06 10 00 Carpentry 10

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTIONSection 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 5

DIVISION 09 – FINISHESSection 09 91 00 Painting 6Section 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 7

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONSection 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 39Section 13 47 13.13 Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping 10

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBINGSection 22 15 00 Compressed Air Piping 10

DIVISION 23 – HVACSection 23 31 01 Tank Ventilation Ducting 3Section 23 31 13 Air Compressor Metal Ducts 4

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 5 of 317

FOR ONCREONCRE

Postos -ConcretConcre

INFORMATON

FabricatioFabricatiotingsings

AND COAND CO

E PROTE PROT

ONLYged Pge


iii

SectionNo. of Pages

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICALSection 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 15Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 9Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 6Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 14Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 8Section 26 10 00 Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution 12Section 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 5Section 26 24 13 Switchboards 4Section 26 24 16 Panelboards 5Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 5Section 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 4Section 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 3Section 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting 6

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORKSection 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 18

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIESSection 33 10 00 Water Utilities 15

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATIONSection 40 05 13 Process Piping 17Section 40 05 22 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line System Installation 8Section 40 24 10 Chemical Piping 15Section 40 41 00 Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing 5Section 40 42 00 Process Piping and Equipment Insulation 7

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 6 of 317

FOR WWEncEncInteriorInteriorExteriorExterioINFORMATON

RKRKon and Filon and Fi

SyS stem Instem I

at Tract Traci ONLY

nggonn


iv

CERTIFICATIONI certify that the indicated sections of this Specification were prepared by me or under my supervision and that I am a registered architect/professional engineer under

the laws of the State of Washington.

Civil

Section 33 10 00 – Utilities

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 7 of 317

FOR INFORMATON

CivilCivil

–– UtilitieUtilitie

ONLY


02 41 00 – 1

SECTION 02 41 00

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS / CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, includingDivision 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.

A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

29 CFR Part 1910.94 Occupational Health and Environmental Control, Subpart G, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

29 CFR Part 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction

B. Hanford Documents

TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014®1 National Electrical Code®1 (NEC®1)

NFPA 70E®1 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace

D. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

Title 173, Department of Ecology, Chapter 173-303, Dangerous Waste Regulations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.

1 NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, NEC, and NFPA 70E are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Massachusetts.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 8 of 317

FORnatenate

tion unltion un

of Federal f Federal

t 1t INFORMATON

910.94 910.94

SafSa

lementatiomentatihing, and Sng, and

PA)A) ONLYl CodeCode®1

Safetafety in y in


02 41 00 – 2

1.3 PERMITS

A. Permits are addressed by TOC work control process.

1. Deleted.

2. Deleted.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before beginning cutting or demolition, survey existing work and examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine extent of work. Coordinate work of this Section with other work.

B. Determine if any type of chemicals, gases, flammable materials, or other dangerous materials have been used in pipes or other equipment based on job hazard evaluation or Excavation Permit. Control hazards associated with these materials prior to demolition per the work control process.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Personnel Protection: Provide safeguards, including warning signs, barricades, and temporary closures required for protection of construction personnel and others during demolition and removal operations.

B. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded as a result of cutting, removal, or demolition. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required.

C. Disconnect existing utility services specified by Washington River Protection Solutions (WRPS) Engineering Change Notice (ECN) or Mission Support Alliance Engineering Change Request (ECR). If no direction is included in an ECN or ECR, proceed as directed by the work control process.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Control amount of dust resulting from demolition to prevent spread of dust and to avoid creation of dust in surrounding area. Do not use water if ice, flooding, or pollution could occur. Follow requirements of state Waste Discharge Permit ST4511.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 9 of 317

FORATIONATIO

beginninbeginnins and Spand S

wwINFORMATON

h otheh oth

typype of che of chhave beenve be

xcavationxcavationion per theper th

uards, inclards, inctection ofection o

rations.ations.ONLYed as a resd as a re

acing, andcing, and

gton Rivgton RivMMissioi


02 41 00 – 3

B. Demolition Operations.

1. Remove equipment from tanks in accordance with applicable Work Packages, ECNs, and required work controls, such as Radiological Work Permit (RWP).

2. Dispose of debris in accordance with Contract Statement of Work requirements.

END OF SECTION 02 41 00

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 10 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


03 15 00 – 1

SECTION 03 15 00

POST-INSTALLED CONCRETE ANCHOR BOLTS

PART 1 GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract Statement of Work, including Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-06 Design Loads for Tank Farm Facilities

B. International Code Council (ICC)

ESR-1917 Hilti®2 Kwik Bolt TZ Carbon and Stainless Steel Anchors in Concrete

ESR-1546 Hilti HDA Carbon Steel and Stainless Steel Undercut Anchors for Cracked and Uncracked Concrete

IBC International Building Code

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for the submittal process.

B. Approval Required

1. Training Records (Paragraph 1.3.A): 5 days before installation.

2. Special Inspection Qualifications (Paragraph 1.3.C): 5 days before start of installation.

3. Deleted.

C. Deleted.

1. Deleted.

2 Hilti is a registered trademark of Hilti Corporation, Schaan, Liechtenstein.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 11 of 317

FORnatenate

ttion unlion un

rd Documrd Docum

STSTINFORMATON

DD-06-06

de Councile Counci

HHAnchAnc

Hilti HDAHilti HDdercut Anrcut An

etee

l BuildinBuildinONLYl procprocess.ess.


03 15 00 – 2

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor shall train post-installed anchor installers. Installers shall be trained to the anchor manufacturer’s installation instructions, design document requirements, and the anchor installation report. Contractor shall deliver installer training records to the Company.

B. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

C. Post-Installed Anchor Special Inspector Qualifications.

1. Two years’ experience in concrete inspection and/or certification from American Concrete Institute, ICC, International Conference of Building Officials, or other recognized concrete inspection agency to be provided by the Tank Operations Contractor (TOC).

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. See Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Post-installed anchors (PC-2, PC-1, and PC-0): Industry standard wedge-type having a published evaluation report (by ICC Evaluation Services, Inc.), with anchor descriptions, tables of allowable tension and shear loads (including seismic and wind qualifications), and test findings.

B. Hilti Corporation or approved equal:

1. Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.

2. HDA Metric Undercut Anchor.

C. Anchors located in dry, interior locations may be carbon steel. Anchors located in wet or potentially wet interior locations (e.g., water building installations) and exterior locations shall be stainless steel.

D. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 12 of 317

FOR

AAOffiOffibyb the Tthe y

ORARAINFORMATON

GE,GE,

atement oatement o

k for substfor subst

C--0): In0): InEvE ONLY

aluatioaluatiand shear nd shea


03 15 00 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where expansion anchors are to be installed and notify the Company, in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. For expansion anchors larger than 3/8 in., locate rebar by scanning before drilling. For expansion anchors 3/8 in. or smaller, avoid cutting rebar by using a drill with a concealed-metal detector shutoff.

B. Do not install anchors in concrete prior to 28 days after concrete placement unless it can be shown by testing that the concrete design strength has been obtained.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Anchor Installation

1. Install anchors shown on the Drawings in accordance with training.

2. Notify the TOC Construction Representative if reinforcing steel is encountered when drilling.

3.4 FIELD INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Special Inspection is required for all anchor bolt installations. This shall be done in accordance with Section 4 of the applicable ICC Evaluation Report. The special inspector shall be on the jobsite during anchor installation to verify anchor type, anchor dimensions, hole dimensions, hole cleaning procedures, anchor spacing, edge distances, drill bit size, anchor embedment and tightening torque. Complete inspections shall be documented by the inspector on Expansion Anchor Installation Report (Form A-6004-239) (or Company-approved equivalent) and documented in the work package.

B. Installation Reports (Paragraph 3.4.A): Within 10 days after work is complete (Expansion Anchor Installation Report [Form A-6004-239]).


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 13 of 317

FOR

ceacea

not install install e shown be shown

INFORMATON

r Ir Installatnstallat

shown on hown on

struction truction Rng. g.

or bolt inr bolt ine ICIONLY

C C EEvvnchor instchor in

aning procning proent and tigent and t

tor on Extor on Exved


03 30 00 – 1

SECTION 03 30 00

CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Formwork.

B. Reinforcement.

C. Cast-In-Place Items.

D. Mixture Design.

E. Placement Procedures.

F. Cast-in-Place Concrete.

G. Pre-Cast Concrete.

H. Finishes for pre-engineered metal buildings.

I. Concrete Test Cylinders.

J. Grout Test Blocks.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Gratings.”

B. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”

C. Section 13 34 19, “Metal Building Systems.”

D. Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS, CODES, AND STANDARDS



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 14 of 317

FOR

nn

xture Desixture Des

ntt ProceProcINFORMATON

ConcreteConcrete

red metal bd metal

ONLY


03 30 00 – 2

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)

ACI 117 Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials

ACI 237R Self-Consolidating Concrete

ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings

ACI 305R Guide to Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306.1 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting

ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary

ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

ACI CP-1 Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician-Grade 1

B. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A108 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished

ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete

ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A853 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use

ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 15 of 317

FOR

00

I 31515

INFORMATON

TeTeConcCon

ard Specifard Specif

pecificatiopecificatinishishONLY

dd

ioion for Stn for Stfor Concrer Concr

Deformefo


03 30 00 – 3

ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete

ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete

ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method

ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout

ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry

ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

ASTM C1093 Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry

ASTM C1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM D1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)

ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

Manual of Standard Practice

D. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)

QC Manual – Section 3 Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 16 of 317

FOR

M M CC

C404C404

INFORMATON

andanand Crand

tandard Prandard Prncies for Mcies for

SpecificatSpecificement Gment GONLY

ation for Ption forete Pavingte Pavin

ding and Rding and


03 30 00 – 4

E. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code-Steel

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.

B. Approval Required.

1. Concrete Data: Before mixing, submit concrete materials, mix design, and mix proportions, in accordance with ACI 301. Identify each material to be used in concrete, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic yard of plastic mix.

2. Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Prior to fabrication of reinforcement, submit placement drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bars sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

3. Setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions: Prior to fabrication, submit information for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

4. Certificate of Compliance: Provide Certificate of Compliance for cast-in-place anchors indicating they meet the requirements of this Specification.

5. Concrete Placement drawings: Prior to setting of forms, submit placement drawings indicating planned placement sequence and locations of any planned joints, including those not shown on the Contract drawings.

6. Concrete curing procedure: Before mixing, submit a description of materials and methods of curing, in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6.

7. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete will be placed during cold weather, submit procedures meeting requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.5 and 5.3.2.1.b, and ACI 306.1.

8. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures: Before placement and if concrete will be placed during hot weather, submit procedures meeting requirements of ACI 301, Sections 4.2.2.5 and 5.3.2.1.c, and ACI 305R.

9. Product data of non-shrink grout.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 17 of 317

FORyy

ReinfoReinfosubmit plsubmit p

acemenacemeINFORMATON

t. t. spacingspacingical connecal conne

inforceminforcem

s, diagrams, diagraminformatinformati

or bolts anor bolts anin concrein concre

ovide Cerovide Ceret the requet the requ

ONLYsetting oetting equence anquence an

n the Contthe Con

it a descit a descA


03 30 00 – 5

10. Submittals shall include the documentation listed in Paragraph 1.5.

11. Self-Consolidating Grout Data: Before mixing, submit grout materials, mix design, and mix proportions in accordance with ASTM C476.Identify each material to be used in grout, including amount, by weight, to be utilized in each cubic yard of plastic mix. Curing shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6.

C. Deleted.


A. Deleted.

B. Certification of Concrete Production Facility: The concrete supplier shall be certified according to NRMCA’s “Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities,” with compliance to ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.

C. Qualification of Concrete Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including equipment, personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1077 and shall be currently accredited by an independently recognized authority.

D. Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist (Attachment 1): The preplacement portion of the Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist shall be signed off prior to any concreteor grout placement. The Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist shall include inspection of the following items prior to placing concrete or grout; forms, re-bar, subgrade, embedments, and other items that may need inspection.

E. Trip Ticket: Document that comes with the concrete delivery that it meets specifications. “Trip Tickets” shall contain information listed in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cement ratio.

F. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with Contract Documents.

Document Paragraph

Supplier Certification 1.5.B

Laboratory Qualifications 1.5.C

Inspection Personnel Qualification Records 1.6.A

Concrete Test Results 3.7.D

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 18 of 317

FOR rtificatiortificatio

fied accored accortion Faciltion Faci

n facilfaciINFORMATON

tiesties

f Concretef Concretent, personnt, person

all be l currcurr

hecklist (Ahecklist (Ahecklisthecklist shs

Grout PlaGrout Plar to o placinplacin

hat mayhat may nnyy

ONLYcrete delrete del

mation lismation lisnt ratio.nt ratio.

nd recornd recoron


03 30 00 – 6

Grout Test Results 3.7.F

G. Perform work in accordance with the applicable sections of ACI 117, ACI 301, ACI 318, and ASTM C476.

H. Suspect and Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

I. Trip Ticket: The Trip Ticket is provided with the concrete delivery and shall contain information listed in ASTM C94, Paragraphs 14.1.1 through 14.1.10, and water/cement ratio.

J. Qualification of Grout Inspection/Testing Laboratory: The laboratory including equipment, personnel, and procedures shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1093 and shall be currently accredited by an independently recognized authority.

1.6 QUALIFICATION OF CONCRETE/GROUT INSPECTORS

A. Personnel performing field testing of concrete shall be ACI Concrete Field Testing Technicians, Grade 1, who have received formal certification in accordance with ACI CP-1 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs shall include requirements for written and performance examination as stipulated in ACI 301, Section 1.6.2.

B. Deleted.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements.

B. Steel reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture dirt, oil, sunlight, and other contaminants.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTION

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cast-In-Place Concrete

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 19 of 317

FOR

pmenpme093 and 093 and

orityity.

ON ON OINFORMATON

F CF C

rming fielrming fiens, Grade ns, Grade

CPCP-1 or e1 or er written ar written a

NGNG

neral reneral reONLY

qu

steel reinfoteel reinfo

m moistum moistu


03 30 00 – 7

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260.

4. Properties (if not specified by design):

a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4500 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.2.

c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.2.4.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 301, Section 4.2.3, and ASTM C94.

e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 and ACI 301, Section 4.1.2.12.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Pre-Cast Concrete

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II (low alkali).

2. Aggregates: ASTM C33, 3/4-in. maximum size. Fine aggregate: free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

3. Air-entraining admixture: ASTM C260.


a. Minimum allowable compressive strength: 4,500 lb/in2 at 28 days, or as required by design documents.

b. Slump: In accordance with ACI 237R.

c. Air content: In accordance with ACI 237R.

d. Proportions: In accordance with ACI 237R, and ASTM C94.

e. Time of discharge: In accordance with ASTM C94, Section 12 and ACI 237R.

5. Measuring, Mixing, and Delivery: In accordance with ASTM C94.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 20 of 317

FOR d.d

TTINFORMATON

mmand and ACA

g, Mixing,, Mixing,

50, Ty50, Type Ipeyy

3/44--in.. mmactivitctivity to y to

C260260..ONLYngth: 4gth: 4,55


03 30 00 – 8

C. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): Portland cement based, minimum compressive strength of 100 psi at 28 days, maximum compressive strength of 300 psi at 28 days.

D. Reinforcing Steel

1. Steel bars: ASTM A615, deformed, Grade 60.

2. Tie wire: ASTM A853 carbon steel, 16-gage minimum, annealed.

3. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type in flat sheets.

E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

F. Non-shrink Grout

1. In accordance with ASTM C1107.

2. Minimum strength of fluid grout, 4,000 psi at 1 day, 5,000 psi at 3 days, and 9,000 psi at 28 days.

G. Embedded Plates: See Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

H. Headed Weld Stud Anchors: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

I. Cast-In-Place Anchors: ASTM F593 CW2 threaded rods with ASTM F594 nuts.

J. Post-Installed Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

K. Expansion joint filler: ASTM D1751; asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2-in. thick.

L. Joint sealants: See Section 07 92 00, “Joint Sealants.”

M. Forms: Wood, steel, plywood or Masonite Corporation “Concrete Form Presdwood,” as required for various specified finishes.

1. Form facing panels shall provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

2. Form release agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

N. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion appropriate for bonding fresh concrete to existing set concrete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 21 of 317

FOR

endend

shrink Ghrink

accordaccorINFORMATON

nn

um strengtum strengtpsi at 28 dpsi at 28 d

Section 05Section 0

ASTM ASTMsteel; AWsteel; AW

3 CW2 thCW2 th

00, “00, “PoPoONLYregnated fregnated


03 30 00 – 9

O. Special Coatings: See Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings,” for concrete coating. Extent of coating shall be as shown on Drawings.

P. Waterstops: Self-expanding Butyl Strip, manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 by 1 in.

Q. Self-Consolidating Grout for use in Grout Boxes

1. In accordance with ASTM C476.

2. Aggregate: ASTM C404, Fine, Size No. 2, Natural or Manufactured.


a. Minimum strength of grout, 3,000 psi at 28 days.

b. Maximum unit weight of grout, 140 pcf (Ref. RPP-CALC-61007).

2.3 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Form Construction

1. Install formwork in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2.3 to support vertical, lateral, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

2. Construct formwork such that interior shape and rigidity of finished concrete will meet requirements of the Drawings and approved shop drawings within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 4.

3. Prepare form surfaces in accordance with ACI 301, Section 2 using specified form coating materials, or as described below.

4. Forms for surfaces which will be permanently concealed from view may be saturated with water, before placing concrete, instead of other treatment. In freezing weather, forms shall be treated with oil or stearate.

5. Clean forms of foreign material before placing concrete.

B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 22 of 317

FOR

PP

a.a

MMINFORMATON

axax

INFORCINFORC

orcement emen

ith ACI 3th ACI 3ds ths thONLY

at migat mig

and rigiditnd rigidits and apps and app

ectionect


03 30 00 – 10

C. Clean grout boxes of foreign material and remove free liquids within grout box prior to placement of contaminated equipment. Maintain cleanliness until self-consolidating grout placement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete.

B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items as required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. All embedded items shall be securely supported to prevent displacement during concrete placement and finishing.

C. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. Document inspection on Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Reinforcing Steel

1. Fabricate and place bars to dimensions shown on Contract drawings, within tolerances shown in ACI 117, Sections 2.1 and 2.2.

2. Place as shown on Drawings, within tolerances specified in ACI 117, Section 2.2 and ACI 301, Section 3.3.2.

3. Tie to prevent displacement during placement of concrete.

4. Do not force into concrete after initial set has started.

5. Provide concrete cover for reinforcement protection per dimensions given in ACI 301, Section 3.3, except where shown otherwise on Contract drawings or approved shop drawings.

6. Reinforcement shall be supported and fastened together to prevent displacement by construction loads, or placement of concrete beyond specified tolerances. Reinforcement supported from ground shall rest on precast, square concrete blocks, with a minimum surface area of 4 in2 andhaving a compressive strength equal to specified compressive strength of concrete being placed.

B. Concrete

1. Concrete Placing:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 23 of 317

FOR crete crete

fy that ancthat ancyuratelurately ply p

Docuo INFORMATON

mentmen

bars to dars town in ACIwn in ACI

gs, within ts, within ion 3.3.2.ion 3.3.2

placemplacemONLY

ent

t has starthas star

ection per ction peerwise oerwise o


03 30 00 – 11

a. Contractor shall use a Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist. Checklist shall be reviewed with the TOC Construction Representative prior to placing concrete. At a minimum, the checklist shall include:

i. Formwork placement.

ii. Earth compaction.

iii. Reinforcement placement.

iv. Embedded items.

v. Bonding electrode.

vi. Concrete Mix.

vii. Testing Requirements.

viii. Weather conditions including proper weather mitigation requirements.

ix. Approval of all preplacement submittals prior to placment.

x. Availability of associated materials and labor.

xi. Identification of sections of structure to be placed.

Note: Use separate checklist for each day and each concrete mix.

b. Verify that anchors, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete, and that required inspections have been performed. Document inspection on a Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

c. Deleted.

d. For each truck load, collect Trip Ticket.

e. Discharge concrete rinsate at Company-approved location.

f. Place in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3. Do not drop more than 5 ft.

g. Temper only as permitted in ACI 301, Section 4.3.

2. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, Section 4.3.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 24 of 317

FOR vivINFORMATON

viii.viii. WWrequirequi

Approval oApproval

abilityability of ofyy

on of sectiof sect

cklist for eklist for

infornfoONLYcemeceme

placed, polaced, poncrete, aoncrete, a

cument inument in


03 30 00 – 12

a. Addition of water shall be in accordance with ASTM C94.

b. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range, water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

3. Before test sampling and placing concrete, trip ticket shall be reviewed by the Testing Agency’s field inspector. After depositing concrete, trip ticket shall be retained in the work package or fabrication plan.

4. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.

a. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

b. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40°F, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

c. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

5. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305R and as follows:

a. Maintain concrete temperature below 90°F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.

b. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

6. Place nonshrink grout where shown on Contract drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

7. Placing concrete against subgrade/base material: Place on or against firm, damp surfaces free of frost, ice, and free water. Obtain required earth compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,”before concrete placement. Dampen earth surfaces to receive fresh concrete.

8. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.2.5.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 25 of 317

FOR b.b WW4INFORMATON

0 F0 Ftemperatempera

not use frnot use frete on froze on froz

nt: Compnt: Comp

perature bperature bhopped ichopped ic

equivaequivONLY

leniquid nitquid ni

nd subgradnd subgy moistmoisty


03 30 00 – 13

a. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

b. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

c. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

d. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains/trenches where required.

9. Form Removal and Concrete Repair

a. Form removal: Remove in accordance with ACI 301, Sections2.3.2 and 2.3.4.

b. Cut back form ties and examine concrete surfaces for defects. Repair only after permission for patching is given by the TOC Construction Representative.

c. Place concrete repair mortar within 1 hour after mixing. Do not re-temper mortar.

d. Repair surface defects in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.7. Cure concrete repairs same as new concrete.

10. Concrete Finishes and Tolerances

a. Measuring for tolerances shall be performed in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.3.

b. Formed surfaces: Start finishing following concrete repair and complete within 96 hours after forms have been removed. Finish in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.3.3.

i. Surfaces exposed to earth backfill; Rough form finish.

ii. Exterior surfaces exposed to weather.

iii. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.

iv. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

v. Surfaces to receive special protective coating (ACI 301, Section 5.3.3.4.b).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 26 of 317

FOR a.a.

CCINFORMATON

ut ut Repair Repair ConstructiConstructi

concrete rncrete rmortar.mortar.

e defects indefects inpairs samepairs same

ncesnces

all be peall be pONLYlowing coowing c

ave been ave been


03 30 00 – 14

c. Unformed surfaces: Finish in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.4.

i. Exterior equipment slabs subject to foot traffic.

C. Self-Consolidating Grout for use in Grout Boxes to be placed in accordance with ASTM C476, using the Concrete/Grout Placement Checklist.

3.4 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, re-straightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Re-straighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand- or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and is uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construction contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatter-proof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-in. wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. Maximum 12 hours after placement.

3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 27 of 317

FORoat Finishat Finish

is small osmall oand fill lownd fill lo

INFORMATON

float finfloat f

fter applyfter applypowerower--dridr

is free of is free ofh anyny surfa surfayy

sh to exteh to exte

ONLYakenedkened--plapla

uction conction cos as follows as follo

aw


03 30 00 – 15

B. Cure concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Section 5.3.6. Clear curing compounds shall be tinted or applied to surfaces marked to show extent of spraying.

C. Do not use curing compound on surfaces to receive special protective coating.

D. Protect concrete during adverse weather conditions in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8.

E. Protect concrete from mechanical damage in accordance with ACI 301, Section 1.8.

F. Making and curing of field test cylinders shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C31. Test cylinders shall be stored in or on the structure as near to the point of deposit of the concrete represented as possible. Protect all surfaces of the test cylinders from the elements as near as possible the same way as the formed work. Provide the test cylinders with the same temperature and moisture environment as the structural work.


A. Sample and test concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 1.6.4.2 (d), (e), and (f), (g), and (h). Record results. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests.

B. Engage a special inspector and qualified independent testing agency to perform field material evaluation tests and inspections, and prepare testing and inspection reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Headed bolts and studs.

3. Verification of use of required concrete design mixture.

4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests:

1. Testing of concrete samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained according to ACI 301, Section 1.6.4.2.d and ASTM C172.

2. Testing shall be performed according to ACI 301, Sections 1.6.3.2.(d) and (e). Record results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 28 of 317

FOR

M CM Cnt of depnt of dep

ylinlinders fers fProvide thProvide t

nt ast aINFORMATON

he he

NS ANS AND TD T

rete in accte in acccordcord resulresu

evaluatioevaluatio

qualified inualified innspectionsnspections

ONLYure


03 30 00 – 16

E. Provide nonshrink grout block molds onsite. Non-shrink grout blocks shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.

F. Provide self-consolidating grout block molds onsite. Self-consolidating grout blocks shall test equal to or greater than minimum strength specified.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 29 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


03 30 00 – Att. 1-1

SECTION 03 30 00 – ATTACHMENT 1

CONCRETE/GROUT PLACEMENT CHECKLISTPlacement No.:

PART A – REQUIREMENTSProject: Work Plan: Work Step: Planned Placement Date: Total Cubic Yards:

Description of Placement:

Mix Design No.: Psi Required: Aggregate Size: Prepared By/Date:

Testing Requirements: Bonding Agent: Curing Compound:

PART B – PREPLACEMENT

Description:Craft Release(Sign/Date):

QC Inspection(Sign/Date):

Layout

Excavation/Compaction

Formwork (Material, Location, Alignment)

Testing Agency Notified and Scheduled

Embeds (Material, Location, Alignment, Stability)

Reinforcement (Size, Quality, Bends, Lap, Length, Spacing, Cover, Stability, Cleanliness)

Joints (Materials, Location, Prep, Dowel/Tie)

Piping

Electrical

Cleanup

Placing and Curing Equipment

Preplacement Submittals Approval

Weather/Temperature Considerations

Other

PART C – PLACEMENTPlacement Approved – Supt.: Date: Placement Approved – TOC Representative: Date:

Actual Placement Trip Ticket No.: Actual Cubic Yards Placed:Date: Time:

Comments:

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 30 of 317

FOR FFORR

INFORMATON

INININININNFFOORMTON

ONLYOOOOOOOONONLLYY


05 50 00 – 1

SECTION 05 50 00

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL




A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations

B. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)

ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification in Nondestructive Testing

C. ASTM International (ASTM)


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A106 Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A240 Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 31 of 317

FORnatenate

tion unltion un

can Sociecan Socie

131 INFORMATON

estructive structive

sonnel Qunnel Qustructive Ttructive

ONLYation for Ction for

foror Pipe, Pipe, , Welded , Welded


05 50 00 – 2

ASTM A312 Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

ASTM F844 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code – Steel

AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel

AWS QC1 Certification of Welding Inspectors

E. Hanford Documents


TFC-ENG-STD-22 Piping, Jumpers, and Valves

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for submittal procedures.


1. Welding personnel qualifications: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 32 of 317

FOR M A653A65

INFORMATON

SS(Fla(Fla

AWS)AWS)

ctural Welural Wel

Welding CWelding

dini ONLYg CodeCode

ding Inspeng Inspe


05 50 00 – 3

2. Welding procedure qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit welding procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.1.

3. Examination personnel qualifications: 5 days before first use, submit examination personnel qualification as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.2.

4. Examination procedures: 5 days before start of fabrication, submit examination procedures as required by Paragraph 1.3.B.3.

5. Carbon Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.1.

6. Sheet Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.2.

7. Stainless Steel Weld Examination as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.3.

8. Weld Examinations (PT, MT) as required by Paragraph 3.5.A.4.

C. Approval Not Required: None.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Qualifications of Welding Personnel and Procedures

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 for steel structures, AWS D1.3 for sheet steel, and AWS D1.6 for stainless steel before welding. Qualification of welding personnel and procedures in accordance with ASME B&PVC,Section IX may be substituted for components welded in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.3, and D1.6. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications, procedure qualification records, and welder performance qualification test results and renewal of qualification documentation at jobsite. Where stainless steel materials are welded to carbon steel, AWS D1.1 procedures shall govern, unless ASME B&PVC, Section IX was substituted.

2. Qualification of examination personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.

a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification(current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 33 of 317

FOR

SS

Weld EWeld

Not ReNot RINFORMATON

ququ

NCENCE

ducts: Seets: See of misree of misre

ersonnel aersonnel

for weldinr weldinfor steel stor steel s

el before wbeforein accorn accor

mpomp ONLYnents wnents

opy of wepy of wrds, and wds, and w

cation docation doed to carbd to carb

B&P


05 50 00 – 4

shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

3. Examination procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1.4 PERMITS


B. Deleted.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

Use the following materials unless otherwise shown on Contract drawings:

A. Rolled Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36 or ASTM A992, Gr. 50.

B. Stainless Steel Shapes and Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304L.

C. Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304, 304L.

D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A312, Grade TP 304L (SMLS).

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (black) Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B, standard weight, Schedule 40.

F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

G. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653

H. Fasteners

1. Bolts

a. ASTM A325.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 34 of 317

FOR

Y, SY, S

the e ContrContr

INFORMATON

tement ofment o

erwise shoerwise sho

s: s: ASTMASTM

AA276, Ty276, TyONLY 304, 304304, 30

(SMLS).(SMLS)

ASTM STM


05 50 00 – 5

2. Nuts

a. ASTM A563, Grade C, plain, heavy hex.

3. Washers: ASTM F436 Type 1, plain.

4. Expansion Anchor Installations: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

5. Weld studs: Nelson Stud Welding Co. Type H4L or approved substitute.

I. Welding Electrodes/Filler Metal:

1. Carbon steel – Matching filler metal with Fu = 70,000 psi.

2. Stainless steel – E308/ER308 or E309/ER309.

J. Nonshrink Grout: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”

K. Special Protective Coating: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”

L. Zinc-rich Coating: Sherwin Williams®3 “Zinc Clad®3 200,” or ZRC Products Company “Z.R.C.®4“

M. Supports: Channels, channel spring nuts, bolts, and fittings for any one support type shall be galvanized and from the same manufacturer. Cooper B-Line®5

channels and fittings, or approved substitute.

1. Channels: 1 5/8-in. wide by 1 5/8-in. deep, or as shown on Drawings.

2. Channel spring nuts: Manufacturer’s standard.

3. Bolts (for use with channel spring nuts): Manufacturer’s standard.

4. Support Clamps (for rigid steel conduit): Manufacturer’s standard.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.

3 Sherwin-Williams and Zinc Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware.4 Z.R.C. is a registered trademark of Norfolk Corporation, Marshfield, Massachusetts.5 B-Line is a registered trademark of Cooper Technologies Company, Houston, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 35 of 317

FOR SStainltain

nk Groutk GrouINFORMATON

tive Coatitive Coati

Sherwin Werwin

ell spring nspring om the samom the sam

substituteubstitut

5/88-in.n. deede

stanstaONLYdarddard

ManufactuManufactu

facturerfacturer’ss


05 50 00 – 6

2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and stainless steel in accordance with AWS D1.6.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Touch up damaged zinc surfaces with zinc-rich coating. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where metal fabrications are to be installed and notify TOC Construction Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of items to Site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Anchor Installation: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

B. Install metal fabrications plumb, level, or as shown on the Drawings.

C. Make field connections as neatly as possible with joints flush and smooth. Grind smooth exposed field welds, as required per design, before field painting. Repair welds in galvanized work with 2 coats of zinc-rich coating.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 36 of 317

FOR PPnot cnot cfield wefield weembeddembeddeINFORMATON

up damaup damance with me with m

ications arications arting ing of conof con

oceed witeed wit

ONLYinstructionnstructimiscellanmiscell

ordinateordinate


05 50 00 – 7

D. Assemble and install interchangeable channel supports in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Torque bolts used with channel spring nuts in support channels and clamps per manufacturer instructions (B-Line torque requirements shown).

Bolt size, inches Torque, ft-lb1/4 6 – 9

5/16 11 – 173/8 19 – 301/2 50 – 755/8 65 – 90

3/4 and larger 75 – 110

Unless specified on the design drawings, torque the bolts in accordance with Tank Farm maintenance procedure 2-MISC-049 Bolt Torquing Guidelines.

E. Weld Studs: Installation, testing and welder qualification shall be in accordance with the manufacturers’ written instructions, and AWS D1.1, Section 7 for carbon steel and AWS D1.6, Section 7 for stainless steel.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. After installation has been completed, clean and paint connections with primer. Touch-up shop prime coat wherever damaged. Repair breaks in galvanized coating with zinc-rich coating.


A. Weld Examination

1. Perform visual examination of carbon steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Sections 6.5.5 and 6.9 (statically loaded structures). Record examination results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable.

2. Perform visual examination for sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, Section 6.1. Record examination results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable.

3. Perform visual examination of stainless steel welds in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.1 (statically loaded structures). Record examination results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable.

4. Perform magnetic particle examination (MT) where shown on the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.1, Sections 6.12 and 6.10, respectively. Perform liquid penetrant (PT) examination where shown on the Drawings in accordance with AWS D1.6, Section 6.28.4 (statically loaded). Record examination results results and include in work package or fabrication document as applicable.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 37 of 317

FORs ss s

rm mainrm main

Studs: IStuds: Insnmanufamanufa

WW INFORMATON

tutuD1.6, SD1.6,

een compleen compwhereverwherev

gg

n stestONLYel welel we

callally loadey loadckage or fkage or

dancedan


05 50 00 – 8


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 38 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


05 53 00 – 1

SECTION 05 53 00

METAL GRATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Labor, materials, equipment as shown on the Drawings, and specified herein, to furnish and install metal bar gratings.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM)

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 Heavy-Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual

ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 Steel, Stainless Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)


ASTM A510 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel


ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damages and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 39 of 317

FOR NCESNCES

d general pgeneral pcificatioificatioINFORMATON

ents and oents and oSection. RSection.

wise indice indi

ards Institards Instcturers (Ncturers (N

tal Bar GraBar Gr

utyty Metal Metayy

s SteSteONLYel andel and

Carbonarb


05 53 00 – 2

ASTM A1011 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM A1018 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Commercial, Drawing, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength

ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel

ASTM F1941 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners [Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN/UNR)]

C. Master Painters Institute (MPI)

Architectural Painting Specification Manual

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

Paint Specification No. 20 Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, “Inorganic,” and Type II,”Organic”)

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for approval: For the following:

1. Manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, anchor details, and standard installation details.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531 and ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 (or ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531) or as specified in design.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 40 of 317

FOR TM TM F19F19

INFORMATON

s Instituts Institu

g Council g Council

ZincZinc--RichRicpepe II,II,””OrgOrg

ttal proctal proONLY

ed

hor detailhor deta


05 53 00 – 3

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

Note: No documentation is required since the U.S. Green Building Council allows a default value of 25 percent to be used for steel without documentation.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.

C. Steel Bars for Bar Gratings: ASTM A36 or Steel Strip, ASTM A1011 or ASTM A1018.

D. Wire Rod for Bar Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510.

E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011, Structural Steel, Grade 30.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, Structural Quality, Grade 33, with G90 coating.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated by design, provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5. Fasteners shall be self-drilling, self-tapping structural fasteners.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer5: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79 and compatible with topcoat. Primer is not to be used for galvanized steel.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 41 of 317

FOR

nt nt nsumer rnsumer r

No documNo documdefault defaultINFORMATON

valva

hapes, and apes, and

ratings: Aings: A

ossbars: Aossbars: A

011, Struc1, Stru

StructuralStructur

ONLYide zincde zin -ppClass Fe/Class Fe/


05 53 00 – 4

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and punch material cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 in. unless otherwise indicated by design. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

B. Form from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated, but not less than that needed to support indicated loads.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

2.5 METAL BAR GRATINGS

A. Welded Steel Grating:

1. Bearing Bar Spacing, Depth, and Thickness: As Shown.

2. Crossbar Spacing: As Shown.

3. Traffic Surface: Plain.

4. Loading: At a uniform load of 100 pounds per square foot, deflection shall not exceed 1/4 in. over the required span.

5. Steel Finish: Hot-dip galvanized.

B. Grating Sections: All grating shall be banded. Fabricate with banding bars attached by welding to entire perimeter of each section. Include anchors and fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for attaching to supports.

C. Fabricate cutouts in grating sections for penetrations indicated. Arrange cutouts to permit grating removal without disturbing items penetrating grating.

1. Edge-band openings in grating that interrupt four or more bearing bars with bars of same size and material as bearing bars.

D. Do not notch bearing bars at supports to maintain elevation.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. The finish galvanizing of gratings, frames, and supports shall be applied after the required fabrication of assembly is complete.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 42 of 317

FOR

ded ded

BearinBearin

rossbar rossbarINFORMATON

SpSp

Surface: Surface:

a uniformuniford 1/4 d 1/4 in.in. ovo

p galvanizp galvani

ll be bandbe bandter of eacer of eac

icated, as cated, a

ONLYions indicons ind

penetratinpenetrati

r or morer or more


05 53 00 – 5

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The grating shall be received at the job site by the Contractor, unloaded, and protected from damage prior to the requirement for it to be installed.

B. Cutting, fitting, and placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting as required for installing gratings. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels.

C. Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details.

D. All grating shall be removable. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated.

E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areasand repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 43 of 317

FORanceance

grating shaating shape and sizpe and si

INFORMATON

nnectionnnection

EANIEANINGNG

Clean fieldClean fieldcomplyomply wwyy

ONN 05 53 5 53

ONLY


06 10 00 – 1

SECTION 06 10 00

CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Material and fabrication requirements for temporary work platforms for use in Tank Farms.





ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws – Inch Series

ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series)


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength


ASTM D5055 Standard Specification for Establishing and Monitoring Structural Capacities of Prefabricated Wood I-Joists

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 44 of 317

FORand genand ge1 Specificapecifi

ocumentcumenn thn t INFORMATON

is Sectis Secotherwiseotherwise

f MechaniMechan

SquarSqu

Wood ScreWood Scre

pecificatiopecificatiinc CncONLY

CoateCoate

ion for Zinion for Zinwareare

Carbonarb


06 10 00 – 2

ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples

C. APA-The Engineered Wood Association

Engineered Wood Construction Guide

D. Hanford Documents

DOE/RL-92-36 Hanford Site Hoisting and Rigging Manual

RPP-RPT-47003 Temporary Structures Wind Tie-Down Guide

E. International Code Council (ICC)

IBC Table 1607.1 and Chapter 23, Wood

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.


A. Deliver products bundled or crated to provide adequate protection during transit and job storage, with required grade marks clearly identifiable. Inspect wood products for damage upon delivery. Remove and replace damaged materials.

B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks, and under temporary coverings.

C. Protect sheet materials during handling to prevent breaking of corners and damage to surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER

A. Lumber shall consist of Douglas fir No. 2 (or better) structural joists and planks.

B. Lumber shall be exterior type for use in exterior locations.

C. All wood shall be fire-retardant-treated per IBC, Section 2303.2 or shall be treated with post treatment, exterior, clear drying, Class A fire retardant.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 45 of 317

FOR

atat

C

INFORMATON

AND HAND H

d or cratedor crateded grade md grade

veryvery. Rem. Rem

Protect f Protect fd, and oth and ot

under temnder temONLYnt t breakinbreaki


06 10 00 – 3

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated (Paragraph 3.1.D) that comply with requirements specified in this specification or manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Provide fasteners with hot-dip, zinc-coating per ASTM A153.

C. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.

F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

G. Metal framing fittings: Simpson Strong-Tie®6 or similar. Fittings shall have a minimum G90 zinc galvanized coating.

H. Post bases: Simpson Strong-Tie AB/ABA/ABE/ABU Adjustable and Standoff Post Bases or similar. Post bases shall have a minimum G90 zinc galvanized coating.

2.3 PLATFORM GRATING AND STAIR TREADS

A. Platform decking and stair treads shall be pultruded fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) with slip resistant walking surface, size I-6010 minimum. Color shall be gray or yellow.

B. FRP grating and stair treads shall be flame retardant in accordance ASTM E84 with a Class 1 flame spread index of less than 25.

C. Clips shall be stainless steel and of appropriate type for use with pultruded FRP grating and stair treads.

2.4 PIPE

A. Pipe shall be ASTM A53, Grade B.

2.5 CONCRETE BLOCKS

A. Concrete blocks in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.

B. Pier blocks shall be standard concrete precast type.

C. Ecology blocks shall be standard concrete precast type, minimum 2 ft x 2 ft x 3 ft (~1800 lb).

6 Simpson Strong-Tie is a registered trademark of Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc. Pleasanton, California.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 46 of 317

FOR

: S: Ss and, ws and, w

framing fiframing fm G90 zG90 zINFORMATON

ncnc

mpson Strompson Stroilar. Postlar. Po

STAIR TSTAIR

ds shall beds shall besurface, sirface, s

retardanretardan 252ONLY

e for use wfor use


06 10 00 – 4

2.6 WIRE ROPE AND HARDWARE

A. Wire rope and hardware in this section must meet the requirements of DOE/RL-92-36.

B. Wire rope shall be 3/8-in. IPS independent wire rope core (IWRC).

C. Turnbuckle shall be drop forged, hot dipped galvanized, jaw & jaw type, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.

D. Anchor shackles shall be screw pin type, galvanized, forged heat treated with allow pin, with a minimum allowable working load limit of 2,000 lbs.

E. Thimbles shall be heavy duty, galvanized thimbles, sized to fit wire rope.

F. Eye bolts shall be forged steel, hot dipped galvanized after threading (UNC), with hot dipped galvanized, heavy-hex nuts, with a minimum allowable load limit of 2,000 lbs. Use 3/4-in. diameter shaft maximum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Platform must be erected, altered, and dismantled by, or under the supervision of qualified personnel.

B. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.

D. Securely assemble rough carpentry work and attach to substrate by anchoring and fastening in accordance with IBC Table 2304.9.1, Fastening Schedule.

E. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.

F. Do not splice structural members between supports.

G. The spacing between uprights must not exceed 8 ft.

H. Each upright must be continuous (no butt joints with splice plates).

I. Adjacent uprights must be connected with horizontal bearers/ledgers to ensure that the unbraced vertical length of an upright does not exceed 8 ft.

J. For two story platforms or platforms with floor heights greater than 4 ft, the platform must be supported in two directions by a system of diagonal cross braces secured to the upright as close to the bearers/ledgers as possible.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 47 of 317

bleble

bolts shallts shalped galvaped galva

Use 3Use 3INFORMATON

44-

RAALL

altered,altered, an

ects that imts that i

lines, wines, wONLYh to substrto subst

stening Sctening S


06 10 00 – 5

K. The maximum floor height for any platform is 16 ft above grade.

L. Install/apply all materials and equipment per manufacturer’s instructions.

M. The overall length or width of any single level on a platform may not exceed 16 ft.

3.2 DIMENSIONS

A. Member must have minimum nominal dimensions as follows:

1. Uprights:

a. 4 in. x 4 in. for uprights up to 8-ft maximum floor height.

b. 6 in. x 6 in. for uprights between 8-ft and 16-ft maximum floor height.

2. Ledgers/Bearers: 2 in. x 12 in., 8-ft maximum span.

3. Joists:

a. 2 in. x 6 in., 8-ft maximum unsupported length.

b. 2 in. x 10 in., 12-ft maximum unsupported length.

c. 2 in. x 12 in.:

i. With 16-in. spacing or less, 16-ft maximum unsupported length.

ii. With spacing up to 24”, 14-ft maximum unsupported length.

4. Braces: 1 in. x 6 in. or 2 in. x 4 in.

5. Guardrail (top rail): The top rail shall consist of two members. 2 in. x 4 in. member, flush with the top of the vertical posts, 2 in. side up, with 2 in. x 6 in. member fastened to the top of each perimeter post and resting on the 2 in. x 4 in. top rail member, 6 in. side up.

6. Guardrail (intermediate rail): 2 in. x 4 in. Intermediate rail shall be fastened to posts on interior side of deck such that the platform worker loads will not create pullout loading on the fasteners.

7. Handrail: See STAIR FRAMING, Paragraph 3.4.

8. Toeboards: 1 in. x 4 in. (minimum).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 48 of 317

FORb.b.hh

gerge INFORMATON

s/Beares/Bea

6 in., 8in., 8--ft mft m

1212--ft maxft ma

cing or lesng or les

ONLY44-ft max-ft max


06 10 00 – 6

3.3 FLOOR JOIST FRAMING

A. Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1 1/2 in. of bearing on wood. Attach floor joists as follows:

1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors/hangers.

2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers or, by using metal joist hangers.

B. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to 1/6 depth of joist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 in. from top or bottom.

C. Provide solid blocking of 2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band.

D. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 in. or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-in. nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports.

E. Provide bridging between joists of type indicated below, at intervals of 96-in. o.c.

1. Form diagonal wood bridging from bevel cut 1 by 3-in. nominal size lumber, double-crossed and nailed both ends to joists.

F. Joists shall be spaced a maximum of 24-in. o.c.

3.4 STAIR FRAMING

A. Construct stairs as opposed to ladders or ramps for worker safety, decreased wind loading, and to minimize interference with surrounding equipment.

B. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with the following requirements:

1. Stringer Size: 2 by 12-in. nominal size minimum.

2. Notching: Notch stringers to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3 1/2 in. of effective depth.

3. Stringer Spacing: Two stringers for stair widths up to 24 in. Threestringers for stair width between 24 in. and 36 in. Four stringers for stair width between 36 in. and 48 in.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 49 of 317

FORom om

vide solid be solid bnless nailnless nai

INFORMATON

framing framingcurelyurely tie otie oyy

kness bykness by ddyy

en joen joists oists o

bridging fbridging fand nailedand nailed

2424-in. o.cin. o.c

ONLYfor workeror work

ding equiping equi

guration iguration irem


06 10 00 – 7

C. Provide stair framing that does not exceed the following variations between treads and risers within each flight:

1. Adjacent treads and risers: 3/16 in.

2. Between largest and smallest treads and risers: 3/8 in.

D. Stair treads shall be a minimum of 10 in. deep.

E. Stairways shall have a minimum clear width of 22 in.

F. Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal of between 30 and 50 degrees. Any uniform combination of rise/tread dimensions may be used that will result in a stairway at an angle to the horizontal within the permissible range.

G. All treads shall be reasonably slip-resistant and the nosings shall be of non-slip finish. Rise height and tread width shall be uniform (within tolerances provided above) throughout any flight of stairs including any foundation structure used as one or more treads of the stairs.

H. Stairway platforms shall be no less than the width of a stairway and a minimum of 30 in. in length measured in the direction of travel.

I. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to an overhead obstruction shall be at least 7 ft measured from the leading edge of the tread.

J. Handrails

1. Standard handrails shall be provided on the open sides of all exposed stairways and stair platforms. Handrails shall be provided on at least one side of closed stairways preferably on the right side descending.

2. Handrail shall consist of a lengthwise member mounted directly on a wall or partition by means of brackets attached to the lower side of the handrail so as to offer no obstruction to a smooth surface along the top and both sides of the handrail.

3. The handrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling. Handrails shall be graspable and shall have a diameter of at least 1.25 in. and not greater than 2 in. If the handrail is not circular, it shall have a perimeter dimension of at least 4 in and not greater than 6.25 in. with a maximum cross section dimension of 2.25 in. Edges shall have a minimum radius of 0.01 in.

4. The ends of the handrail should be turned in to the supporting frame or otherwise arranged so as not to constitute a projection hazard.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 50 of 317

FORrwarwa

treads shaads shaRise heigRise hei

roughoroughoINFORMATON

ut aut eads of eads o

s shall be s shall be ured in thed in th

nyny stair trstair yyeading edeading ed

ided on thded on drails shrails sh

ththONLYe right sright

ber mounter mounhe lower se lower

along thealong the


06 10 00 – 8

5. The height of handrails shall not be more than 34 in. nor less than 30 in. from upper surface of handrail to surface of tread in line with face of riser or to surface of ramp.

6. The mounting of handrails shall be such that the completed structure is capable of withstanding a load of at least 200 lbs applied in any direction at any point on the rail.

7. All handrails shall be provided with a clearance of not less than 1.5 in. between the handrail and any other object.

3.5 GUARDRAILS

A. A work platform 30 in. or more above grade level must have 42-in. guardrails around all parts of the platform (except stair opening).

B. Regardless of height, open-sided platforms above or adjacent to dangerous equipment shall be guarded with a standard railing and toe board.

C. A standard guardrail shall consist of top rail, intermediate rail, and posts, and shall have a vertical height of 42-in. nominal from upper surface of top rail to top of platform walking surface. The top rail shall be smooth-surfaced throughout the length of the railing. The intermediate rail shall be approximately halfway between the top rail and the platform. The ends of the rails shall not overhang the terminal posts except where such overhang does not constitute a projection hazard. The perimeter upright posts shall be incorporated into the guardrail.

D. The guardrail members shall be of rounded or other section that will furnish an adequate handhold for anyone grasping it to avoid falling.

E. Toe boards shall be provided wherever, beneath the open sides,

1. Person can pass,

2. There is moving machinery, or

3. There is equipment with which falling materials could create a hazard.

F. A standard toe board shall be 4-in. minimum in vertical height from its top edge to the platform walking surface. It shall be securely fastened in place and with not more than 1/4-in. clearance above floor level.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 51 of 317

FOR

ork pork pund all pund all p

less of heless of het shallhalINFORMATON

be gbe g

rdrail shaldrail shalght of 42ght of 42

facece. The Thehe intermee interm

e platformplatformuch overhch overh

osts shall bosts shall b

nded or otded or ot to avoid t to avoid

hONLYthe openhe open


06 10 00 – 9

3.6 OPENINGS IN THE WORK PLATFORM AREA

A. Openings in the work platform area may not exceed a diameter greater than 6 in. more than the diameter of the riser which protrudes through the platform area.

B. All other openings may not exceed 11 in. x 17 in. unless fall protection (gated if necessary) is constructed to surround the hole.

C. Openings in the floor which are not in use shall be covered with grating (I-6010) or board sufficient to support the designated live loads. The temporary floor cover must be conspicuously covered and shall not exceed 3/4 in. over the surrounding floor height in order to prevent a tripping hazard.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS

A. The structure base must consist of gravel (min. 3-in. deep) which extends at least 12 in. beyond the perimeter of the structure in all directions.

B. All upright posts must be set on a pier block (12-in. x 12-in. min. base) using a post base.

C. Install fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions using recommended clips. Hold-down clips shall be provided and spaced at a maximum of 4 ft apart with a minimum of four per piece of grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer. After fabrication, all cut ends, holes, and abrasions of FRP grating shall be sealed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, using a resin comparable to the grating resin.

D. Existing equipment.

1. Install the platform such that there is sufficient clearance between the platform and the equipment such that the equipment is accessible for modification, repair, adjustment, etc.

2. Existing equipment insulation may be removed provided that after the platform structure is installed, the insulation is reinstalled or an equivalent form of insulation is provided by the platform structure.

3. Care shall be taken to ensure that installation, removal, or regular use of the platform structure will not interfere or cause damage to the existing equipment.

E. Tie-Downs

1. Tie-downs shall be used at a minimum of four opposite corners of all structures that have a total height to width ratio (overall width – short side) greater than 1.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 52 of 317

ANEANE

structure ructurbeyeyond theond th

INFORMATON

sts must sts must

forced plarced plaons usingons using

maximum oximum d bd by the my the m

P grating P grating a resin comresin com

fONLYficient ccient equipmenequipmen

rovided rovided all


06 10 00 – 10

2. Tie-downs for temporary structures should follow RPP-RPT-47003.

3. Tie-downs shall consist of wire rope, turnbuckles, and anchor shackles.

4. Tie-downs shall be connected to corner post eye-bolts and to ecology blocks.

5. Eye-bolts shall be located as close as possible to, but lower than, the top floor rim joist.

6. Eye-bolts shall be placed through the center of the post, using washers and nuts as recommended by manufacturer.

7. Ecology blocks shall be placed:

a. Minimizing interference with surrounding equipment.

b. Minimizing interference with facility activities.

c. As close to the platform as possible.

d. Using one ecology block per tie-down.

3.8 ALLOWABLE LIVE LOADS

A. The allowable live loads are as follows:

1. Platform floor live load – 60 psf. On every platform assembly the allowable floor live load shall be applied in a conspicuous place. Such markings shall not be removed or defaced.

2. Stair live load.

a. 100 psf.

b. 300 lb concentrated load at center of tread.

3. Handrail live load

a. 50 plf applied at any direction at the top handrail.

b. 200 lb at any point at top of rail or stanchion.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 53 of 317

FOR

EE

a.a

MMINFORMATON

inin

As clAs close tose t

one ecolne eco

follows:follows

psf. On epsf. On ee applied applied

defaced.efaced.ONLY


07 92 00 – 1

SECTION 07 92 00

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces.

B. Sealant and backing materials.

1.2 REFERENCES


A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 40, Protection of Environment – Part 59

National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products


ASTM C920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM C1330 Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants

ASTM D6690 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements

ASTM D994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.


1. Catalog Data: Unless specified on the design media, submitManufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including, preparation instructions and recommendations, storage and handling requirements and recommendations, as well as installation methods.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 54 of 317

FOR

EE

wing documing docuated in thited in thi

nless othnless oINFORMATON

al Regulatal Regulat

n of f99 SS

M))

stomeric Jmeric J

SpecificaSpecifice with Cowith CONLY

ation for Jtion forncrete and ncrete and

r Preformr Preformuminum


07 92 00 – 2


A. Installer qualifications: Trained and/or experienced in the application of the use of sealants to be used.

B. Source limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Comply with the Contract Statement of Work.

B. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging, with labels intact, until ready for installation.

C. Store products off ground; if stored on roof, do not exceed structural capacity of deck.

D. Store materials at minimum of 68°F for at least 24 hours prior to installation, regardless of temperature at location.

E. Do not allow materials to freeze prior to application.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: – Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for volatile organic compound content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Sealant: Polysulphide base, single component, chemical curing; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstand movement up to 20 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range to 40 –80°F; Shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.

C. Sealant: Polysulphide base, two component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 55 of 317

FORy fory fo

e productsproduct

lINFORMATON

s at mins at mmperaturemperature

als to freezto freez

ITUTIONTUTIO

for substitor substi

ONLYprimers tprimers

ntent whenntent whe


07 92 00 – 3

joints; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining and nonbleeding.

D. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, solvent curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

E. Sealant: Silicone base, single component, chemical curing; capable of withstanding movement of up to 50 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

F. Sealant: Polyurethane base, multi-component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; uniform, homogeneous, and free from lumps, skins, and coarse particles when mixed; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding.

G. Sealant: Polyurethane base, single component, chemical curing; self-leveling type for application in horizontal joints or nonsagging type for application in vertical joints; capable of being continuously immersed in water, withstanding movement of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 15 minimum and 50 maximum; nonstaining; nonbleeding of up to 25 percent of joint width and being satisfactorily applied throughout a temperature range of 40 – 80°F; shore A hardness of 50 maximum; nonstaining.

H. Use either of the following for a concrete sealant.

1. Sealant: Hot poured, synthetic rubber or polymer-based asphalt, in accordance with ASTM D6690 or equal.

2. Sealant: Cold-applied, two-part liquid neoprene, or equal.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint-forming materials.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 56 of 317

FORlied thlied thximum; nximum; n

Poly Polyureuryytion o INFORMATON

n horn hoof being of beingent of jointt of join

of 40of 40 –– 8080cles whenles when

nonbleedinonbleedi

ngle compngle comjoints or njoints or n

inuouslynuously iyywidth and idth and

°F; shorF; shorof uf uONLY

p to 25p to 2ature rangture ran


07 92 00 – 4

C. Joint Filler: ASTM C1330 or ASTM D994; round, type as recommended bysealant manufacturer; oversized 30 to 50 percent.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, ensure that joint dimensions and physical and environmental conditions are suitable for application of joint sealers.

B. By beginning the Work of this Section, Subcontractor warrants it has examined and verified that existing conditions are in accordance with provisions of Paragraph 3.1.A.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and size joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter that might impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Verify that joint-shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

C. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.

D. To allow sealants to perform properly, use joint filler to achieve required joint depths.

E. Use bond breaker where required.

F. Before applying coating system or filler to concrete surfaces, perform a plastic sheet test in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.”

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install sealant per manufacturer’s instructions within specified shelf life.

B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges.

C. Tool Joints as indicated on Drawings.

D. Joints: Free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

E. Coverage: Replace sealants that fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion onto surfaces applied or that do not cure. If the sealant can be detached from a surface

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 57 of 317

FOR

eginegind verifiedd verified

graph 3.1aph 3.1

NN INFORMATON

and size jand size je materialse materials

materials amaterials

ize materize mater

use joint fise joint

ONLYurfaces, perfaces, p””


07 92 00 – 5

by rubbing the surface contact point with a finger, than the surface adhesion is inadequate.

F. Follow manufacturer’s recommended cure time before painting or overcoating.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 58 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


09 91 00 – 1

SECTION 09 91 00

PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL




A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

ASTM D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture Content in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

B. Sherwin-Williams®7

MACROPOXY® 646Fast Cure Epoxy Product Sheet 4.5.3.

Zinc Clad®7 IV (85) Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.

SEAGUARD®7 MP Multi-Purpose Epoxy Primer Product Sheet 9.36.

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush-Off Blast Off Cleaning

SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near White Blast Cleaning

1.2 SUBMITTALS



7 Sherwin-Williams, MACRPOXY, SEAGUARD, and Zinc Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 59 of 317

FOR

n un u

TM IInternnter

42425858INFORMATON

MACROMACRheet 4.5.3heet 4.5.3

lad®ad®7 IV7 IV

D®®77 MPMP9.363ONLY


09 91 00 – 2

1. List of materials: Unless specified on the design media, before delivery, submit complete list of materials, colors, and location to be used. List shall enumerate percentage of volatile and nonvolatile materials and percentage of component parts of each type of material and the conversion factors to determine dry film thickness from applied wet film thickness.

2. Dry film thickness test results as required by Paragraph 3.6.A.

C. Approval Not Required: None.


A. See Division 01 – General Requirements.


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for general requirements. Store materialsindoors.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General: Ensure that surfaces are dry and have attained required temperatures and conditions before starting work or continuing previously started work.

B. Weather: No exterior work shall be performed on unprotected surfaces if rain or moisture from other sources is present or expected before applied finishes can dry or attain proper cure.

C. Dust: No finishes shall be applied if dust is being generated at worksite.

D. Temperature

1. Unless recommended otherwise by paint manufacturer, apply coatings when the following temperatures exist.

Ambient SurfaceCoating Temperature Temperature

Epoxy As recommended by manufacturer

2. If necessary, provide temporary heat until specified temperatures exist for required time periods. Maintain temporary heat for 24 hours after paint application.

E. Humidity: Follow manufacturer’s directions for extremes.

F. Ventilation: Provide ventilation recommended for extremes.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 60 of 317

FOR RY, STORY, STO

e Contract Contrac

INFORMATON

IONSONS

t surfaces urfaces ng work ong work

shall be peshall be pepresent or resent or

st is beingt is bein

ONLYanufacturenufactur


09 91 00 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Deleted.

B. Deleted.

C. Furnish Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646 Fast Cure Epoxy, Part A (B58-600) and Part B (B58V600).

D. Furnish Sherwin-Williams ZINC CLAD IV Coating, Part U (B69A8) and Part V(B69V8).

E. Furnish Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP Multi-Purpose Epoxy Primer, Part A (N12Y200) and Part B (N12V200).

F. Furnish appropriate applicators per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of work, and which cannot be corrected through specified preparation.

B. Report in writing to TOC Construction Representative conditions that may affect proper application of finish. Correct unsuitable conditions before beginning surface preparation or coating application.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection

1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to protect surfaces adjacent to areas being painted. Keep spatter, smears, droppings, and over-run of paint materials to a minimum and remove as painting work progresses.

2. Promptly remove spills, splashes and splatter. Use removal methods which do not damage surfaces being cleaned/painted.

3. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by painting work as directed by TOC Construction Representative.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 61 of 317

FOR6060

nish Sherh She88). ).

rwrwINFORMATON

nn--WilWid Part B (Nd Part B (N

applicatorplicato

ve coatingve coatingity of wory of wo

ONLYntativetative coc

nditions bnditions b


09 91 00 – 4

4. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface hardware, fittings, fastening, and similar items before starting work.

B. New Surface Preparation

1. Deleted.

2. Carbon Steel

a. Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish sytems in accordance with SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2.

3. Stainless Steel

a. Prepare surfaces for scheduled finish sytems in accordance with SSPC-SP 7/ NACE No. 4

4. Obtain written approval from TOC Construction Representative before using dry or liquid abrasive blasting.

C. Deleted.

D. Old Surface Prepration

1. Prepare touch up area for scheduled touch-up system in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and this Section.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste materials. Collect materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents and place in containers.

B. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths, brushes, tools, and equipment from site.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Paint and Finish

1. Carbon Steel: Light and ordinary exposures (not galvanized)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 62 of 317

SS

a.aSS

ii INFORMATON

writtenwritteryy or liquior liquiyy

or schedulor schedul

rer’er’ONLYinstrinstr

r disposalr disposaloil, oril


09 91 00 – 5

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams ZINC CLAD. Shop apply 1 coat. Coat should be 3 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instuctions.

b. Top Coat: Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Stainless Steel indoors

a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Shop apply 1 coat. Coat should be 2-3 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instuctions.

b. Top Coat: Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Touch-Up

a. Sherwin-Williams MACROPOXY 646. Field apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness. Apply per manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Stainless Steel Pre-fabricated Heat-Traced and Insulated Pipe Spools for Above Grade Piping Runs as Specified on the Drawings

a. Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Shop apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness.

5. Stainless Steel outdoors, above and below grade

a. Sherwin-Williams SEAGUARD MP. Field apply 2 coats. Coats should be 5-6 mils in thickness.

3.6 DELETED.

3.7 DELETED.

3.8 DELETED.


A. Measure the Wet Film Thickness (WFT) of each coat of material with a notched WFT gage (Nordson®8 790-015) at a minimum of five evenly spaced points for each 100 ft2 of surface area or portion thereof to verify the application will

8 Nordson is a registered trademark of Nordson Corporation, Westlake, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 63 of 317

FOR b.b.

mm

INFORMATON

UpUp

erwinrwin--WilWilshould behould be

ons. ns.

bricated bricated HHns as Specns as Spec

AGUARDAGUARDkness. kness.

ll ONLYw gradew grad

P. Field ap Field a


09 91 00 – 6

provide the specified minimum dry film thickness. Document results in workpackage or fabrication documentation.

B. Inspection and testing will be performed by Quality Control Inspector.

C. Deleted.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 64 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


09 96 00 – 1

SECTION 09 96 00

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems on concrete substrates, vertical and horizontal surfaces.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American Standard for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM D4258 Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating

B. Master Painters Institute (MPI)

Architectural Painting Specification Manual

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)

SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning

SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Product Data: Before delivery, for each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

2. Deleted.

3. Unless specified by design media, submit complete list of colors.

4. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 65 of 317




for TestinTesti

SurfaSurf

ectural Paectural Pa

ONLYingng

aninganing


09 96 00 – 2

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Field Quality Control inspection and test reports. See Paragraph 1.5.B.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Use manufacturers and products listed in MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual, approved product list.

B. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be included in the work package or fabrication document as applicapable.

Document Paragraph

Container Inspection Results 3.5.A

Film Thickness Results 3.5.B


A. See the Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers.

C. Storage: Maintain materials in clean and dry condition. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

E. Obtain inspection and acceptance by Quality Control Inspection before opening containers or removing labels. See Paragraph 3.5.A.

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Ventilation: Provide during and after application to meet applicable safety and health regulations.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 66 of 317

FOR

eraeras Sections Sectiolicapableapable.

ocumenocumeR

INFORMATON

Iner Inspecner Inspec

ess ResulResu

HANDLHANDL

Work for aWork for a

original,original, uu

drydry condcondyy ONLYnspection bspection b


09 96 00 – 3

1.9 EXTRA MATERIAL

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

See the Contract Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cloverdale Paint.

2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.

3. Sherwin-Williams®9 Company (The).

2.3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in “MPI Approved Products List.”

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated.

2. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.

C. Coating Chemistry: Provide materials that are chloride and PCB free.

2.4 BLOCK FILLERS/SEALER

A. Concrete filler/sealer, Epoxy: MPI #116.

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, Epoxy block Filler, 83065.

2. PPG; Aquapon®10, Epoxy Block Filler, 97-685.

3. Sherwin-Williams; KEM CATI-COAT®9 HS Epoxy Filler/Sealer, B42 Series.

9 Sherwin-Williams, KEM CATI-COAT, and Tile Clad are registered trademarks of Swimc, Inc., Newark, Delaware.10 Aquapon is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 67 of 317

FORuctsucts

followifollowi

CloverdaCloverd

AAINFORMATON

rchitectrchite

WilliamsWilliams®

OATINGOATING

oducts thatducts throducts Lroducts L

ach coatinach coatiatedtedONLY

r each coar each coa

and PCBand PCB


09 96 00 – 4

2.5 EPOXY COATINGS

A. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77.

1. Cloverdale Paint; High Performance, ClovaCoat 300, 83300.

2. PPG; Aquapon 35, Aquapon 35 Polyamide-Epoxy Gloss, 95 Series.

3. Sherwin-Williams; Tile-Clad®9 HS Epoxy, B62WZ111/B60VX70.

B. Chemical Unloading Concrete Pad Coating.

1. KCC Containment Linings; Elasti-Liner V.

2. KCC Containment Linings; E 3.3 Epoxy Based Primer.

3. Epoxy Scratch Coat.

2.6 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE

A. Paint Finish Coat Admixture.

1. Rust-Oleum; Epoxy Shield, Aluminum Oxide Powder.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive coatings and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements and for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence, and quality of Work, and which cannot be corrected through specified preparation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before application, sweep and dust space or area to receive coating.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual” applicable to substrates indicated.

C. Fill holes, cracks, recessed pockets, in concrete with manufacturer’s recommended materials compatible with concrete substrate to produce even surface for application of systems and to prevent entrapment of process-related contaminates; fill material(s) shall be cementitious-based unless otherwise approved.

1. A polymer concrete consisting of a mixture of specified filler and concrete surfacers formulated in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations or a similar premixed product may be used to repair gravel pockets, large

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 68 of 317

FORKCK

EpoxEpoxy y SS

T ST INFORMATON

URFAURFA

t AdmixtuAdmixt

Epoxpoxy y ShieShie

e coatings oatingss and for s and for

f WorWoONLY

k, ank, an

ve coaticoa


09 96 00 – 5

shrinkage cracks, etc. Coating system application may be initiated after polymer concrete manufacturer’s recommended curing time. Polymer concrete shall be compatible with coating system being applied.

2. Apply specified filler and concrete surfacers in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Remove or protect hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

E. Concrete Substrates:

1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk.

2. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Concrete shall be allowed to cure at least 14 days before coating is applied; maximum moisture content of concrete, when measured with an electronic moisture meter shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Clean concrete surfaces of laitance, oil, stains, dust, and other foreign material.

1. Where laitance has not been removed, treat concrete with uniform application of 1 part 10% solution muriatic acid and 3 parts water or 5% solution of trisodium phosphate.

2. When solution ceases to foam, rinse concrete surface thoroughly with clean water while scrubbing with stiff bristle brush. Remove and dispose of waste solution in accordance Contract Statement of Work. Allow treated area to thoroughly dry.

3. As an alternative to 1. and 2. above, remove laitance and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or SP 6. Clean surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4258.

G. Protection

1. Provide and install drop cloths, shields, and other protective devices to protect surfaces adjacent to areas being coated. Keep spatter, smears, droppings, and over-run of coating materials to minimum and remove as coating work progresses.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 69 of 317

FORncrete Suncrete Su

Remove rRemove

INFORMATON

coat surcoat surxceeds thxceeds th

ll be allowbe allowum moistuum moistu

meter shmeter s

, oil, stainoil, stain

oved, treaoved, treamuriaticmuriatiONLY

ac

e surface e surfacerush. Remrush. Re

nt of Wont of Wo


09 96 00 – 6

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply coating materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations in “MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.”

1. Use applicators and equipment recommended by manufacturer using techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

B. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, or other surface imperfections.

D. Chemical Unloading Concrete Pad Coating:

1. Prepare concrete surface with brush blast.

2. Apply E3.3 Primer, 3 – 5 wet mils.

3. Apply Epoxy Scratch Coat to imperfections and defects for smooth surface.

4. Apply Elasti-Liner V.

a. Apply Elasti-Liner V basecoat, 20 wet mils.

b. Apply Elasti-Liner V topcoat, 2-40 wet mil coats.

c. Allow for a tack free cure between coats.

5. Final dry film thickness is 40 mils dry.

3.4 SLIP RESISTANT SURFACE ADDITIVE

A. Mix slip-resistive surface additive into the final topcoat at rate recommended by the additive manufacturer.

1. Install at location indicated on Drawings to receive surface treatment.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect special protective coating containers to ensure material complies with Specification requirements and manufacturer’s recommendations. Document container inspection results in work package or fabrication document as applicable.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 70 of 317

FORemical Uemical U

Prepare cPrepare

INFORMATON

E3.3 PrE3.3 P

oxy Scratcxy Scratc

V.V.

ner V basener V base

topcoat, 2opcoat, 2

between tween ONLYrate reate


09 96 00 – 7

B. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer’s written recommendations.

3. Document dry film thickness measurements in work package or fabrication document as applicable.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Furnish and maintain at Site, closed metal containers for disposal of waste materials. Place materials spotted or soaked with paint, oil, or solvents in containers. Remove flammable waste from jobsite daily.

B. Thoroughly clean brushes, rollers, spatulas, other tools, and spray equipment after each use. Cleaned tools and equipment shall contain no oils, thinners, and other residue.

C. Remove empty cans from site at end of each shift.

D. At completion of coating work, remove materials, containers, rags, cloths, brushes, tools, and equipment from site. Report all spills immediately.

E. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coating by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

F. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application.

G. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates: Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces:

1. Epoxy System:

a. Prime Coat: Epoxy Filler/Sealer, MPI #116.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, gloss, MPI #77.

c. Topcoat: Epoxy gloss, MPI #77.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 71 of 317

FORrnish andrnish anderials. Plaals. Pla

ers. Remers. Rem

INFORMATON

ean brusean brusned tools aned tools a

m site at m site at

rk, removek, removeom site. Rom site. R

clean spaclean spmethods. Dethods. D

ONLYm coating m coating

, touch up, touch


13 34 19 – 1

SECTION 13 34 19

METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and erect pre-engineered metal buildings, including foundation, electrical, and ventilation as indicated on the drawings and described herein. The intent of this Specification is to provide a single source responsibility for the design, manufacture, erecting, warrant, and testing of the complete building systems. The building will house miscellaneous process heating and compressed air equipment. Work under this Section includes the following:

1. Pre-engineered structural steel framework.

2. Wall framing and girts.

3. Roof framing and purlins.

4. Exterior roof panels.

5. Miscellaneous roof-mounted supports for Buyers Equipment.

6. Exterior metal wall panels.

7. Gutters and downspouts.

8. Partial height interior liner panels.

9. Standard accessories and trim for pre-engineered metal building including eave trim, ridge trim, door trim, corner trim, sealants, weather stripping, etc.

10. HVAC system design.

11. Insulation system for pre-engineered metal building (walls and roof).

12. Exterior doors (3).

13. Overhead doors (2).

14. Foundation design.

15. Duct supporting elements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 72 of 317

FOR

he dhe dlding sylding sypressed aiessed ai

e-enginengiINFORMATON

eeee

aminming andg and

g and purlind purli

ls.l

unted suppunted supp

ONLYered metaled metallants, wealants, wea


13 34 19 – 2

16. Wall-Mounted Louvers.

17. Certified Material Test Reports.

B. Engineering Certification: The building foundation and building design and analysis shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Washington. The stamped work shall include complete calculations for the building, its components, erection drawings and details, and building column reaction loads for foundation design. Calculations shall account for concentrated loads, equipment, and fixtures shown on the drawings and specified herein.

C. Conflicts:

1. Identification of Conflicts: Should conflicts exist between this Specification, attached drawings, and other referenced documents, they shall be brought to the attention of the Buyer, in writing, prior to proceeding with any work. The Buyer shall issue confirming documentation if needed for clarification.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”

2. Section 05 53 00, “Metal Gratings.”

3. Section 06 10 00, “Carpentry.”

4. Section 09 96 00, “High-Performance Coatings.”

5. Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

E. Building Drawings:

1. H-14-110019, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Grading Plan.”

2. H-14-110022, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval General Elevations.”



5. H-14-110024, Sh. 1, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural Foundation Plan.”

6. H-14-110024, Sh. 2, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Conc. Slab Details.”

7. H-14-110024, Sh. 3, Rev. 0, “A/AX Infrastructure Civil/Structural Foundation Details.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 73 of 317

FOR

IISpecSpecshall beshall beproceoceedinedi

cumemINFORMATON

tatitat

s:

00, 0 “ConCon

Metal GraMetal Gra

entryentry.”.”

ormance rmance C

FillFill.”.”ONLYGrading PGrading

eral Era


13 34 19 – 3

8. H-14-110024, Sh. 4, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Sump Details.”

9. H-14-110024, Sh. 5, Rev. 0, “A/AX Retrieval Civil/Structural Details.”

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts – August 1, 2014

AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel Buildings

AISC Steel Design Guide Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Series 3 Steel Buildings

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

AISI S100 North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA)

AMCA 99 Standards Handbook

AMCA Publication 204 Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans

AMCA Standard 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating


AWS QC1 Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 74 of 317

FOR merican merican I

INFORMATON

Guide SideSteSt

itute (AIitute (A S

th AmericAmericormed Stormed St

CE)E) ONLYLLoads foroads fo

ement anement an


13 34 19 – 4

F. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)

Handbook—Fundamentals

ASHRAE Standard 52.2- Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-2010 Cleaning Devices for Removal Efficiency by

Particle Size

ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

G. ASTM International (ASTM)


ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A325 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

ASTM A529 Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality


ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel


ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A992 Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 75 of 317

FOR

M M AA

TM A307A30

55 INFORMATON

StaStStructStru

tandard Spandard SpSeamless eamless

and Shapand Sha

ecificatiocificatiel ol ONLY

of Strucf Stru

on for Carbn for Car

gh S


13 34 19 – 5

ASTM A1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution-Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

ASTM C991 Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Insulation for Metal Buildings

ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers

ASTM F844 Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use

ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 ksi Yield Strength

ASTM F1852 Standard Specification for “Twist off” Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies

H. American Welding Society (AWS)

AWS A2.4 Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination



AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

I. International Accreditation Service, Inc. (IAS)

Quality Certification Program

J. International Code Council (ICC)


K. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA)

Metal Building Systems Manual, 2010 Edition

L. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 76 of 317

FOR TM TM F84F84

55454 INFORMATON

TTAssAs

AWS)AWS)

dard Syard Symbmbyyytructive Etructive

elding Celding ONLY

Cod

g Code Code –– S

odeode


13 34 19 – 6

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code

M. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National Association (SMACNA)

HVACMF HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible

N. Steel Door Institute (SDI)

SDI 100 Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames

O. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies

P. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE)

DOE G 414.1-3 Suspect/Counterfeit Items Guide for Use with 10 CFR 830 Subpart A – Quality Assurance Requirements, and DOE O 414.1C – Quality Assurance

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Proposal Submittals

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature and technical data.

2. Product Data: For each type of Metal Building System component. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finished for the following:

a. Structural wall panels.

b. Metal roof panels.

c. Metal wall panels.

d. Metal liner panels.

e. Insulation System.

f. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Description of proposed approach to HVAC design and proposed equipment.

g. Overhead roll-up doors.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 77 of 317

FOR580580

Departmenepartmen

11 INFORMATON

Work for tWork for t

re and tee and teONLYuilding Silding Sy

iptions, diiptions, dhed for theed for th


13 34 19 – 7

h. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, provide complete set of color chips representing manufacturer’s full range of available colors and patterns.

3. Certificates

a. Manufacturer: IAS Quality Certification:

i. IAS certificate showing name and address of manufacturer, effective date, and category of certification. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.1.)

b. Erector: IAS Quality Certification:

i. IAS certificate showing name and address of erector, effective date, and category of certification, or, in lieu of IAS certification, documentation of past 5 years’experience record to include project name, location, date of completion, building manufacturer, and contact name and phone number. (See Paragraph 1.5.A.2.)

c. HVAC Contractor:

i. Documentation of current Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) certifications for those engineers/technicians in responsible charge of the work under this scope.

C. Approvals Required Prior to Work Submittals

1. Structural Design Analysis Calculation(s) for the metal building including design loads and design criteria. Design calculation shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.

2. Submit anchor bolt placement plan and column reactions and base plate details in advance of erection drawings.

3. Structural foundation analysis and design calculation, signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer.

4. HVAC system equipment and duct design calculations and drawings bearing the seal and signature of a Registered Professional Engineer responsible for the system design.

5. Shop Drawings:

a. Bear seal and signature of Registered Professional Engineer responsible for system design.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 78 of 317

INFORMATON

phopho

C ContracContrac

umentatiomentaC) or NatioC) or Nati

ertificatioertificatiocharge of tharge of t

mittalsmittals

( ONLY) for thefor thcalculationcalculation

rr

actions actions


13 34 19 – 8

b. Complete erection drawings with identification and assembly of building components indicating: assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections, attachments, openings, cambers, and loads wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchorages and method of anchorage installation, and include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, trim, flashings, closures and special details, distinguishing between factory- and field-assembled work; framing anchor bolt settings, and locations from datum, indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols, distinguishing between shop and field applications; indicate net weld lengths.

c. Show structural design basis information, and materials specification information.

d. Show wall-mounted items including doors and louvers.

e. Accessory Drawings and installation details: Include details of the following items:

i. Flashing and Trim.

ii. Gutters.

iii. Downspouts.

iv. Details to be used around piping penetrations.

v. Louvers, ducting, HVAC equipment, duct supporting elements.

f. Door Schedule: For doors and frames. Include details of reinforcement.

g. Structural foundation drawings and details showing reinforcement footing and stem wall details.

6. Material Certification

a. Submit Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): covering the chemical and physical properties for the following materials:

i. Structural Steel.

ii. High-strength bolts, including nuts and washers.

iii. Unfinished bolts and nuts.

iv. Weld material.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 79 of 317

FOR d.d

INFORMATON

AccesAccefollowinfollowin

FlashinFlashi

utters.ters.

pouts.outs.

used arouused arou

HVAC eqHVAC eq

ONLYames. mes. IncIn

s showinshowin


13 34 19 – 9

7. Submit detailed HVAC test and balance procedures, including test conditions for systems to be tested, prior to beginning the work.

8. Balancing and test report following completion of system adjustments including test results, adjustments, and rebalancing procedures.

D. Information Only Submittals

1. Instructions and Maintenance Manuals:

a. Manufacturer’s written instructions for shipping, handling, storage, and protection.

b. Manufacturer’s erection or installation instructions for building and components. Indicate preparation requirements and proper sequence of installation.

c. Maintenance Data: for metal panel finishes, to include in maintenance manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Buyer: The party who awards the contract to the Contractor.

B. Installation Contractor: The party responsible for the labor, equipment, testing, and building erection.

C. Manufacturer: The party responsible for the complete and integrated pre-engineered metal building system including: labor, equipment, design, furnishing of components and accessories, fabrication, examination, testing, and warrant of a complete building system.

D. Primary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any built-up, hot-rolled, or cold-form columns or framing systems which transfer their loads directly to the structure’s foundation.

E. Secondary Structural Framing or Members: Refers to any cold-form, hot-rolled, or built-up purlins, girts, struts, bracing, or beams which transfer their loads from the cladding to the primary structural framing or members to which they attach.


A. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:

a. The Company manufacturing the products specified in this Section shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience in the manufacture of Metal Building Systems of similar to that specified.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 80 of 317

FOR

bb

MMINFORMATON

ainaimaintemaint

awards theawards th

partparty respy resp

for the cofor the cding: laboing: lab

, examinexamiONLYo anyany builbuilyy

their loadtheir loa


13 34 19 – 10

b. As a manufactured product, the design, detailing, and fabrication of the pre-engineered metal building shall be performed by or under the direct supervision of a Registered Professional Engineer in the state of Washington, who is a permanent full-time employee of the manufacturer of the pre-engineered metal building.

c. The metal building systems manufacturer shall be accredited under the International Accreditation Service, (IAS) “Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems (AC472).”

d. Member of the MBMA.

2. Installation Contractor Qualifications:

a. Acceptable to and approved by manufacturer.

b. All workmen and their supervisors shall have specialized experience in the erection of Metal Building Systems similar to that specified, for a period of at least 5 years documented, and approved by the manufacturer.

c. Erector shall employ persons trained for installations of metal buildings.

3. Certificate of design and manufacture conformance:

a. Metal building system manufacturer shall submit written certification prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, registered to practice in the state of Washington verifying that building system design and metal roof system design (including panels, clips, and support system components) meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Certification shall reference specific dead loads, live loads, snow loads, wind loads/speeds, tributary area load reductions (if applicable), concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads, end-use categories, governing code bodies, including year, and load applications.

c. Certificate shall be on metal building system manufacturer’s letterhead.

4. HVAC Contractor

a. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing adjusting and balancing of HVAC equipment and systems.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 81 of 317

FOR InIn

a.a

AINFORMATON

ll wll wexperienexperiehat specifihat specifi

roved boved by ty t

hall emplohall emplo

manufamanufactct

manufactmanufacsigned bsigned byy

state oftate oONLY

Wl roof sroof syycomponenomponen

uthorities hthorities h

loads, liloads, lire


13 34 19 – 11

b. Certification by AABC of NEBB for testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC systems.

c. Perform work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer or NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor.

5. Qualification of Welding Personnel and Procedures

a. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall have been qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1 prior to welding. Maintain copy of welding procedure specifications (WPSs), procedure qualification records (PQRs), and welder performance qualification test results at jobsite.

b. Visual welding inspection methods shall be used for verification of weld quality as outlined by AWS D1.1, Paragraph 6.9, with Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria, in Table 6.1.

c. Qualification of Welding Inspectors: Welding inspectors shall be AWS Certified Welding Inspectors qualified and certified in accordance with AWS QC1.

6. Materials

a. The manufacturer shall ensure that no suspect or counterfeit parts or components are provided in conjunction with this procurement. Suspect/counterfeit items are described in Appendices 4 and 5 of DOE G 414.1-3.

b. CMTRs in accordance with Paragraphs 2.2.A.3, 2.2.A.5, and 2.2.C.4.


A. See Contract Statement of Work for additional general requirements.

B. Protect building components and accessories from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

C. Deliver to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with product name, manufacturer, type, and grade.

D. Store off the ground (e.g., on wood blocking or pallets) and protect with impervious covering. Protect from rusting and damage or permanent distortion.

E. Protect finish of metal panels during storage, handling, and installation by application of removable plastic film or other suitable material placed between

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 82 of 317

FOR b.b

wwIINFORMATON

nspenspe

QualificatiQualificatiWS CertifieS Certifie

ance withnce with

r shall ensr shall ensrovided inrovided in

ms are desare des

ONLYgraphs 2raphs 2

ire


13 34 19 – 12

panels. Do not allow panels to come in contact with other material that would result in scratching, denting, staining, or other damage to the panel finish.

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The following site features and adjacent structures shall be considered in the design/construction as appropriate:

1. This Building is approximately 40 ft away from Building 242A-BA and approximately 15 ft from the associated diesel storage tank, to the south of the Building, as shown on Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.

2. Electrical transformer equipment will be located to the east of the building. See Drawing H-14-110019, Sheet 1.

1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The metal building shall be clear span, rigid frame steel structure with tapered columns and roof beams, gable roof, without interior columns.

B. Minimum Roof Slope: 1 in. in 12 in. (1:12)

C. Building Dimensions/Bay Spacing/Eave Height: As indicated on the Drawings.

D. The building shall be designed by the manufacturer as a complete system. All components of the system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

1. Primary Framing System: Primary framing shall consist of transverse rigid frames of rafters and columns with solid webs. The rigid frame shall be fabricated of shop-welded steel plate sections, tapered columns, and roof beams, complete with necessary splice plates, factory drilled for bolted field assembly as specified in this Section.

2. Beam and Post Endwall Frames: Endwall corner posts and endwall roof beams, manufacturer’s standard, as required by design criteria (building will not be expandable).

3. Secondary framing shall consist of purlins, girts, eave struts, flange braces, and sag angles as required by design.

4. Lateral Bracing: manufacturer’s standard to accommodate horizontal loads not resisted by main frame action in the sidewall, endwall, and roof. Cables and/or wire rope bracing shall not be used.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 83 of 317

aathe the

ElectricaElectricauilding.ildingINFORMATON

SeS

TION ION

hall be clell be cles, gable ros, gable r

in 12 in 12 in.in ((

g/Eave HeEave He

manufacturanufactud byby the theyy ONLY

ing shall cng shalllid webs. d webs.

ns, taperens, tapers, factorys, factory


13 34 19 – 13

5. Wall System: Preformed steel panels, trim and accessories, with insulation as specified in this Section.

6. Roof Purlins: manufacturer’s standard zee purlins mounted on top of structural frame members.

7. Roof System: Standing-seam roof panels with insulation, as specified in this Section, Paragraph 2.3.

8. Interior liner panels.

9. Soffit panels.

10. Accessories: Building louvers, overhead doors, walk-in doors, hardware, sealers, gutters, and downspouts.

1.10 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance

1. Provide metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads within the limits and conditions indicated.

2. Size and fabricate wall and roof system free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

B. Building Design Requirements

1. Applicable Building Code: The IBC, as amended by DOE, the State of Washington, and local agencies. The occupancy category is IV (seismic design category D) as defined in IBC and shall be designed as performance category 2 (PC-2) structure for safety significant service.

2. Architectural/Code Data:

a. The occupancy of the building as defined in IBC is: F-1, Factory Industrial.

b. Construction Classification: Type IIB, Non-combustible.

c. Required Fire Resistance Ratings: None.

d. Fire Protection: None/Not Required.

e. Fire Extinguishers: Provided by others.

f. Exit Lighting: Provided by others.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 84 of 317

FORAAsealseal

QUIREMQUIREM

INFORMATON

ormancorman

etal buildetal buildand the fond the fo

ll and rooll and roce or perfoe or perfo

C, as amC, as amoccocONLY

cupancupancd shall be shall b

r safetsafety sigy s


13 34 19 – 14

3. Fabrication of structural members shall be in accordance with MBMA, and for items not covered therein, AISC 360.

4. Snow Load:

a. Ground Snow Load (Pg): 15 pounds per square foot.

b. Exposure Coefficient (Ce): C.

c. Importance Factor (I): 1.00.

5. Minimum Roof Live Load: 20 pounds per square foot. Live load reduction not permitted.

6. Building System Dead Load: Shall be the weight of the Metal Building System and as determined by the building system manufacturer.

7. Collateral Loads: The Contractor shall state the allowable collateral loads for roof purlins and secondary framing, and primary rigid frames (the weight of any non-moving equipment or material, such as ceilings, electrical or mechanical equipment, sprinkler, conduit, etc.).

a. Metal building design shall include the Buyers Pipe/Conduit Support Beams as shown in Figure 9. See Paragraph 1.10.B.15.

8. Wind Load:

a. IBC/ASCE 7:

i. Basic Wind Speed: 115 miles per hour (3-second gust).

ii. Exposure Category (Ce): C.

iii. Project-Specific Importance Factor (I): 1.0.

iv. Enclosed building.

b. All Members, including secondary roof and wall members, shall be designed for component and cladding net wind pressures as determined by ASCE 7.

i. Secondary roof members shall be designed for a minimum 20 psf net component and cladding uplift pressure.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 85 of 317

FORBuiBuiSyS stemstem

ollateraollaterINFORMATON

LLf purlinf purliof anf any y nono

or mechanor mechan

uilding desuilding deams as shams as s

115 mil115 miONLYC.C.

actor (I): 1ctor (I):


13 34 19 – 15

9. Earthquake Load:

a. IBC:

i. Occupancy Classification: Category IV

ii. IBC Site Class: C.

iii. Seismic Design Category: D.

iv. Project Specific Importance factor: 1.5 per ASCE 7.

v. Spectral Response Factors:

! Horizontal: SD1 = 0.192g and SDS = 0.588g

! Vertical: SD1 = 0.098 and SDS = 0.346g

10. Load Combinations:

a. Design metal building system to withstand the most critical effectsof load factors and load combinations (dead, live, snow, earthquake, wind, etc.) in accordance with ASCE 7 or IBC.

11. Deflection Criteria:

a. In accordance with the applicable provisions of the AISC Steel Design Guide Series 3 – Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Steel Buildings.

b. Applies to primary and secondary framing members, bracing members, roof panels, and wall cladding.

12. Drift Provisions:

a. Maximum horizontal deflection, or drift, at the roof level of a structure as measured at the eave in relation to the concrete floor slab, shall be the lesser of 1 in. or H/250 based on a 50-year wind storm.

13. Thermal Effects: Standing Seam roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and contraction forces resulting from a temperature variation. Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from change in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, failure of joint seals, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 86 of 317

FORd Cd INFORMATON

mbinmbi

esign metasign mead factorsfactor

ake, windake, wind

h the applih the appli33 –– ServicServic

gs. .

daryaryONLYframfram

ladding.adding.

the rohe


13 34 19 – 16

14. Structural Steel Design Standards:

a. All structural steel sections and welded plate members shall be designed in accordance with the AISC Manual of Steel Construction and AWS D1.1.

b. MBMA, Metal Building Systems Manual.

c. AISC 360.

d. Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members: Design in accordance with AISI S100.

e. Structural System: Design in accordance with specified building Code. (Refer to Building Design Requirements, Paragraph 1.10.B.)

15. Roof Mounted Supports for Buyers Equipment

a. Provide pipe/conduit support beams as shown on the Drawings (Figure 9) for support of the Buyers piping, conduit and cable runs.

16. Each beam shall be designed to support a distributed load of 175 lb/ft.

a. Metal framing systems attached to purlins in accordance with Building Manufacturer recommendations, where shown on Drawings:

i. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii. Tolco®11, Inc.

iii. Unistrut®12 Corp.; Unistrut International

b. Repair insulation liner, as required, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Building Anchorage and Foundation Design:

1. The scope for the building foundation design will be by the Contractor. Foundation design will support the building reactions and other loads that may be imposed by the building use developed and provided by the building manufacturer.

2. Foundation shall comply with IBC and ACI 318.

11 Tolco is a registered trademark of Cooper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois.12 Unistrut is a registered trademark of Unistrut International Corporation, Wayne, Michigan.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 87 of 317

FOR

ee

oof Mooof MINFORMATON

untun

Provide piProvide pgure 9) fogure 9) fo

l be designl be desig

g sg sysystems tems acturer reccturer rec

Inc.; a divnc.; a d

ONLYInternationternatio

cordance cordance


13 34 19 – 17

D. Anchor Bolts:

1. Provide the design for anchor bolts (including size, length and embedment), which shall be designed to resist all column reactions.

2. The building anchor bolts shall be designed to resist the maximum column reactions resulting from the specified combinations of loadings. The column reactions will be provided by the building manufacturer.

3. Anchor bolts will be supplied by the Contractor and not by the building manufacturer.

4. Anchor bolts/rods shall meet ASTM F1554.

E. Electrical requirements for HVAC Equipment

1. Provide the work in accordance with NFPA 70. Electrical material and equipment shall be accepted, certified, listed, labeled, or otherwise determined safe by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark.

2. Each major load (e.g., each electric unit heater, fan, etc.) will be provided with a local disconnect switch provided by Buyer. The Buyer will be responsible for providing conductors and conduit from equipment to disconnect switch. Connection of building supply power to disconnect switch will be Buyer.

3. The AREA is electrically unclassified.

4. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4.

5. Building power to equipment will be 480 VAC/ 3 ph / 60 Hz.

F. Heating and Ventilation

1. Contractor shall provide the design for building heating, ventilation and air-conditioning. The system shall be a ducted system. The HVAC design shall be such that the total heating and cooling load be divided into two 50% systems to afford some degree of conditioning and ventilation should one unit be taken out of service. Design to preclude accidental excessive negative pressure in the building.

2. Design Criteria:

a. The site meteorological pressure shall be measured at an elevation of 733 ft.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 88 of 317

FORectrical rectrical re

Provide tProvide uipmeuipmeINFORMATON

t st ined safined sls and equs and equ

byby UnderwUnderwyyshall havehall hav

.g., each e, each et switch pt switch p

g conductog conductotion of buiion of bui

ed. ed. ONLYC/ 3 ph / 60/ 3 ph /


13 34 19 – 18

b. For equipment sizing and building heating or cooling load calculations, design conditions for Hanford shall be used, which are:

i. Annual Heating Design Conditions @ 99%

! Temperature 12.6 °F DB

! Dew Point 4.6 °F

! Humidity Ratio 7.2 grains water/lb. dry air

! Mean coincident DB 15.1 °F

c. Annual Cooling Design Conditions @ 2%

i. Temperature 93.3°F DB

ii. Mean coincident WB 64.1°F

iii. Dew Point 53.4°F

d. HVAC equipment located outdoor shall be designed for the extreme bounding temperatures of:

i. Summer: 115°F

ii. Winter: -25°F

e. Blowing Dust: Concentration of 0.177 g/m3, with wind speeds of 18 m/s at a height of 3 m. Particle size will be less than 150 μm in size.

f. Solar Radiation: Solar radiation environment of 900 Langleys.

g. Equipment Heat Loads: (Basis: See Attachment 1)

i. Electrical equipment heat load: 3,300 watt

ii. Water heater heat load: 26.4 kW

iii. Electric motor heat load: 4,350 watt

iv. Personnel Load: 5 people; 1,500 Btu/hr per person (assume: heavy work load)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 89 of 317

FOR c.c

ii

INFORMATON

i.i.

DewDew

equipmenequipmenounding teunding t

: 115°F: 115°F

F

tion of 0.ion of 0.rticleiclONLY

size size

ronment onment o

hment me


13 34 19 – 19

3. Indoor Design Conditions

a. Heating Load Calculation:

i. The winter outdoor dry bulb design temperature listed above shall apply.

ii. The indoor design temperature shall be no higher than 70°F for personnel and no less than 60°F to provide adequate equipment protection. The design basis shall be based on personnel comfort.

iii. No credit shall be taken for heat gain from equipment or personnel as equipment may or may not be running, and personnel numbers vary.

b. Cooling Load Calculation:

i. The indoor design temperature shall be no less than 78°F and no higher than 104°F to provide adequate equipment protection. The design basis shall be for personnel comfort.

4. Air System Design

a. The maximum flow rate shall be determined based on the loads expected to achieve design conditions. Ventilation system ductwork system shall be designed by the constant velocity method and pre-balanced through duct sizing; however, ducting shall incorporate manually adjustable dampers into the design.

b. Air distribution system shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE Fundamentals, “Duct Design” section.

c. All ductwork and fittings shall be fabricated in accordance with the latest edition of the SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible,” and according to the static pressure expected to be encountered in the system. Flexible duct shall not be used for return or exhaust systems.

d. Manufacturer’s standard diffusers, registers, and grills shall be used.

e. Manually adjustable volume dampers shall be provided ahead of flexible ducts serving supply grills, registers, and diffusers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 90 of 317

FOR b.b CC

INFORMATON

i.i.andandprotecproteccomfortcomfort

ow rate show rate shdesign codesign co

be designbe designduct sizinduct sizin

able daable dONLY

mpp

esigned in signed inigngn”” sectisect

ed in acced in accC


13 34 19 – 20

f. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, for structural carbon steel, or AWS D9.1 for stainless and carbon steel sheet metal

5. Control System

a. HVAC system shall be designed and installed using commercially available equipment and techniques to control the temperature, pressure and air quality. All thermostats shall be manually adjustable over the operating range.

6. Piping and Coils

a. HVAC equipment shall be located outdoors. (See Paragraph 1.10.F.15.) The location of air-conditioning equipment components shall account for piping and equipment pressure drop, and equipment clearance and maintenance requirements. Access shall be provided for the removal of any coil or other equipment component, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

7. Ventilation and Exhaust

a. Building shall be provided with fresh ventilation air. Minimum ventilation shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010 using the Ventilation Rate Procedure.

8. Materials

a. Metallic parts shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably finished to resist corrosion.

b. Materials shall be free from defects or imperfections that my affect performance. The use of rebuilt or refurbished components is prohibited for initial construction.

9. Noise Level

a. The mechanical equipment noise emissions at the maximum flow rate condition shall be less than 85 dBA, 8-hour time weighted average or equivalent noise dose when measured by a calibrated noise meter at 1 meter from the source.

10. Maintainability

a. Equipment, instrumentation, and items requiring maintenance shall be accessible for ease of inspection and removal/replacement.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 91 of 317

aa

ana

INFORMATON

hall hall componcomponecommenommen

d ExhausExhaus

all be provl be provll be in acbe in ac

entilation Rntilation R

rosionrosionONLY

res

or imperfer imperrbished corbished


13 34 19 – 21

11. Filters

a. Filters for dust removal shall be provided and shall be designed for ease of replacement. Filters shall have a minimum efficiency of 80% in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

12. Fans

a. Fans shall be industrial grade and shall be sized to provide the required HVAC system, required by this Specification. Fan shall meet, as a minimum, ANSI/AMCA Publication 204 (Balance and Quality), ANSI/AMCA Standard 210, (Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating), and ANSI/AMCA 99 (Standards Handbook).

b. Fan assembly shall be constructed of material that is compatible with the interconnected ducting. Machine guards shall be provided to protect personnel from rotating shafts.

13. Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Ductwork

a. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be designed to accommodate the IBC earthquake loads specified in Paragraph 1.10.B.9.

b. Metal framing systems:

i. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

ii. Tolco, Inc.

iii. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

c. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

d. Install lateral bracing and supports to prevent swaying.

14. Louvers

a. Louvers shall be automatic intake dual combination louver damper. Stationary blades with extruded vinyl seals and automatic backdraft blades contained within an aluminum frame. Louver shall include a bird screen and filter rack.

b. Louvers shall be sized and designed to accommodate the design conditions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 92 of 317

FOR b.b

wwtINFORMATON

o proo pro

and Suppand Supp

rs for pipi for pipiodate the odate the

tems: tems:

s, Inc.; a ds, Inc.; a d

ONLYrnational, national

tes, shapees, shap


13 34 19 – 22

c. Louver design and structure shall withstand a minimum wind load of 20 lbs per sq. ft. (equivalent to a 90 mph wind).

d. Paint and prime to match wall panels.

15. Constraints to HVAC Design:

a. The Buyer has performed an electrical lighting analysis and has located light fixtures as shown in the attached drawings. The Contractor shall design and locate the duct system and associated duct support hangers to avoid interference with the lighting.

b. An area for the equipment pad for HVAC equipment has been designated/located as shown on the Drawings. Seller shall identify equipment footprint necessary for anchoring the equipment. Equipment weights (operating) shall be provided to the Buyer for substantiating the pad design by the Seller.

G. Performance Requirements

1. Thermal Performance

a. Provide insulated metal panel assemblies for roof and wall with the following minimum R-Values, and as required to accommodate building heating and ventilation requirements:

i. R-Value Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: 30.

ii. R-Value Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: 19.

iii. R-Value Metal Man-Doors: 5.

iv. R-Value Metal Roll-up Doors: 5.

H. Warranty

1. The manufacturer for the pre-engineered metal building shall be warrant in writing against defects in materials and workmanship, and that after erection is completed, system shall be weather tight. The warranty period shall be 5 years from date of completion erection.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BUILDING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Products manufactured or supplied by the following, and meeting these Specifications may be used on this Project:

1. American Buildings Company, Columbus, GA.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 93 of 317

FOR sus

INFORMATON

RequiremRequirem

erformancerformanc

insulated minsulated mminimum Rnimum R

ng and venng and ven

tal Roof Pal Roof

all Panel all Pane

ooONLYs: 5.s: 5.

rs: 5.s: 5.


13 34 19 – 23

2. Butler Manufacturing Co., Kansas City, MO.

3. Garco Building Systems, West Houston, TX.

4. HCI Steel Buildings, Arlington, WA.

5. Kirby Building Systems, Inc., Columbus, GA.

6. Nucor Building Systems, Waterloo, IN.

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing

1. Primary Framing: manufacturer’s standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements and that provides the configuration shown on the Drawings. Column and rafter type shall be tapered. Interior columns are not permitted.

2. All framing members shall carry an easily visible identifying mark to aid the installation Contractor in the erection of the building.

3. The manufacturer shall submit CMTRs that verify that the material strength requirements have been met, and chemical requirements are in accordance with the applicable ASTM.

4. Plates, Stiffeners, etc.: All base plates, splice plates, cap plates, and stiffeners shall be factory welded into place on the structural members and factory drilled/punched for bolted field assembly.

5. All welded shop connections shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Provide CMTRs for weld materials for primary framing weldments.

6. Hot-rolled shapes and flat bar shall conform to ASTM A1011, ASTM A992, ASTM A572, or ASTM A529, Grade 55, having a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi.

7. Round Tube shapes: ASTM A500, Grade B, with minimum yield strength of 42,000 psi.

8. Cold formed shapes: ASTM A1011, Grade 55 or ASTM A653, Grade 55.

9. X-Bracing: ASTM A529, A572, or A36. Do not use wire rope or cable for permanent bracing. Angles: fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing.

10. All field connections shall be bolted. Bolts shall be ASTM F1852 “twist-off” type tension control bolt, nut, and washer assemblies. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 94 of 317

FOR PriPrdesigndesigprovides provides

pe shalpe shaINFORMATON

bb

ming memming memation Contation Cont

rer shall ser shall sents have bnts have

applicable applicable

base platbase pladeded into pinto

d field assd field a

in ain ONLYaccordaccordrimaryimary frafyy

o ASTM AASTM having ahaving a


13 34 19 – 24

11. Shop Primer of Structural Steel Framing System:

a. Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond. Follow, as appropriate, one or more specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council.

b. Apply one coat of rust inhibitive alkyd zinc chromate, red oxide, or waterborne primer, 1.0 mil dry thickness.

B. Secondary Framing

1. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer’s standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated by design, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, to comply with the following:

a. Roof Purlins, Sidewall, and Endwall Girts: Z-shaped sections of adequate size and thickness as determined by the design criteria.

b. Steel for cold-formed galvanized channel and Z-sections shall be ASTM A1011, Grade 55 (55,000 psi minimum yield stress), with G60 galvanized coating.

c. Base or Sill Angles: zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

d. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.

e. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer’s standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads.

C. Bolted Connections

1. Primary Framing: ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 high-strength bolted connections.

2. Secondary Framing: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325.

3. ASTM A563 heavy-hex carbon steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 95 of 317

FOR

ininanglanglUnlessUnlessformedformed, s,

mplypl INFORMATON

with with

Roof PurliRoof Purliquate size quate size

coldcold--formform11, Grade1, Grade

d coating. coating

zinc-zinc-coatcoat

hannel shahannel shat or strt or stONLY

ctand headnd head

nufacturenufactucturalctural-st

ee


13 34 19 – 25

4. Provide CMTRs for high-strength bolts, including nuts and washers, and CMTRs for unfinished bolts and nuts.

2.3 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. Provide roofing, siding, interior metal liner, and soffit sheets formed to the general profile or configuration customarily utilized by the metal building system manufacturer to meet the Specification requirements.

1. Metal Roof System: Standing seam roof panels; manufacturer’s factory-formed standing seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlins using a concealed clip. Roof system shall meet UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. Form panels from 24 gauge, 50,000 psi minimum yield Galvalume®13 sheet steel, ASTM A792, grade 50, with a color coating. Perimeter trim, start/finish panels, ridge cover, and transition flashing shall be provided and shall be designed to accommodate the roof’s expansion/contraction. Closures, sealants, and fasteners shall be provided as required for a weather-tight installation.

2. Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to girts using exposed fasteners. Form panels of a minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheets. Panel Profile: PBR, 1 1/4-in. deep ribs which are trapezoidal in shape and are spaced on 12-in. centers; one piece, extending from sill to eave, with base trim at sill and eave trim. Closures, sealants, and fasteners shall be provided as required for a weather-tight installation.

3. Interior Liner Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to girts using exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimum of 24-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheets, ASTM A653. Finish shall be: shop-applied baked enamel finish, to liner panels, and related trim and accessory elements. Apply finish coat on the exposed face and manufacturer’s standard wash coat on the reverse face; color shall be manufacturer’s standard white. Liner height shall be 8 ft from finished floor. Provide matching cap trim and trim around walk doors.

4. Soffit Panels: Manufacturer’s standard factory-formed, soffit panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels using exposed fasteners. Form panels of minimum 26-gauge, zinc-coated steel sheet, ASTM A653.

5. Panel Coatings: Exterior side of roof, soffit, and siding panels shall be finished with an extended life, fluoropolymer coating utilizing

13 Galvalume is a registered trademark of BIEC International, Inc., Vancouver, Washington.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 96 of 317

FORpapasteelsteelstart/finstart/finand shall and shal

sureurINFORMATON

, sea, searr-tight intight in

s: Manufa: Manufmechanicalechanical

panels of aanels of e: PBR, 1: PBR,

n 12n 12-in.in. ce and eaveand eave

for a wefor a weaa

er’’s stands standhmehmONLY

nt of nt of mum of 2mum of 2

shopshop-appappcessoryessor eleely

’’s standas standadard d


13 34 19 – 26

Kynar®14 500/Hylar®15 5000 resin. Reverse side of panels shall receive manufacturer’s standard wash coat. Surfaces shall be properly prepared and primed, then coated and oven-baked to cure. Top coating shall have a dry film thickness of 0.75-0.90 mils on the exterior surface, over 0.2 mils nominal dry film thickness of epoxy type primer over galvanized or Galvalume sheet. The interior surface shall be protected by manufacturer’s standard wash coat system of 0.6 ± 0.05 mils thickness.

B. Flashing, Trim & Closures

1. Flashing and/or trim shall be furnished at eaves, rake, corners, base, framed openings, and wherever necessary to seal against the weather and provide a finished appearance. Coatings shall match associated roofing, liner and siding panels.

C. Sealant, Sealing Tape, Weather-strips:

1. Concealed Joint Sealants: Non-shrinking, non-drying butyl-based sealant specifically formulated for factory application in standing seams.

2. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicon rubber sealant as recommended by the manufacturer.

3. Tape Sealers: Manufacturer’s standard pressure-sensitive, non-corrosive, non-curing butyl tape.

4. Weather strips: Door manufacturer’s standard approved products; closed cell neoprene or extruded vinyl.

2.4 INSULATION AND VAPOR BARRIERS

A. Fiberglass banded blanket or batt insulation system:

1. Insulation: ASTM C991, Type 1 fiberglass blanket insulation.

2. Manufacturer’s standard continuous polyethylene film vapor retarder liner, white in color.

3. The composite product shall have a fire hazard classification of 25 (maximum) flame spread index and 50 (maximum) smoke developed index, when used in accordance with ASTM E84.

4. Accessories: Include all insulation hangers, sealants, and fasteners as required by the manufacturer for a complete system.

14 Kynar is a registered trademark of Arkema, Inc., Prussia, Pennsylvania.15 Hylar is a registered trademark of Solvay Solexis, Inc., Thorofare, New Jersey.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 97 of 317

FOR linlin

ant, Sealint, Sealin

ncealce INFORMATON

d Jd Jcallcally formy for

c Joint SeaJoint Seasealant asealant a

ufacturerfacturer

factureracturer’’s s l

ONLYm: m:

anket insulanket ins

lm v


13 34 19 – 27

5. Manufacturer: Simple Saver System®16, Thermal Design, Madison, NE; or equal.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Personnel Doors, Frames, and Hardware:

1. Provide where shown on the attached Drawings.

2. Insulated metal doors and frames shall comply with IBC, SDI-100, Level 3, extra heavy duty, Model 2 (seamless), minimum 16-gauge faces.

3. Standard 3-ft wide by 7-ft high by 1 3/4-in. thick.

4. Glazing: Narrow lite glass (N) panel with trim and flexible polycarbonate panel.

5. Manufacturer’s standard zinc-coated galvanized steel, and finish painted, with closure at top of doors.

6. Furnish manufacturer’s standard hardware: Lockset, strike plate, weather-stripping and threshold, kick plate.

7. Doors and frames shall be designed by their manufacturer to withstand the wind loads specified in paragraph “Wind Loads” in Part 26 (i.e., for ASCE 7, Wind Loads – Components and Cladding).

B. Overhead Coiling (Rollup) Doors:

1. Doors shall be overhead, coiling type, with interlocking slats, complete with anchoring and door hardware, guides, hood, and operating mechanisms, and designed for use on openings as indicated and designed to withstand wind loading indicated. Slats shall be continuous length for width of door indicated, without splices. Use grease-sealed or self-lubricating bearings for rotating members.

2. Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide.

3. Door Curtain and Hood Material: Galvanized steel.

4. Insulation: Fill slats with manufacturer’s standard thermal insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, in accordance with ASTM E84. Enclose insulation completely within slate faces.

16 Simple Saver System is a registered trademark of Harkins, Daniel J., Port Charlotte, Florida.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 98 of 317

FORGlaGlapanel. panel.

ManufactanufacINFORMATON

ururosure aosure

anufacturanufactuthresholdreshold

shall be dshall be in paragrain paragra

ComponeCompone

pe, withe, withuideidONLY

s, hoods, hooenings as nings a

shall be cohall be cgrease-greas sease


13 34 19 – 28

5. Locking Devices: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock (provided by Buyer), located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

6. Door-Finish: Manufacturer’s standard Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated corrosion-resistant finish: Gray color as selected from manufacturer’s full range for both interior curtain slat and exterior curtain slat faces.

7. Accessories:

a. Weather seals: Equip each door with weather-striping gaskets fitted to entire perimeter of door for a weather-tight installation.

b. Push/Pull Handles: Equip the door with emergency-operated lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

C. Trim: Factory-formed and factory-painted ridge cap, rake trim, simple eave trim, panel side trim, corner trim, door trim, and other trim as necessary.

D. Gutter Fascia and Downspouts:

1. Material: ASTM A653, galvanized steel.

2. Gutter Fascia:

a. Prefinished to match wall panels.

b. Furnish hangers with factory-applied paint.

3. Preformed Corner Closures: Furnish to match configuration of gable fascia.

4. Downspouts:

a. Configuration: Nominal 4-in. corrugated rectangular box with minimum 11 sq. in. of cross-section area.

b. Factory finish to match wall panels.

E. Miscellaneous: Manufacturer’s standard fasteners, self-tapping screws, metal-backed neoprene washers, weather stripping, sealants, closure strips, gaskets, and other items as required for a complete installation.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Factory Fabricate: To manufacturer’s written standards, MBMA Low Rise Building Systems Manual, and, for items not covered, AISC Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 99 of 317

FOR

bb

FactoryFactory--foftrim, imINFORMATON

corncorn

nd Downsnd Downs

TM A653M A653

atch wall ptch wall

factoryactory-apa

sh to mah to maONLYd rectangurectangu


13 34 19 – 29

B. Building Parts:

1. Accurate and true to dimension to facilitate building erection and proper fit without cutting, fitting or other field alterations.

2. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

3. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, ruptures, and sharp edges.

C. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA for fabrication and erection tolerances.

D. Welded Connections: In accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Sheet Steel: Welding in accordance with AWS D1.3.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Building will be erected around operating facilities.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify concrete foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position and properly squared.

B. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer’s written erection instructions and erection drawings.

B. Use templates for accurate setting of anchor rods, as required.

C. Provide temporary bracing in accordance with MBMA standards and as required for safe installation.

D. Ream holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts. Burned holes for bolted connections are not permitted without written approval by the Metal Building System manufacturer’s professional engineer.

E. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer’s professional engineer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 100 of 317

elded Coelded Co

Steel: WeSteel: We

INFORMATON

d around od around

slab, mechab, mecn and propand prop

ctoryory conconyy ONLYrerr’’s writts writt


13 34 19 – 30

F. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated. Erect building frame true and level with vertical members plumb and bracing properly installed. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

G. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.

H. Provide temporary guys and bracing where needed for squaring and plumbing, and securing the structural framing against loads such as wind loads acting on the exposed framing.

I. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC for bolt type and joint type specified.

J. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing as required to satisfy design loads and as shown on Drawings.

1. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows.

2. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, louvers, fans, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

K. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing.

L. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within those permitted by MBMA.

3.4 ROOF AND WALL PANELS

A. Install all wall and roofing systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction and details.

B. Field Cutting of panels by torch is not permitted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 101 of 317

FOR ovide temovide tem

securing thcuring thd framingd framing

INFORMATON

ng and Eng and Evel baseplavel basepl

ections usections usand joint nd joint

ng level, png level, pps attacheds attached

Drawings.awings.

peningpeningONLY

s su

erimeter orimeter oof roof andof roof a

nd size nd size ng


13 34 19 – 31

C. Attach panels to structural supports to maintain a weather tight seal while allowing for thermal and structural movement.

1. Install exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment.

2. Field seam side laps of standing seam roof panels using electrically-operated seaming machine.

3. Use proper tools to install screw fasteners to compress neoprene washer without damaging washer or stripping metal.

D. Install manufacturer’s standard joint sealants, gaskets, and closure strips as required for weather-tight installation.

E. Field Cutting and Patching: Perform in a manner not to impair appearance, weathertightness, or structural capacity of panel system.

3.5 DOORS AND FRAME INSTALLATION

A. General: Install doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place according to manufacturers’ written instructions. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components. Seal perimeter of each door frame with elastomeric sealant used for metal wall panels.

B. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seams covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Where dissimilar metal surfaces contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 102 of 317

FOR ld Cuttinld Cuttinthertightneertightne

RAMERAMINFORMATON

INI

l doors anddoors anaccording according

flaashingsshingsmeric sealameric seala

parts to fuparts to futortion. Ltortion. L

hoh ONLYrage to age tooordinateoordinate

roof panroof pans f


13 34 19 – 32

B. Gutters/Downspouts:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eaves with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 in. o.c., using manufacturer’s standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

2. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 1/2-in. telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 in. away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 in. o.c. in between. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. Install splash pads under each downspout.

C. Louvers: Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

D. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetrations. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 TESTING

A. After installation, perform electrical continuity check and functionally check fans and heaters. Document testing and submit test report.

B. HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Collect the following data and include in final report:

1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

d. Project name.

e. Project location.

f. Name of TOC Construction Representative.

g. Project Subcontractor.

h. Project altitude.

i. Report date.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 103 of 317

bubu

ers: Locatrs: Locatacent wocent wINFORMATON

Form flaForm fld bby manuy manu

electrical ectrical g and suand submbuu

ancing: Cancing: C

ONLYBalancing Balancing

ancing Agancing A

A


13 34 19 – 33

2. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of system.

c. Description of systems operation sequence.

d. Nomenclature used throughout report.

e. Test conditions.

3. Instrument List:

a. Instrument.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model number.

d. Serial number.

e. Range.

f. Calibration date.

4. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Model/Frame.

c. HP/BHP.

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.

e. RPM

f. Service factor.

g. Starter size, rating, heater elements.

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 104 of 317

FOR a.a

b.b. MM

INFORMATON

ModeMode

erial numbial num

date.ate.

ONLYctual, no lctual, no


13 34 19 – 34

5. V-Belt Drive:

a. Identification/location.

b. Required driven RPM.

c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM.

d. Belt, size and quantity.

e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM.

f. Center to center distance.

6. Cooling Coil Data:

a. Identification/number.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual.

g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual.

h. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual.

j. Water flow, design and actual.

k. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

l. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual.

o. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 105 of 317

FOR CoC

a.a. II

INFORMATON

LocatLocat

ervice.vice.

acturer.cturer.

sign and agn and a

emperaturemperature

rature, desture, de

, desig, desiONLY

n ann an

gn and actgn and ac


13 34 19 – 35

7. Heating Coil Data:

a. Identification/number.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Manufacturer.

e. Air flow, design and actual.

f. Water flow, design and actual.

g. Water pressure drop, design and actual.

h. Entering water temperature, design and actual.

i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual.

j. Entering air temperature, design and actual.

k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual.

l. Air pressure drop, design and actual.

8. Electric Duct Heater:

a. Manufacturer.

b. Identification/number.

c. Location.

d. Model number.

e. Design kW.

f. Number of stages and readings.

g. Phase, voltage, amperage.

h. Test voltage (each phase)

i. Test amperage (each phase).

j. Air flow, specified and actual.

k. Temperature rise, specified and actual

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 106 of 317

FOR g.g

h.h. EE

INFORMATON

LeavinLeav

ntering airtering ai

g air tempair temp

drop, desidrop, des

ONLY


13 34 19 – 36

9. Air Moving Equipment (e.g., Air Handling Unit, etc.):

a. Location.

b. Manufacturer.

c. Model number.

d. Serial number.

e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge.

f. Air flow, specified and actual.

g. Return air flow, specified and actual.

h. Outside air flow, specified and actual.

i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual.

j. Inlet pressure.

k. Discharge pressure.

l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.

m. Number of Belts/Make/Size.

n. Fan RPM.

10. Duct

a. System zone/branch.

b. Duct size.

c. Area.

d. Design velocity.

e. Design air flow.

f. Test velocity.

g. Test air flow.

h. Duct static pressure.

i. Air temperature.

j. Air correction factor.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 107 of 317

FOR g.g.

h.h

INFORMATON

Total Total

nlet pressunlet pressu

arge pressge press

ke/Size/Bke/Size/

/Make/SiMake/Si

ONLY


13 34 19 – 37

11. Vibration Test:

a. Location of points:

i. Fan bearing, drive end.

ii. Fan bearing, opposite end.

iii. Motor bearing, center (when applicable).

iv. Motor bearing, drive end.

v. Motor bearing, opposite end.

vi. Casing (bottom or top).

vii. Casing (side).

12. Final Design Document Package.

a. Final (as-built) drawings.

b. Final (as-built) calculations.

c. Final Test Report.

13. Normally accepted readings, velocity and accelerations.

14. Unusual conditions at time of test.

3.8 REPAIR, CLEANING, AND PAINTING

A. Following erection, remove all unused material, screws, fasteners, and other debris from completed installation. Use caution when removing metal cuttings from surface of prefinished metal panels.

B. Replace damaged, dented, buckled, or discolored metal panels.

C. Repair damaged, painted, and galvanized surfaces.

3.9 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. Provide manufacturer’s representative at Site, for installation assistance, inspection, and certification of proper installation.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 108 of 317

FOR vv

al Dl INFORMATON

esign Design

nal (asal (as-bub

ass--built) cabuilt) ca

eportport..

ngs, velocigs, veloci

est.t.

ONLYscrews, fascrews, fa

en removien remo

el


13 34 19 – Att. 1–1


HVAC DESIGN LOADS

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 109 of 317


13 34 19 – Att. 1–2

HVAC Design Loads

Miscellaneous Electrical Loads:

1) 40 hp drive on hot water skids (1 per skid) – 764 Watts2) 7.5 HP drive on water skid – 267 Watts3) Heater control cabinet SCR’s (1 per skid, 1.5 Watts/Amp) – 2500 Watts4) Led lighting fixtures 10.7 Watts/fixture 24 fixtures – 256 watts5) Miscellaneous power supplies, HMI Panel, equipment contactors, switchgear equipment

– 500 Watts

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 110 of 317

FO


13 47 13.13 – 1

SECTION 13 47 13.13

CATHODIC PROTECTION FOR UNDERGROUND AND SUBMERGED PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements for materials, installation, and repair to underground cathodic protection systems.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS/CODES AND STANDARDS

Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.

The following documents and other referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section, unless otherwise indicated.

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM B8-11 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM D1248-12 Standard Specifications for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable, Type 1, Class A, Category 5, Grades E4 & E5


H-2-94086, Rev. 2 Cathodic Protection Details, Cables, Boxes & Jumpers

H-14-011500 Tank Farm Cathodic Protection General Notes & Details

C. NACE International (NACE)

SP0169-2013 Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems

SP0285-2011 Corrosion Control of Underground Storage Tank Systems by Cathodic ProtectionSP0286-2007

Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 111 of 317

FORand genand ge

and Divisd Div



or Testing Testin

StandStanCopper Coppe

ndard Specard Speion Materon Mater

Categoryategory 5y

ONLYDetailsDetails,, CC

ion Gon


13 47 13.13 – 2

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors

UL 510 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Not Used.


A. The installation shall conform to the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and Standard Practices (SP) of NACE, SP0285, SP0286, and SP0169.

B. Electrical/Electronic Product Acceptability: Provide labeling and documentation in accordance with the Statement of Work and Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

C. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. 3M™17 Scotchkote™17 Electrical coating or equivalent.

B. Test Station

17 3M, Schotch, Scotchcast, Scotchfil, Scotchkote, Skotchlok, and Scotchrap are trademarks of 3M Company, St. Paul, Minnesota.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 112 of 317

FORY ASSURSSUR

llation slation Stat INFORMATON

ndard ndard P

nic Produnic Produhe StatemStatem

””

ee the Statee the Stproducts.products

ol procesl proceONLYirements.ements.


13 47 13.13 – 3

1. Box: Gerome 2007 Box, or equivalent as required, as depicted on H-14-011500.

2. Enclosure as required: Quazite PD1730BA18 Polymer Concrete enclosureor equivalent, as depicted on H-14-011500 and/or installation drawings

C. Anode Junction Boxes:

1. On Electrical Rack: 16” x 16” NEMA 4 Enclosure per H-14-011500.

2. Stand Alone

a. 12” x 16” NEMA 4 Enclosure per H-14-011500 details, OR

b. Farwest Box per Quote Numbers 18-131-AC and 18-132-AC.

D. Plastic Warning Tape:

1. Plastic warning tape for horizontal runs of buried leads in cable trenches shall be a minimum of 4-mils thick and 6-inches wide inert, yellow, plastic film designed for prolonged use underground. The tape shall have the words, “CAUTION CATHODIC PROTECTION CABLE BELOW,” or similar, clearly visible in repeating patterns along its entire length.

2. Plastic warning tape for anodes shall be buried according to H-14-011500.

E. Conductors:

1. Direct buried: High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (HMWPE) Cathodic Protection Cables: 600 Volts, Single Conductor, Stranded Copper cable for direct burial, No. 2-AWG. Conductor shall conform to ASTM B8-11. Insulation shall conform to ASTM D1248-12. Size specified on the Drawings.

2. Conduit run: No. 2-AWG stranded THHN wire.

3. Bonding: Type “CP” wire, No. 4 AWG, or as shown on drawings.

4. Anode header and loop: Type “CP” wire, No. 2 AWG, or as shown on drawings.

F. Anode

1. Canistered Wire Anode: De Nora LIDA®18 Pack canistered wire anode, Model LP 3 X 40H with at least 1.4 amp output or equivalent.

18 LIDA is registered trademark of De Nora Tech, Inc., Chardon, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 113 of 317

b.b

Warning Warning

ticicINFORMATON

warninwarnie a minime a minim

ned for prned for prUTION CAION CA

visible in rvisible in

for anodesfor anodes

Weight PoWeight Ple Condue Cond

ctoctoONLYshallshall

88-12-12. . SizSi


13 47 13.13 – 4

G. Conductor Exothermic Welds

1. For New and Old Pipe: Follow manufacturer’s instructions. See H-14-011500 for applicable detail.

a. Exothermic Fusion Weld Molds, Weld Metal, and Conductor Sleeves.

b. Use either of the following “Cadweld®1” weld molds by Erico Products or approved substitute. Weld metal shall be either low emission type recommended by weld mold manufacturer with igniters and filters, or standard type. Base mold on pipe size and conductor size. Maximum weld metal size shall be CA15. Adapter copper sleeves shall be used for #10 AWG and smaller conductors.

c. Low emission (EXOLON) type CAHA mold with electric starter, part no. XLB971A1. Mold type suffix based on conductor size.

d. Standard type CAHA mold. Suffix based on conductor size.

e. Connections shall be made in accordance with UL 486C.

2. Weld Coating

a. Coating for all welds shall be a cold-applied, fast-drying mastic consisting of bituminous resin and solvents. The minimum percentage of solids shall be 80 percent. Substitute coating materials shall be compatible with cable insulation, pipe coating and environment. Manufacturer of Contractor’s choice.

b. Ensure manufacturer’s installation and inspection procedures are provided with product. Procedures for “Cadweld” items are contained in Erico Products “Installers and Inspectors Guide” (A-7D-01, 1985).

H. Repair Coating: Sherwin Williams SEAGUARD MP (see Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” for product details)

1. Power tool clean the area per manufacturer’s recommendations before coating application.

2. Brush or roll application is acceptable for repairs.

I. Splice Kit, Conductor:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 114 of 317

FOR c LL

INFORMATON

art nart n

StaSt ndard tyndard ty

ctions shtions sh

elds shall elds shall nous resinnous resin

all be 80 pall be 80 pible with cible with

urer ofurer oONLY

Co

n and insp and inspor “Cadwor “Cadw

and and Inspecsp


13 47 13.13 – 5

1. Cadweld®19 CASS Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.

2. Cadweld CATA Type cable splice kit, by Erico Products, or approved substitute. Suffix based on conductor size.

3. Epoxy potting compound for encapsulating electrical wire splices or terminated wires buried underground (for use as required), 3M Company, Scotchcast™17 Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, 85-10, or approved substitute.

J. Tape, Electrical Insulating

1. Scotch™17 rubber splicing tape #23

2. Scotch electrical tape #33

a. Plastic: UL 510, 3/4-inch wide

b. Self-vulcanizing: UL 510, 3/4-inch wide

K. 3M Scotchkote Electrical Coating FD

L. Touch-up compound for PVC Conduit Coating: Material of Contractor’s choice.

M. Wire marker: Tubular plastic, imprinted or typed with indelible ink, or plastic tag typed with indelible ink, fastened securely to wire with plastic wire tie.

N. Damp and Dry Cloth

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Scale dimensions on the drawings show desired and approximate location of equipment, actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by field conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials and supplies, and shall perform all labor required to provide complete corrosion control systems in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

19 Cadweld is a registered trademark of Erico International Corporation, Solon, Ohio.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 115 of 317

FOR

SS

ScotchScotch

PPINFORMATON

asas

SelfSelf--fff vulcavulca

trical Coatcal Coa

PVC CondPVC Con

imprinted imprinted securely tocurely

ONLYs show des show dences, ace


13 47 13.13 – 6

2. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings.

3. Use appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which manufacturer recommends special installation tools.

4. Refer to Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill,” for excavation or backfill of soil.

B. Test Station: Install below grade test stations per design.

C. Junction boxes

1. Install junction boxes according to design. Junction box details located on H-14-011500.

2. Label boxes according to design.

3. Conductor labels should indicate where the cables originate from (e.g., A241-CATH-RECT-015, J 42-5, etc.)

D. Wire pull box (J15-7)

1. Install wire pull box according to design.

E. Conductors

1. Test Stations

a. Wire brush to remove surface contaminants and mechanically grind or file pipe at connection location to bare metal surface, free of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to accommodate the corrosion protection product to be applied after the connection is complete. Make exothermic weld of conductors to pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Where two or more wires are welded to the metallic structure, the minimum spacing between exothermic welds shall be 6 inches.

c. The lead wire end to be welded shall be stripped so that a copper sleeve of suitable size can be fitted over the bare section.

d. After the weld is performed, test the bond by removing the molten slag with a hammer. If the weld comes loose, or is not completely connected, remove previous weld and perform a second weld.

e. Inspect exothermic welds for mechanical integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. If weld fails, make another weld at least 3 inches from previous weld attempt and inspect.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 116 of 317

FORIIH-1H-

Label boxLabel bo

dd INFORMATON

ctor labector laCATH-ATH-RERE

7)

ox accordiox accord

ace contae contan loloONLY

cationatione surface e surfac

on producn produthermic whermic w

ufacturerufacturer


13 47 13.13 – 7

f. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation and conductors will not be damaged due to ground or structure movement. Cables may be secured to the pipe with duct tape or tie wraps during trench activity and backfill operations.

g. Apply approved coatings on all exposed copper wire, connector material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of 1 inch.

h. Use conductors as specified on H-14-011500, Table 1, Test Station Conductors.

i. Repair damaged pipe test conductor wires by cleaning and removing any fraying insulation. Roughen up outer insulation for approximately 4” each side of the defect with utility knife to prepare for application of tapes. Using two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch rubber splicing # 23 tape and two (2) half-lapped layers of Scotch electrical #33 plus tape, start from the center of the defect to ensure a double wrap of each layer. Apply 3M Scotchkote Electrical Coating FD over taped repair prior to backfill.

j. Make connections to existing conductor wires using a Cadweld CASS type connector, Burndy®20 Type mechanical connector, or appropriately sized copper split bolt per manufacturer’s instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.

k. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the point of installation on the pipeline (or the severed cable connection), to the new test station.

l. Wires to be direct buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.

m. Identify end of each conductor using specified wire marker with typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.

n. Newly installed test station(s): Identify the end of each pipe test conductor using specified wiremarker with typewritten or imprinted pipe number to which conductor is connected.

20 Burndy is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 117 of 317

FOR i.i.

prpINFORMATON

f Scof Scof Scotchof Scotch

efect to enfect to echkote Elechkote E

ctions to etions to nector, Bunector, B

d copper spd copper sase splice pe splice

ing Kit, Mng Kit, Mces mustes mus

ltiti-MONLYMold RMold Rial.al.

nt length tt length e severede severed


13 47 13.13 – 8

o. Terminate conductors on specified terminals and locations in test station as directed in H-14-011500, Detail 2, and the test station matrices located on the appropriate cathodic protection farm drawings. (Note test station matrices are located on drawings starting with H-14-0315XX).

p. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Jumpers

a. Wire brush to remove surface containments and mechanically grind or file pipe at connection location to white metal surface, free of oil and dirt. Note: Enough pipe surface should be prepared to accommodate the corrosion protection product to be applied after the connection is complete. Make exothermic weld of conductors to pipe in accordance with approved manufacturer’s instructions.

b. Where two or more wires are connected to the metallic structure, the minimum spacing between the connections shall be 6 inches.

c. The lead wire end to be welded shall be stripped so that a copper sleeve of suitable size can be fitted over the bare section.

d. After the weld is performed, test the bond by removing the molten slag with a hammer. If the weld comes loose, or is not completely connected, remove previous weld and perform a second weld.

e. Inspect exothermic welds for mechanical integrity in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. If weld fails, make another weld at least 3 inches from previous weld attempt and inspect.

f. Install the cables with sufficient slack so that the cable insulation and conductors will not be damaged due to ground or structure movement. Cables may be secured to the pipe with duct tape or tie wraps during trench activity and backfill operations.

g. Apply approved coatings on all exposed copper wire, connector material, and bared pipe. Overlap approved coating on copper wire insulation on pipe coating or on bared surface a minimum of 1 inch.

h. New conductor wires shall be sufficient length to extend from the points of installation on the pipelines. Splices, if required, shall be made using a Cadweld CASS type connector, Burndy Type mechanical connector, or appropriately sized copper split bolt per manufacturer’s instructions, and encase splice point in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 118 of 317

FOR totINFORMATON

Where tWhere he minimuminimu

ad wire end wire ensuitable suitable s

is performs performer. If the wer. If the w

revious wrevious w

for mechafor mechons. Ins. ONLY

f wf weld attemld attem

k so that thk so thate to grounto groun

pipe wipe w


13 47 13.13 – 9

(or equivalent). Note: ALL buried wire splices must be completely encased in a 3M Company, Scotchcast Multi-Mold Resin Splicing Kit, Model 85-10 (or equivalent) prior to burial.

i. Wires buried in the ground shall be laid straight without kinks.

j. Bond per H-2-94086, Details 3 and 5.

3. Anode header, loop, and lead cables

a. Anode header cables located in above ground conduit will be a single cable, i.e., no loop, routed in two directions towards anode junction boxes. Cables will run through wire pull box, and will terminate at anode junction boxes on either end of the conduit rack. Direct buried UHMWPE wires will land in junction boxes, and continue below grade for anode connections.

b. If damaged, repair or replace per drawing H-14-011500.

c. Terminate new header at rectifier 241A-CATH-RECT-015 positive output terminals. The header loop cables will terminate at finalanode junction boxes per design.

d. Terminate new negative return cables at rectifier 241A-CATH-RECT-015 negative output terminal. Use solderless terminal lugs for conductor terminations. Identify cables using specified wire markers.

F. Existing Anodes

1. Replace existing anodes if damaged or depleted.

2. Repair damaged head, leader, or loop cables according to H-14-011500.

3. If the anode is required to be removed and does not need to be replaced, ensure that terminated anode leader cable is fully encapsulated in the 85-14-CP splice kit.

G. New Anodes: Install per manufactures instructions and drawing H-14-011500. Run anode lead cable in field as required. Specify anode and lead wire installation locations. Splices to existing leader cable shall be made using a Cadweld CATA type connector per Drawings.

1. Vertical.

2. Horizontal.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 119 of 317

FOR IfIINFORMATON

dada

TerminaTerminautput termiput term

e junctionunctio

e new neganew negegative ouegative o

erminationrminatio

or depr deONLY

pleteplete

les accordles accord

es not needs not neeencapsuencapsu


13 47 13.13 – 10

3.3 FINAL TESTING

A. Construction Acceptance Testing will be directed as required by the cathodic protection Design Authorities (DAs), Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.

B. Start-Up Testing will be directed as required by the cathodic protection DAs, Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.


A. Continuity Testing

1. Testing will be directed by the cathodic protection DAs, Rick Nelson or Ryler Adams.

B. Connections

1. Document connection of conductors to new and existing pipe. Include the following:

a. Bonding jumper: Identification of each pipe to which connected and general location of jumper and splice connection as applicable.

b. Verification that connections complies with manufacturer’s installation and inspection requirements.

END OF SECTION 13 47 13.13

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 120 of 317

FORRR

nectionsctions

ocumenocumeINFORMATON

ng:ng:

nding jumnding jumeneral loceral loc

n that n that concond inspectid inspecti

ONN 13 473 47

ONLY


22 15 00 – 1

SECTION 22 15 00

COMPRESSED AIR PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of compressed air service piping inside the Air and Water Service Building.




A. American National Standards Institute/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME)

ANSI/ASME B13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualification

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch

ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron and Threaded Fittings

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.34 Valves -Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping

C. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 121 of 317




StandardsndardME)E)

SchemeSchem

Engineersngineers

d PressurPressu

d BrBONLYazingazing

ral Purposral Purpos

ded Fittinded Fittin

l


22 15 00 – 2

D. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service


ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, forPressure-Containing Parts


AWS D1.1, 2010 Structural Welding Code

AWS D1.6, 2007 Structural Welding Code – Stainless


F. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)

MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

MSS SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends

G. Hanford Documents


TFC-ENG-STD-12 Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications (SWPSs): Five days before first use submit WPSs and/or SWPSs in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 122 of 317

FOR

ricanrica

S D1.1D1 , 20, 20

66, 200200INFORMATON

dardizatiordizatio

Pipe HPipeManufacManufacnstallationstallation

llly Reinfoy ReinfWelding, TWelding

ONLYnkk Farm FFarm F

entificatioentificatio


22 15 00 – 3

2. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.

3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A for information/record.

4. Mechanical Cleaning Verification: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.3.B for information/record.

5. Weld Examinations: Submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.5.A.

6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.



B. Qualifications

1. Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Welding Personnel and Procedures for Pressure-Retaining Components (along with attachment thereto and pipe supports) shall be qualified in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 927.6 before welding. Maintain copies of welding procedure, specification, and procedure qualification records at jobsite.

C. Pressure Testing Procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

D. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

E. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

F. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at the jobsite.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 123 of 317

FORtete3.4.3.4.

SSURANSSURAN

INFORMATON

d Producd Producvent use ovent use o

g PersonnePersonetal Fabrietal Fab

ocedures foedures o and pipeo and pip

Paragrapharagraphication,icationONLY

an

with ASMwith ASe

d W


22 15 00 – 4

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and in the individual components list below.

B. Overhead Pipe Supports: B-Line B3100C (plastic coated standard clevis hangers) or equivalent. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or perforated straps are allowed. See location specified in the Drawings. Add ceiling cross beams as necessary.

C. Close nipples are not permitted unless shown on the Drawings.

D. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints: Use anaerobic acrylic sealer. Henkel Corporation: Loctite®21 5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specification.

E. Valves: Specified in individual components list section below, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

F. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.” Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

G. Paint: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting” and as specified on the Drawings.

H. Deleted.

21 Loctite is a registered trademark of Henkel Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 124 of 317

ALSALS

g and Fittinand Fittints list bnts listINFORMATON

SupportsSupportsanger Rodnger Rod

s section. ectionn, or perfon, or perf

ing cross bing cross

unless shunless sh

readed Joeaded Jor 567 or e567 or

ufacturerfactureONLYsection bsection

led Concrled Concr66


22 15 00 – 5

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Compressor: Kobelco KNW A00-D/H positive displacement, two-stage rotary screw air compressor capable of delivering 100% oil-free air at 162 ACFM at 125 PSIG. The regulating system shall be a full load/no load type. A single point of connection shall be provided for 480 VAC, 3 phase interface. The single point of connection shall have a disconnecting means that is lockable and will isolate all power to the compressor when opened.

B. Air Receiver Tank: Compressed air tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section VIII, Division I for compressed air storage use. Tank shall have a capacity of 240 gallons, a maximum working pressure of 200 psi at 400°F, and dimensions of 30” outer diameter by 84” length. Exterior surface painted with one coat standard shop primer. Manufacturer and part number: Manchester Tank – 302428.

C. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) for Receiver Tank: The PRV for the compressed air line and the 1” PRV discharge piping and components are safety significant. PRV shall be a Consolidated Model 1/2-19110LcF-2-CC-MS-34-MT-FT-GS, with an orifice area of 0.110 in², with a 1/2” MNPT inlet and a 1” FNPT outlet, with 316 Stainless wteel trim, and a rated flow of 319 scfm at 150 psig and 60°F. PRV shall be ASME code stamped and set at 150 psig per RPP-CALC-60082, “Air Compressor Pressure Relief Valve Sizing Calculation.” A code stamp and code data report shall be provided. All safety significant components shall be purchased from an evaluated supplier or commercial grade dedicated prior to installation. Fabricator shall submit CMTR’s for all safety significant materials including weld filler metal except those supplied as GFE.

D. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range with a 4 1/2” dial size and with a 1/2” MNPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft 45-1109-SD-04L-0/300#.

E. Temperature Indicator: Thermometer shall be a bi-metal, Stainless Steel, 3” Dial 50° to 400°F, 1/2” MNPT inlet, 2.5” lower stem. Manufacturer and part number: Ashcroft 30-CI-60-L-025 50/400°F

F. Regulator: Air pressure regulator shall be a 2” NPT high flow regulator rated to a maximum pressure rating of 300 psig, able to regulate down to at least 10 psig, and an air flow rate of 1000 SCFM. Manufacturer and part number: Jordan Valve Model MK 60, part number 60200S6/PTS6BB34S6SM. Regulator shall be designed in accordance with ASME B16.34.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 125 of 317

erior serior st numbert number

e Relief VRelief e 1” 1 INFORMATON

PRV PRVsolidatedsolidated

11010 in², win², w, and a rat, and a ra

tamped anamped anief Valve ef Valve

d All safeAll safupplier or upplier or

mit CMTRCMTRossee supplisuppl

be Staine StainT boboONLY

ttom intom ier shall ber shall b

, Stainles, Stainlesturert


22 15 00 – 6

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive protective coating shall be clean, free of moisture, oil, dirt, scale, rust, and other foreign material.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Valve Orientation:

1. Install valves as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.

2. Where orientation is not well illustrated, locate and orient valve to provide accessibility for control and maintenance.

3. Valves shall be installed such that they are not used as means of support for runs of piping or other components.

4. Ball valves shall be installed such that, when open, the handle of the ball valve is inline with the piping. The handle shall be turned clockwise to close the valve.

B. Identification:

1. Install Stainless Steel tag for each component in this Specification, bearing the tag number shown in the Piping and Instrumentation Diagram. The tag number shall be 1/4-in. die-stamped lettering.

2. Piping Identification: Identify piping systems as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also Attachment 1 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping.”

C. Piping:

1. Fabricate and install pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

2. Cut pipe using methods that result in clean, straight cuts.

3. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs from threads before assembly.

4. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.

5. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system. Leave

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 126 of 317

FOR accacc

Valves shValves sr runs or runs INFORMATON

f pf p

lves shall lves shall line with tline with t

ve.

g for eachg for eachhe Piping aPiping

ee-stampedstampe

ng sg sysysteteI/A/AONLY

ME BME Bess Pipingss Pipin

E B3E B


22 15 00 – 7

ends of spare lines capped or blind flanged when installation has been completed.

6. Alignment: Distortion or cold springing of piping to bring it into alignment for joint assembly that introduces a strain in piping components is prohibited.

7. Pipe supports: Locate and install as shown on the Drawings. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and with applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.

8. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

9. Deleted.

10. Deleted.

D. Welding:

1. Weld piping attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Use of backing rings is not permitted.

3. Complete piping welds before tie-in welds to fixed items.

4. Weld steel structural elements in accordance with AWS D1.1 or D1.6.


A. Testing Preparation

1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform mechanical cleaning.

B. Cleaning

1. After examination is complete and before pressure testing system, or before connecting system into existing systems, clean piping internal surfaces by mechanical cleaning.

2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the TOC Construction Representativeuntil there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 127 of 317

FOR AA

DeleteDelete

leted.tedINFORMATON

attachmenachmen1.9.1 9

is not perms not perm

fore tiere tie-in in

n accordanaccorda

ONLYerform merform m


22 15 00 – 8

a. Remove all water upon completion of high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water.

b. Use drain taps at low point of piping system to ensure complete drainage and drying. Cap lines or reconnect to system to maintain cleanliness.

3. Provide documented evidence that flushing or mechanical cleaning has been accomplished as specified in this Section.


A. Nondestructive Examination (NDE) of Welds

1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections as listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Examination Documentation:

a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual examinations, NDEs, and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.

b. Required examinations shall be completed and documented before starting leak testing.

c. Weld Examination and Test Record information may be incorporated on a single format or traveler for a specific work package.

d. Document examination of attachment welds to pressure-retaining components by recording on sketches or Weld Examination and Test Record.

B. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 128 of 317

FORPerPerParagrParagrshall be ishall be

INFORMATON

examinaexaminaphph 936.936.

Documenocumen

examinatiexaminaeld examinld exam

wings, wewings, wenumbers, wumbers, w

and notationd notatioance with ance with

ONLYompleteomple

formation mormationr for a spfor a sp


22 15 00 – 9

2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description,” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.

3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.

4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.

5. Install necessary restraining devices, before applying test pressure, to prevent distortion or displacement of piping. Remove temporary restraining devices following testing.

6. Isolate instruments and other items which could be damaged by test pressures.

7. Visually examine piping joints, fittings, and other potential leak sources, including welds that attach wear plates, anchors, etc., to piping systems, during testing.

3.5 SCHEDULES

A. Schedule of Pipe Weld NDE/Testing

NDE/NDT Method “Compressed Air”

Legend:A. All completed welds to have visual

examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld inspector in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1.

B. Pneumatic pressure test all joints.

Visual A Fit Root Pass Cover Pass ALiquid Penetrant Root Pass Cover PassMagnetic Particle Root Pass Cover PassRadiographic Completed WeldUltrasonic Completed WeldPressureAll Joints BOther

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 129 of 317

FORInstInstprevenprevenrestrainrestrainini

INFORMATON

instruminstrums.s

mine pipinne pipinthat attacthat atta

NONr”

ONNNNNNONLY


22 15 00 – 10

B. Components List

Compressed Air

Service Max Operating Pressure(psig)

Test Pressure(psig)

Max Operating Temp(∀F)

Process Air (PA) 150 225 +10/-0 150

Sizes 3/4 in. and smaller 1 in. and largerPipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamlessWall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if

indicated as threaded on the Drawings).Nipples Schedule 80S. Schedule 80S.Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in

accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS SP-97.O-ring Unions 304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000,

Manufacturer: Hart Industries. Valves – Gate None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351,

Class 200, OS&Y bonnet, flexible or solid wedge disc, socket weld ends, Powell Figure 2490

Valves – Ball Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

Valves – Check None. Spring-assisted, non-slam, in-line, socket weld, 750 CWP, ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Body, 316 stainless spring, Zelon®22

O-ring, DFT®22 Inc. Model SCV.


22 Zelon and DFT is a registered trademark of DFT, Inc., Exton, Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 130 of 317

FORinin

accordaaccord

ally reinflly rein

ORinlen

RINFORMATON

ss Steess Steer: Hart Iner: Hart InINF

M A351 GrA351 G0.1, socket.1, socke

ies 7000.es 7000.

RMSpriSpriweld, 7weld, 7Body, 316Body, 31

-ring, Dring,

ATTTTONONLY

FTO


23 31 01 – 1

SECTION 23 31 01

TANK VENTILATION DUCTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes waste retrieval tank ventilation ductwork and housing assembly installation, cleaning, inspection, and testing.





ASME AG-1, 2012 Code on Nuclear Air and Gas Treatment


ASNT SNT-TC-1A Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A and ASNT Standard Topical Outlines for Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel

C. Hanford Documents

H-14-109924 241-AX Ventilation Site Plan

OSD-T151-00013 Operating Specifications for Single-Shell Waste Storage Tanks

TFC-ENG-STD-07 Ventilation System Design Standard

RPP-CALC-57515 AX-Farm Tank Exhaust System Duct Loss and Performance Curve

RPP-CALC-57516 AG-1 Duct Volume, Pressure Test Criteria Calculation

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 131 of 317

FORand genand geation Secton Se



f MechaniMechan

CodeCod

ructive Teructive Te

mmended mmended andard Tondard T

uctive Tective TONLYte Plan Plan

SinglSin


23 31 01 – 2

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. No variation of duct configuration is permitted except by the approved design documents.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Documented in work package or fabrication document as applicable.


A. Construct ductwork in accordance with design documentation.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years’ ASME AG-1 experience.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Comply with Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 DUCT MATERIAL

A. Duct and housing materials must be in accordance with design documentation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and support ductwork and housing assemblies in accordance with design documents and Contract Statement of Work.

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal and taped polyethylene over open ductwork and housings to prevent foreign matter from entering ductwork system.

C. Install flexible connection with minimum 1-in. slack immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 132 of 317

FOR

ASAS

nstruct ducuct du

IONSONSINFORMATON

mpanympany spec specyy’ ASME ASME

prior to insrior to in

ONSN

ONLYh design dodesign d


23 31 01 – 3

3.2 CLEANING

A. During system installation, wipe/clean the interior surfaces of all ducts, housings, and components as required to remove dust and debris.

3.3 DUCT LEAKAGE

A. Inspect and test assembled duct and housing systems. Joints that are not testable after field installation (such as riser connections, adapter assemblies between the tank and tank isolation valve) that were tested after fabrication testing do not require testing.

B. Perform visual inspections and leak testing in accordance with ASME AG-1. Test parameters are shown in Table 3.3B.

Note: Do not disassemble Inlet Assembly or Ductwork after testing is complete. If the assemblies are disassembled for any reason, they must be retested.

Table 3.3B: Ventilation Ductwork Test Parameters for POR1268 and POR1279

Component Test Description Test ParameterExhaust Ductwork Assembly

Pressure Decay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate with Exhauster

18 scfm (max)1,8,9

Pressure Decay Test of Entire System, Leak Rate Without Exhauster

15 scfm (max)2,8,9

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate for Moisture Separator Only

0.327 scfm (max)3

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate for Individual Duct Components4

See RPP-CALC-57516

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Pressure -40.0 ± 1 in wg.5Tank Air Inlet Assembly (w/o Vacuum Controller)

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Rate 3.7 scfm (max)6

Pressure Decay Test, Leak Pressure -3 + 1 in wg.71Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.6% times flow rate or 3000 scfm).2Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 3000 scfm).3Based on RPP-CALC-57516, Table 1.4Any combination of the duct sections can be tested at the same time as long as the total leak rate from all sections does not exceed 15 scfm.5Based on 125% of maximum fan pressure, see VI-50645.6Based on Table SA-B-1310, ASME AG-1, (0.5% times flow rate or 745 scfm), see RPP-CALC-57515.7Based on 125% of -2.4 in. w.g. Limit in OSD-T151-00013.8Tests using POR126 require valve AX241-VTP-V-005 to be shut prior to execution of test.9Tests using POR127 require valve AX241-VTP-V-001 to be shut prior to execution of test.

C. Remake any leaking joints and repeat test. Record results on a new data sheet.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 133 of 317

parapara

te: Do note: Do noassemblieassemblie

atioat

Nor 3000300

30

INFORMATON

n Dun Dut Descriptit DescriptiIN

ure Decay Te Decay Tausterauster

NFcay Test ofay Test of

usteruster

FOest, Leak Rt, LeakRM

eak Rate forak Rate fo

MAessuressure

ATTOONNONLY

scfm00 scfm).0 scfm

g as the totaas the tot

RPPRPP-C


23 31 13 – 1

SECTION 23 31 13

AIR COMPRESSOR METAL DUCTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section includes ventilation ductwork and duct sealing for the exhaust cooling air of the Air and Water Service Building 241-A-285 air compressor unit.


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.




ASTM A90 Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings


B. American Welding Society (AWS)


AWS D1.3, 2008 Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel

AWS D9.1 Sheet Metal Welding Code

C. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS)


MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 134 of 317

FORand genand ge

and Divisd Div



or Testing Testin

StandStan

Standard TStandard Tating on Irong on Ir

Alloyloy Coat Coayy

ecificatiocificatir ZiZONLY

nc-nc-IroIroy the Hotthe Hot

Steeltee


23 31 13 – 2


NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)

SMACNA 1520 Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards

SMACNA 1922 Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards

HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 181A Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts


A. Construct ductwork in accordance with SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible, and NFPA 90A.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

C. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 steel.

2.2 WALL LOUVER

A. The exhaust louver shall be of corrosion resistant metal, or suitably finished to resist corrosion.

B. Size, and location shall be as shown on drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 135 of 317

FORderwritederwrite

1A1A

RARAINFORMATON

NCENCE

ork in accork in accnd FlexiblFlexib

or to fabricr to fabric

ONLYed steel sd steel s

with ASTMwith ASTM


23 31 13 – 3

2.3 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate ductwork, duct access doors, and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible. Furnish duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for design pressure class indicated.

B. Construct T’s, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1 1/2 times centerline duct width.

C. Provide, at minimum, rectangular 45 degree entry fittings for rectangular ducts.

D. Duct sizes noted are inside clear dimensions. No variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of equivalent or lower loss coefficient is permitted except by written permission from the Buyer’s Technical Representative. Round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts shall be sized in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

E. Increase duct size gradually, not exceeding 15 degree divergence wherever possible. Do not exceed 30-degree divergence upstream of equipment. Do not exceed 45-degree convergence downstream of equipment.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports for ducting as necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify sizes of equipment connection before fabricating transitions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install, seal, and support ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.

B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

D. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

E. Repair damaged galvanized ductwork surfaces (welds, scratches, etc.) by applying minimum 2 coats of a zinc base paint.

F. Install wall louver as shown on drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 136 of 317

FOR

ritterittetalled in talled in

of equivaf equiva

uct sizct sINFORMATON

e gre gnot exceenot excee

ee convergee converg

TSS

ts for ductfor duct

re fabrice fabriONLYh SMACNSMACN


23 31 13 – 4

3.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes is permitted except by written permission from engineering.

B. The ductwork provided per this Specification shall interface with the HVAC Systems procured via the design drawings.

C. Any proposed changes to existing equipment to facilitate installation of the ductwork shall be discussed with and approved by the Owner prior to proceeding.

D. All indoor supply ductwork shall be flanged in spool piece sizes, as determined by installation contractor, to accommodate field obstructions and installation limitations.

E. No welding is allowed within the facility or to existing structures within the facility. All ductwork and supports shall accommodate this requirement in the design.

F. As much as field conditions allow, slope all horizontal duct runs away from the air compressor unit. Slope shall be a minimum of 1/16” per foot.

3.4 DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION

A. Construct ducting for a minimum pressure classification of 1.5 in. w.g.

3.5 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints in accordance to the duct pressure classification as described in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.

B. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams with welds, gaskets, mastic adhesives, mastic plus embedded fabric systems, or tape.

1. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181A. Provide products bearing appropriate UL 181A markings.

2. Do not use sealing products not bearing UL approval markings.

C. Do not use pressure-sensitive sealant on ducts with a pressure class of 1 in. w.g. or greater.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 137 of 317

FOR

atioatio

welding is lding is. All duct All duc

INFORMATON

d conditiod conditiot Slope sSlope s

LLASSIFIASSIF

mum pressmum press

e to the due to the truction ructionONLY

s with welwith wr tape.tape.

1A. Prov1A. Prov


26 05 19 – 1

SECTION 26 05 19

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Building wire (600V).

B. TC cable (2000V and 600V).

C. Wire and cable connectors.

D. Insulating tape and tubing.

E. Wire pulling lubricant.

1.2 REFERENCES



A. American Standards for Testing and materials (ASTM)

ASTM B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM D3005 Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 70, 2014 National Electrical Code (NEC)

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 422 IEEE Guide for the Design and Installation of Cable Systems in Power Generating Stations

IEEE 1210 Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling Lubricants with Wire and Cable

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 138 of 317

FOR

anan

ulating tapulating ta

ling lubring lubINFORMATON

visions of tisions of pecificatioecificatio

rs referencs referenerenced doerenced

dd

aterials (Aerials (A

ificatficaONLY

ion fion f

n for Lfor LowoPlastic PrPlastic Pr


26 05 19 – 2

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors


UL 486D Sealed Wire Connector Systems

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 1277 Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members

1.3 SUBMITTALS




2. Deleted.

C. Approval Not Required

1. Deleted.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

Not used.


A. Comply with the NEC for components and installation.

B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 139 of 317

FOR 127777

INFORMATON

StatementStatemen

k package package

ONLY


26 05 19 – 3

1.7 PERMITS


1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

Not used.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 WIRE

A. Provide NRTL-listed building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following characteristics:

1. Description: Single conductor 600V, 90°C insulated wire.

2. Conductor:

a. 98% conductivity, annealed, uncoated copper (per ASTM B3) solid or stranded as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

3. Insulation: The following types, rated 600V:

a. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1 AWG and smaller, Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL 83.

b. 1/0 AWG and larger, Type XHHW per UL 44.

B. Multi-conductor portable power cables shall be 600V rated for extra hard usage Type G or W per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and shall be rated for sun light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding conductor.

C. Multi-conductor portable control cables shall be 600V extra hard usage such as Type SOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light, damp, and wet locations and contain a green insulated equipment-grounding conductor.

D. Signal cables shall be 600V Type SOOW per NEC Article 400 Table 400.4, Note 4 and be rated for sun light and wet locations and contain a braid shield or drain wire.

E. Heat trace cable shall be the self-regulating type as shown on the drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 140 of 317

de NRTLe NRTListics:stics:INFORMATON

ption: Sinption: Sin

uctivityctivity, a, ded as speded as sp

g types, ratypes, rat

ted on thed on thULUL 83.83.ONLY

W per ULW per U

V rated forV rated forand shall and shall

ed equd e


26 05 19 – 4

F. Color code conductors as follows:

1. Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.

2. Use water and oil resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4 in. minimum width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 35”

3. Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color coding.

4. Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:

Conductor Color CodesSystem

Voltage:

Conductor:

480Y/277V 208Y/120V 120/240V

Phase A: Red Black BlackPhase B: Yellow Purple BrownPhase C: Blue Brown ---Grounded (Neutral):

White/Gray White/Gray White/Gray

Equipment Grounding:

Green Green Green

Isolated Ground:

--- --- ---

Switched: Purple Pink Blue

5. Use the following color codes for DC power system conductors:

Positive: RedNegative: Black

6. Provide color code for control conductors as indicated on equipment or control system manufacturer’s drawings.

2.3 TC-ER CABLE

A. Provide tray cable (Type TC-ER) that complies with UL 1277, the NEC, and this Section.

B. TC-ER cable shall be rated 90°C, minimum of 600V insulation rating, UL listed, sunlight and weather resistant, rated for direct burial and rated for variable frequency drive (VFD) use where specified on the drawings. TC cable rated for VFD use shall have a 2,000V insulation rating.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 141 of 317

FOR VoVo

uctor:to

FR INFORMATON

INNYY

NNNNFBlBl

FFFOFWhite/GrWhite/Gr

FOeeneen

RMMA----

AAATAPinkPink

TOONNNNpoONLY

wer swer sysy

ed o


26 05 19 – 5

C. Provide TC-ER cables with quantities and sizes (minimum 12 AWG) of conductors as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide TC-ER cable rated for VFD as shown on the Drawings.

E. TC-ER cable manufacturer: General Cable or equal.

2.4 CABLE PROTECTORS

A. Cable Protectors: Where cables require protection from vehicle or pedestrian traffic, use a cable protector such as Yellow Jacket®23, Bumblebee®23, or Cable Guard®23. Cable Guard or other engineering approved protection shall be used at vehicle and crane crossings.

2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use Pressure type, or spring type rated for use with copper conductors with insulating caps or covers rated for 600V and 105°C that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C. Thomas and Betts Corporation “Sta-Kon®24,” 3M Company “Scotchlok™17,” or approved substitute, where required by the NEC.

B. For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the following materials:

1. Tin-plated copper split-bolt connectors that meet the requirements in UL 486A-486B; provide with matching 600V snap-on insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “Type KSA” with “Type SC” insulating cover.

2. Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B that have two or more range-taking mechanical lugs and matching 600Vinsulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP” or “UNITAP,”Ilsco “Type PCT,” Blackburn “AMT.”

C. For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B listed circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.

1. Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index/color code, and number/locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types “YA,” “YA-L,” “YA-L-NT,” “YS,” and “YC-C.” Thomas & Betts “Color-Keyed.”

23 Yellow Jacket, Bumblebee, Cable Guard are registered trademarks of Peterson Systems International, Inc.24 Sta-Kon is a registered trademark of Thomas and Betts Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 142 of 317

FORCONNECONN

ices and tices and typpe rae r

VINFORMATON

ededand 10and 1taa-Kon®Kon®

equired byequired by

copper wicopper wi

bolt conneolt conneith matchih matchi

TyT pe KSAe KSAy

iONLYremenementstal lugs andal lugs and

OLYTAPOLYTA

86


26 05 19 – 6

2. Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps. Each adapter shall include a 600V, 90°C rated insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”

3. Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable forcontrol wiring. Use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation grip that meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok MNG,” Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”

4. Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs.

5. Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks.

D. Insulation-piercing type connectors are not acceptable for power or control wiring.

2.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING

A. For making re-enterable tape-insulated splices and connections, provide varnished cambric electrical insulating tape made of cotton cambric fabric that is oil primed and coated with electrical insulating varnish. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 2510”(no adhesive) and “Scotch 2520” (pressure-sensitive adhesive).

B. Insulate taped splices and connections using ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and is rated for 90°C continuous operation and 130°C short-term overload service. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 130C.”

C. For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices and connections use vinyl plastic tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 and has the following characteristics:

1. 8.5 mil minimum thickness.

2. ASTM D3005, Rated 600V and 105°C, suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

3. Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from 0 through 100°F without loss of physical or electrical properties.

4. Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.

5. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 143 of 317

FOR UU

ationio -pierpier

INFORMATON

E AND E AND

erable tapeerable tapeulating tapating tap

al insulatinal insulatin2520520”” (pre(pr

ctctions usinions usinUL 510 aUL 510 a

oad servicd serv

ONLYand cnd conohas the follas the fol

nd


26 05 19 – 7

D. Provide heat shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D and has the following characteristics:

1. Rated 600V.

2. Factory applied adhesive/sealant.

3. Split resistant.

4. Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN.”

E. Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series.”

2.7 WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT

A. Provide NRTL-listed wire pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor insulation or jacket, has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and leaves no flammable residue. For cold weather installations, provide wire pulling lubricant suitable for conduit temperature.

B. Compatibility with conductor insulation shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 1210.

C. Manufacturer:

1. For conduit temperature above freezing: American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater®25” “Lubricant J.”

2. For conduit temperature below freezing: American Polywater Corporation, “Polywater” “Lubricant WJ.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.

C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

25 Polywater is a registered trademark of American Polywater Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 144 of 317

FORULLINGULLIN

e NRTLe NRTL-l-n or jackor jacINFORMATON

etetmable rmableble for conle for con

onductor ducto

bove freezve freez““LubricaLubrica

ezing: Azing: AWJWONLY


26 05 19 – 8

E. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required to meet field conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Swab raceway before installing wire.

C. Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +15°F. Store cold cables for at least 24 hours in a heated building prior to installation.

3.3 WIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install wire according to, the NEC, the requirements in this Section.

B. Do not bend cables installed in raceways to less than manufacturer’s recommended bending radii. Lay cables in raceways in straight, parallel lines, and avoid crossing.

1. Use lubricant recommended by wire or cable manufacturer, or wire-pulling compound specified when pulling wire and cable through conduit.

2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when ambient temperature is 15°F or lower.

3. Identify conductors, by wire numbers shown on the Drawings, with wiremarkers. Attach wiremarkers at termination points within 2-in. of wire terminations. Marker nomenclature shall be visible without moving wires or markers.

C. Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.

1. No tension monitoring devices are required where hand pull techniques are used.

2. Calculate expected cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressures for each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between accessible pull points:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 145 of 317

FORb racb ra

not handlehandle44 hours in hours in

ATATINFORMATON

IONION

ding to, thding to, th

talled in raalled in rdiidi . LaLay cy

ed byb wirewireywhen pullinhen pull

thermophermoONLYwn on the Don the D

on points on pointe visible we visible


26 05 19 – 9

a. 4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 ft of raceway.

b. 3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 40 ft of raceway.

c. 2 equivalent 90-degree bends and 80 ft of raceway.

d. 1 equivalent 90-degree bend and 150 ft of raceway.

e. Straight pull with more than 250 ft of raceway.

3. For cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure calculations use formulas and factors described in IEEE 422.

4. Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the following maximum allowable values:

a. Maximum sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft.

b. Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil

c. Maximum tension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket: 2000 lb, not to exceed 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.

5. Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on each pull of conductors where a pulling winch is used.

a. Record the maximum measured pulling tension for each monitored cable pull.

b. Place the recorded cable pulling tension for each monitored cable pull and the corresponding calculated allowable pulling tension in the work package or fabrication document.

6. Deleted.

7. Deleted.

D. Use solid or stranded copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for outlets and lighting branch circuits. Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings, or cabinets where a change of raceway alignment occurs.

3.4 TYPE TC CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install TC cables according to the NEC and requirements in this Section.

B. Install and support Type TC cables as required in Article 336 of the NEC.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 146 of 317

FOR sidesidefofollowlow

MMINFORMATON

axax

MaximumMaximum

mum tensum tennot to exnot to ex

ring devicring deviing winching winch

measuredmeasure

ng tg ONLYensionnsionated allowated allo

cument.ment.


26 05 19 – 10

3.5 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.

C. Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.

D. Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or terminals.

E. Make connections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors immediately before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.

F. Connect conductors 1/0 AWG and larger using compression terminals at the locations described below. Compression terminals shall be installed where there is adequate wire bending space to accommodate compression terminals. Select compression terminals suitable for the conductor sizes, materials, and termination point configurations. Install compression terminals using the manufacturer’s recommended dies and minimum 12-ton force compression tools.

1. Circuit breakers with frame size greater than 100 amperes that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

2. Safety switches and fused switches rated more than 100 amperes.

3. Transformers; refer to Section 26 22 13, “Low Voltage Distribution Transformers.”

4. Switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, and similar service and distribution equipment.

5. Utilization equipment connections that are NRTL listed for with compression terminals.

G. For conductors sized 1/0 AWG and larger, and where compression lugs cannot be installed, connect using mechanical lugs, in the locations or conditions described below.

1. Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or compression adapters.

2. Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either compression terminals or compression adapters.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 147 of 317

FORe coe co

mediatelmediatel

ct conductct conducdescribdescriINFORMATON

ed edre bendire bendirminals suminals su

ns. Installns. Installnd minimuminimu

th frame sframe sssion termssion term

witches rwitches

6 22 13,22 13,

ONLYl centers, centers,

L listed fo listed foL


26 05 19 – 11

H. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.

3.6 INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING INSTALLATION

A. Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers or insulating tape built up to not less than 150% of insulation rating of conductor.

1. Apply varnished cambric tape over connections where re-entry is likely, such as motor lead connections.

2. Use rubber insulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic insulation over splices and taps.

3. Use vinyl plastic tape in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective covering over splices and taps.

C. Insulate cylinder shaped splices and taps, connector barrels and adapter barrels using heat shrinkable insulating tubing, insulating covers manufactured for the connector, or tape insulation as described above.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings.

C. Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splice, junction, and pull box.


A. Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.

1. Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or cables with material or manufacturing defects.

2. Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked, dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.

B. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 148 of 317

AppAppsuch asuch a

e rubbrubINFORMATON

er ier ion over on over

plastic tapplastic tapsplices anplices an

plices and ces and ng tubing,ng tubing

described described

f SectionSectioONLY

n 2

ther desigther desi

spl


26 05 19 – 12

C. Perform the following inspections:

1. Inspect conductors and cables for:

a. Freedom from material defect or physical damage.

b. Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type.

c. Correct color coding and identification.

2. Inspect connections for:

a. Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications.

b. Deleted.

D. Perform the following tests:

1. Before connecting conductors to equipment, use a megohmmeter in a 1-minute test to verify the insulation integrity of each service conductor and feeder conductor with respect to ground and other conductors in the same raceway.

a. Use 1000VDC to test conductors rated 600V and 2000V, and 500VDC for conductors rated 300V or less.

b. Insulation test values shall be in accordance with the following:

i. Conductors with 300V insulation rating and insulation resistances over 25 megohms are acceptable.

ii. Conductors with 600V insulation rating and insulation resistances over 100 megohms are acceptable.

iii. Conductors with 2000V insulation rating and insulation resistances over 500 megohms are acceptable.

c. Conductors with insulation resistances less than indicated aboveshall be investigated.

2. Prior to connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity to ensure proper circuit is identified to facilitate correct connection of each power circuit conductor and each control circuit conductor.

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 149 of 317

FORb.b

m the follm the foll

orereINFORMATON

connecconnete test to vte test to v

r conductoconducty.

VDCDC to teto teconductorconducto

ues shall bshall b

300V ins300V inmegohmmegohmONLY

sulation rulation ms are accms are ac

n rating an rating acceptcce


26 05 19 – 13

4. Perform insulation (megger) test on electric heat trace cable at installation before and after insulation is installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Measure and record in the work package or fabrication document the tightness of not less than 10% of each size and type of mechanical or bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver. Additionally, verify proper crimping method, as applicable.

a. Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the connector manufacturer or as shown in Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”

b. If any connection is found to be less than 90% of the recommended torque, notify the Buyer’s Technical Representative and re-torque all bolted connections on the Project.

E. Remove and replace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and connectors. Re-inspect and re-test replacement conductors and connectors.

F. Place test and inspection records in the work package or fabrication document.

G. Verify inspections and tests required by other sections are completed before conductors may be energized.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 150 of 317

FOR e and reple and rep. ReRINFORMATON

inspinsp

nspection rnspection r

d tests reqtests reqgized.gized.

ION 26 0ON 26 0

ONLY


26 05 19 – Att. 1–1


RECOMMENDED TIGHTENING TORQUE PER UL 486A-486B

Table 21 – Tightening torque for screwsConductor Size installed in

Connector

Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)Slotted Head No. 10 and Larger* Hexagonal Head – External Drive

Socket WrenchSlot Width – 1.2mm (.047 in) or Less and Slot Length – 6.4mm

(1/4 in.) or less

Slot Width – Over 1.2mm (.047 in) or Slot Length – Over 6.4mm (1/4 in.) or

less

AWG or kcmil mm2 Split-Bolt

ConnectorsOther

Connectors

30 – 10 .05 – 5.3 2.3 (20) 4.0 (35) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)8 8.4 2.8 (25) 4.5 (40) 9.0 (80) 8.5 (75)

6 – 4 13.2 – 21.2 4.0 (35) 5.1 (45) 18.6 (165) 12.4 (110)3 26.7 4.0 (35) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)2 33.6 4.5 (40) 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)1 42.4 - 5.6 (50) 31.1 (275) 16.9 (150)

1/0 – 2/0 53.5 – 67.4 - 5.6 (50) 43.5 (385) 20.3 (180)3/0 – 4/0 85.0 – 107.2 - 5.6 (50) 56.5 (500) 28.2 (250)250 – 350 127 – 177 - 5.6 (50) 73.4 (650) 36.7 (325)

400 203 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 36.7 (325)500 253 - 5.6 (50) 93.2 (825) 42.4 (375)

600 – 750 304 – 380 - 5.6 (50) 113.0 (1000) 42.4 (375)800 – 1000 406 – 508 - 5.6 (50) 124.3 (1100) 56.5 (500)1250 – 2000 635 – 1000 - - 124.3 (1100) 67.8 (600)* For values of slot width or length not corresponding to those specified, select the largest torque value associated with the

conductor size. Slot width is the nominal design value. Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot.

Table 22 – Tightening torque for slotted head screws smaller than No. 10 intended for use with 8 AWG (8.4 mm2 ) or smaller conductors

Slot Length of Screw* Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)Slot Width of Screw Smaller than 1.2mm

(.047 in.)

Slot Width of Screw 1.2mm (.047 in.) and larger**mm inch

Less than 4 Less than 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.0 (9)

4 5/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)4.8 3/16 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)5.6 7/32 0.79 (7) 1.4 (12)6.4 1/4 1.0 (9) 1.4 (12)7.1 9/32 - 1.7 (15)

Above 7.1 Above 9/32 - 2.3 (20)* For slot lengths of intermediate values, select torques pertaining to next shorter slot length.Also see Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means.Slot length shall be measured at the bottom of the slot.** Slot width is the nominal design value

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 151 of 317

FOR F66FFFFOFOFOFOFOOOOO

--

OOORORR

TON bf-f

INFORMATO

--ININFNFFFFOFOFOFOFOFOFOFOFOORng to those sng to thoseSlot length sSlot length

rews rews smama

in)in

TOcrew 1.2mmew 1.2mm

rger**er**

ONONLYOOOONONONN


26 05 19 – Att. 1–2

Table 23 – Tightening torque for screws with recessed allen or square drives

Socket Width Across Flats* Tightening Torque, N•m (lbf-in)mm inch

3.2 1/8 5.1 (45)4.0 5/32 11.3 (100)4.8 3/16 13.6 (120)5.6 7/32 16.9 (150)6.4 1/4 25.4 (225)7.9 5/16 33.9 (300)9.5 3/8 45.2 (400)12.7 1/2 56.6 (500)14.3 9/16 67.8 (600)

* See Table 21 for screws with multiple tightening means

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 152 of 317

FOR INFORMATON

ENE

ONLY


26 05 26 – 1

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Connection to Main Grounding Electrode System.

B. Circuit and System Grounding.

C. Enclosure and Equipment Grounding System.




A. American Standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System

IEEE 142 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

IEEE 837 IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections used in Substation Grounding



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 153 of 317

FORsusu

D DOCUD DOCU

eneral prneral pvisiis INFORMATON

on 01 Son 01

ts and otheand othction. Reon. R

se indicatee indicat

ting and Mting and

ndard Spendard Sper Conductr Conduc

ineers (IEineers (IONLYing Earthng Earth

h Surface h Surface

GrounGro


26 05 26 – 2


UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment

UL 486A-486B Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors


1.3 SUBMITTALS






B. Verify products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.

1.5 RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING

A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR

A. Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8.

B. Provide ground electrode conductor for separately derived systems and equipment in the Tank Farm and bond to nearest tank riser.

2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.

B. Use solid or stranded grounding conductors 12 AWG and smaller where not subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 154 of 317

FOR

ovaova

DocumDocu

URANURANINFORMATON

he NEC fohe NEC f

t are listede lister the applir the appl

PROTECROTEC

e productse products

ONLYwith the rewith the re


26 05 26 – 3

C. Use stranded grounding conductors for 10 AWG and larger.

D. Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing.

E. Color code grounding conductors as follows:

1. Equipment ground:

a. Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.

b. Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black colored insulation with 3/4 in. wide band of water and oil-resistant green plastic adhesive tape.

2.4 GROUND PLATES

A. Provide ground plates designed for flush mounting in concrete structures.

B. Furnish copper alloy castings with four 1/2 in. x 13 in. threaded holes at 1.75 in. x 1.75 in. NEMA spacing and a welding stud or compression connection suitable for 2 AWG to 250 kcmil copper conductor.

C. Manufacturer: Burndy “YGF.”

2.5 CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Type “BLG.”

2.6 EXOTHERMIC WELD GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.

B. In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.

C. Match mold and weld material-to-material types, shapes, and sizes to be joined.

D. Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld.

2.7 COMPRESSION GROUNDING CONNECTIONS

A. Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making irreversible compression grounding connections.

B. Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE 837.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 155 of 317

FORD PLD PLATA

e ground pe ground

pep INFORMATON

alloalloy cyin. NEMAin. NEMAWG to G to 250 250

““YGF.YGF.””

INGSINGS

malleablealleableground caground c

” ONLYIONSONS

hermic weermic w

n tytype y


26 05 26 – 4

C. Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that match the connectors.

D. Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be joined.

E. Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars, ground plates, and equipment ground pads.

F. Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground®26.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

C. Grounding cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

1. Install and route cable as required meeting project conditions.

2. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact locations, routing, and lengths required to meet project conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine equipment and building finishes that are to receive grounding and bonding material for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section, and the Drawings.

B. Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

C. Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Use compression or bolted grounding connection methods in the Tank Farm areas:

1. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of dissimilar materials.

26 Hyground is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Shelton, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 156 of 317

FOR rifyrify thatthyybeen compen com

at field at fieldINFORMATON

meme

le routingle routing

oute cable e cabl

ng is not sng is nottions, routtions, rou

that are hat are ationtioONLY

n tolertolertoryory condcony


26 05 26 – 5

2. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for underground or concealed connections of like materials.

3. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for accessible connections.

4. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment; acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy stainless steel.

5. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel tamper-resistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers, and toothed lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist loosening with common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners include penta-head, break-away, and oval designs.

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,”Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.” Use a calibrated torque wrench.

E. Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Follow connector manufacturer’s installation instructions and use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed.

F. Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

G. Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and mechanical clamps.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 157 of 317

FOR aalooseloosincludeinclude

oundunINFORMATON

ng ang adance widance w

bolts. Whlts. Whonnectiononnection

Low Voltaow Voltaended Tignded Tig

to provideto providew connectow connecto

mmendedmmendeor other sor other

adedequqONLYuatelyuately

ufacturerfacturer show convow conv


26 05 26 – 6

4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

3.4 MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. Install in accordance with the NEC and the Drawings.

B. Concrete encased ground electrode and ground plates are provide in accordance with Specifications below and Drawings.

1. Install a concrete-encased main grounding electrode in the lower part of the perimeter strip footing or grade beam to form a complete and continuous loop around the structure. Encase the electrode with at least 2 in. of concrete from the bottom of the foundation or footing. Use one of the following materials for the electrode:

a. Bare or zinc galvanized or other electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars, minimum 1/2-in. diameter. Bond reinforcing rods together using steel wire ties or other effective means.

b. Bare #2 copper conductor. Space cable from the bottom and sides of the grade beam so it has at least 2 in. of concrete coverage. Bond to the rebar in one place.

c. Perform NEC inspection of main grounding electrode prior to pouring concrete.

C. Install ground plates flush with the concrete slab. Locate ground plates adjacent to switchboard. Bond ground electrode to ground plates with #2 AWG pigtail using UL-listed compression fittings.

D. Bond building perimeter structural steel column to the main grounding electrode via ground plates and ground cables sized as indicated on the Drawings.

3.5 CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM GROUNDING

A. Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the ground plate; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.

B. In the service entrance equipment, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other neutral-to-ground connections on the load side of the service entrance disconnect.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 158 of 317

IIthe pthe pcontinucontinu22 in. of coin. of c

e folloolloINFORMATON

wingwin

Bare or zinBare or zinel reinforcel reinforc

rcing rodsing rods

r conductor conductm so it hm so it asas

one placeone place

of main grof main g

ONLY LLocate gocate g

lates with lates wit

gr


26 05 26 – 7

C. Separately Derived Systems:

1. Connect ground bus of first disconnecting means for separately derived systems (e.g., dry type transformers) to the nearest ground plate (preferred) or building structural steel column; use grounding conductor sized as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NEC.

2. At the first system overcurrent device or disconnecting means, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus using a bonding jumper sized as required by the NEC. For systems in the Tank Farm, provide grounding electrode conductor to nearest tank riser. Sized grounding electrode conductor in accordance with the NEC and use UL Listed pipe grounding clamp or to an existing ground tap on riser with the approval of the TOC ConstructionRepresentative.

3.6 ENCLOSURE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Provide permanent and effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in accordance with NEC requirements, and as further specified or shown on the Drawings.

B. Provide an equipment ground bar, separate from any neutral bar, in all switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment and raceway ground conductors. Make connections to the ground bar using mechanical lugs or compression lugs.

C. Make connections and couplings on metallic conduit systems wrench tight.

D. Grounding Bushings:

1. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduit containing circuits rated 480 VAC or 100 amperes and higher.

2. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

3. Install grounding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

4. Bond conduit grounding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug in switchboard, panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with the NEC.

E. Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch circuit.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 159 of 317

FOR ReR

RE AND EE AND

rmanm INFORMATON

ent aent ath NEC rth NEC

t ground bground bds, transfos, transfo

ets, etc., fos, etc., foground coground c

s or comprs or compr

etallic conallic co

ONLYnduit contnduit cont

ntering entering e


26 05 26 – 8

1. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the grounding terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.

2. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as shown on the Drawings.

F. In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor pigtail.

G. Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a “self-grounding” receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path.


A. General: Perform on-site verification, certification, and acceptance testing of the grounding installation during construction if required by the design media.

B. Notify the TOC Construction Representative ten working days in advance of the expected completion of a grounding system installation specified in Part C. Verification and testing can be scheduled in parts or by area depending on the system and construction schedule.

C. Before work is concealed, verify and certify that the following grounding installations have been made correctly:

1. The building grounding electrode system. This includes the bonding of the structural steel columns and bonding of other metallic systems.

2. Ground plates and grounding bars.

3. All other underground grounding installations.

D. Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing for building/transformer area grounding electrode system and place test results in work package or fabrication document. Tests may be witnessed by designated representatives.

1. Perform ground-impedance measurements using the “fall-of-potential”method in accordance with IEEE 81. Use instrumentation specifically designed for ground impedance testing. Provide sufficient spacing of test electrodes so that the plotted curves flatten in the 62% area of the distance between the item under test and the current electrode. When sufficient spacing of electrodes is impractical for the “fall-of-potential” method,perform ground-impedance measurements using either the “intersecting curves method” or the “slope method,” referenced in IEEE 81. Investigate and correct ground resistances that exceed the following values:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 160 of 317

FOR undinundin

ALITY CLITY C

PerforrfoINFORMATON

m om oallation allation

onstructioonstructioof a grounf a groun

can be schcan be schhedule.edule.

and certiand certictlytly::

e ssysystem. tem. dinding og oONLY

f ot

ng/t


26 05 26 – 9

a. Service rated more than 50 kVA but less than 2500 kVA: 5 ohms.

2. Test equipment ground resistances for the following items. Measure resistance between the equipment item and the Electrode Ground Plate. Use the “two-point method” of IEEE 81. Investigate and correct equipment ground resistances that exceed 0.5 ohm.

a. Switchboards

E. Prepare test reports of the ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe any measures taken to improve test results. Place reports in work package or fabrication document.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 161 of 317

INFORMATON ONLY


26 05 29 – 1

SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install, hangers, supports, anchors, concrete bases, and other positive fastenings for non-structural electrical components such that gravity loads are safely transferred to the structure.





ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

Title 29 Labor Part 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards

C. Federal Specification (FS)

FS WW-H-171E Hangers and Supports, Pipe

D. International Code Council (ICC)


E. Manufacturers’ Standardization Society (MSS)



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 162 of 317

FORDODO

and generagenerd Divisiond Divisio

ummINFORMATON

nts andnts anhis Sectionis Section

erwise inerwise i

Testing anTesting an

StandardStandatuds, 60,0tuds, 60,0

al Sl SONLYafetafety ay

pepe


26 05 29 – 2

F. Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (MFMA)

MFMA-4 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MFMA-102 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

MFMA-103 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)


1.3 SUBMITTALS





A. Furnish and install hangers and supports that conform to the drawings and requirements of the following codes and standards:

1. NEC.

B. Where a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) has requirements for such products, provide products that are NRTL listed and labeled for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

1.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Alternate products may be accepted; in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 163 of 317

FOR486A486A

LSLS

ntratr INFORMATON

t Statt Sta

edd

n work pacwork pac

upports thupports thand and stanstan

ONLYtory (NRory (NR

sted and lasted and lent in whient in whi


26 05 29 – 3

2.2 COATINGS AND MATERIALS

A. Furnish products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic.

B. Furnish products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with hot-dip galvanized coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or material such as stainless steel with inherent corrosion resistant characteristics.

2.3 RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish supports as described below for the installation of raceway systems.

B. Use pressed steel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduits from threaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City “6H Series.”

C. Use malleable iron conduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC, or EMT conduit runs across, parallel, or perpendicular to beams, channels, and angle supports. Manufacturer: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC Series.”

D. Support multiple parallel horizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from framing channel materials specified below.

2.4 HANGER RODS

A. Furnish mild steel rods that conform to ASTM A307.

B. Furnish rods that are threaded on both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded with UNC (coarse) thread pitch.

2.5 FASTENERS

A. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors:

1. Furnish post-installed concrete anchors as shown on the Drawings.

2. Each post-installed anchor shall have an ICC-ES evaluation report stating that the product is compliant with the current edition of the IBC and the intended conditions of use.

3. For applications in outdoor, damp, or corrosive locations, furnish stainless steel post-installed anchors.

4. Furnish post-installed expansion, adhesive, and undercut anchors specified in the Contract Statement of Work

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 164 of 317

FOR

ish sish s

pressed stessed stts from thrs from th

INFORMATON

ron conduron condus, parallels, parallel

rer: Steel r: Steel

horizontal rizontal ecified belecified be

ASTM A3ASTM A

hreh ONLYaded onaded o


26 05 29 – 4

5. Powder-actuated threaded studs: Use zinc-plated carbon steel or stainless steel suitable for the intended service:

a. 1/4-20 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti X-W6.

b. 3/8-16 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti W10.

6. Concrete and masonry screw anchors: Heat-treated carbon steel. Manufacturer: Simpson Strong-Tie “Titen HD.”

B. Beam Clamps: NRTL-listed, or compliant with Federal Specification WW-H-171E, or compliant with MSS SP-69 and SP-58.

2.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Furnish U-channel framing systems that conform to MFMA-4 and are fabricated using minimum 12-gage steel.

B. Furnish fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacturer.

C. Manufacturers: B-Line.

2.7 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Furnish shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Furnish steel brackets fabricated from angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install hangers and supports according to the NEC, the requirements in this Section, and specific supporting requirements in other Sections and drawings.

B. Conform to manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for selection and installation of hangers and supports.

C. Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent supports.

D. Install flexible sections in electrical conduits and raceways where they cross expansion joints. Do not support conduits, boxes, raceways, etc., from ceiling suspension wires.

E. Use appropriate, calibrated, special tools when installing devices for which special installation tools are recommended by the manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 165 of 317

FORCHCH

nish Uh U-chachaminimum minimum

INFORMATON

s and acs and facturer. acturer.

ine.e.

DEVDEVICEIC

d supportsd supports

ngles, changles, chd machinmachinONLY

uiremuir


26 05 29 – 5

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive hangers and supports for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 FASTENERS

A. Post-installed concrete expansion anchors: Install in accordance with Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts,” and the product’s ICC-ES report conditions of use.

B. Use beam clamps or machine bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening to metal.

1. When clamping is impractical, obtain approval from the TOC Construction Representative before drilling, punching, cutting, or welding to building structural steel members for support attachments.

C. Fasten equipment to concrete or masonry with expansion anchors.

D. The use of lead-cinch drop in anchors is not allowed.

E. Torque threaded fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

B. Support three or more parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze hangers.

C. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers.

3.5 BOXES AND CABINETS

A. Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure, or by approved brackets or bar hangers, as shown on the Drawings or as required. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to structure on opposite sides of the box.

B. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support.

C. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards as shown on the Drawings or as required.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 166 of 317

FORWhWhConstrConstrto buildinto buildi

INFORMATON

ent to coent to co

nch drop inch drop i

ers as ers as recorec

peze) raceeze) racide U-de U-boltbo

and for sand for

ONLYl racewayracewa

hangers.hangers


26 05 29 – 6

3.6 FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS

A. Select and install framing channel systems in accordance with MFMA-103.

B. Use framing channel to support electrical equipment that is mounted free of walls.

C. Use framing channel to support equipment mounted on walls that do not have sufficient strength to resist pull-out or wallowing out of equipment mounting bolts.

3.7 HANGER RODS

A. Use minimum 3/8-in. diameter threaded rod; use larger diameter rod as indicated on the Drawings, in other Sections, or in the supported equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 167 of 317

e De Dtallationtallation

INFORMATON

ENE

ONLY


26 05 33 – 1

SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Conduits and fittings.

B. Outlet boxes and handholes.

C. Pull and junction boxes.

D. Wireway.




A. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway Systems Standard

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA C80.3 Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

NEMA FB1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies

NEMA ICS 4 Industrial Control and Systems Terminal Blocks

NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA OS 1 Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 168 of 317

FOR

ndnd

rewayreway.

CUMECUMEINFORMATON

provisionprovision01 Specif01 Spec

others refothers re ReferencReferen

icated.cated.

SSysy temsems

on (Nn (NONLY

EMAEMA

el Conduiel Condu

Tubing (ETubing (E

d


26 05 33 – 2

NEMA OS 3 Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes

NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit

NEMA TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing

NEMA TC 6 and 8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations

NEMA TC 7 Smooth wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit

NEMA TC 9 Fitting for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation



D. Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (SCTE)

SCTE 77 Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity


Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory

Electrical Construction Materials Directory

UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical

UL 467 Grounding and bonding Equipment

UL 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 169 of 317

FORMA TC 9A TC 9

INFORMATON

ProtectioProtectio

ommunicaommunic

SpecificaSpecifica

AppliancApplian

ONLYction Mattion Ma

al Conduil Condu

uituit


26 05 33 – 3

UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape

UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes

UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 514C Non-Metallic Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes

UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit

UL 651A Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethene (HDPE) Conduit

UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.



B. Rigid steel conduit. Verify the following:

1. Each length is marked with manufacturer’s name, UL label, and “Rigid Metal Conduit” or “Rigid Steel Conduit.”

C. Conduit fittings/metallic outlet boxes/terminal boxes (rigid, stainless steel). Verify the following:

1. Check one lot or container and verify each item has, at a minimum, the UL symbol and that the shipping label or the container for which the items are shipped contains the manufacturers name, the UL listing, and the type of items shipped. If the item is not marked with the UL symbol or manufacturer’s name, visually inspect the shipping carton of the item to ensure it is in accordance with the UL and manufacturer’s published data.

2. Check one lot or container and verify item size is in accordance with product description.

3. Verify external coating for each item is uniform (rigid steel only) and no damage exists.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 170 of 317

FOR797797

LSLS

tratr INFORMATON

ct Statect Sta

edd

nents and nents and

ng:g:

turerurer’ONLY

s nams nam”

s (rigid, stas (rigid, st

t


26 05 33 – 4

4. Verify material used is ferrous metal (rigid or malleable iron only) by performing magnetic test.

D. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

E. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.



PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 COATINGS

A. Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic that is suitable for the environment in which the product will be installed and used.

2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RMC that meets the requirements of UL 6 and NEMA C80.1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1.

2.4 PLASTIC-COATED STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish polyvinyl chloride (PVC) exterior coated, urethane interior coated, RMC that meets the requirements of NEMA RN 1.

B. Use factory-fabricated elbows.

C. Furnish 40 mils PVC exterior coated, urethane interior coated, zinc-plated, threaded, malleable iron fittings and conduit bodies meeting the requirements of UL 514B.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 171 of 317

FOR

uctiucti

CTSTS

TIONSTIONINFORMATON

AA

uctcts may may bbyynt of Worknt of Work

oating or woating or wnative treaative trea

e environmenviron

INGSINGSONLYL 66 andand NEN

and condund cond


26 05 33 – 5

2.5 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish RNC that conforms to UL 651, UL 651A, NEMA TC 2, NEMA TC 3, NEMA TC 6 & 8, and NEMA TC 7.

B. Furnish non-metallic, solvent-welded socket fittings that meet the requirements of UL 651, NEMA TC 3, and NEMA TC 9.

2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized EMT that conforms to UL 797 and NEMA C80.3.

B. Furnish compression type fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.7 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 1.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

2.8 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 360.

B. Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that meet the requirements of UL 514B and NEMA FB1. Furnish insulated throat connectors.

C. Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL 1 and the NEC.

2.9 INSULATING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105°C rated insulation.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.

2.10 GROUNDING BUSHINGS

A. Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150°C rated insulated throat grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 172 of 317

FOR

A A

E METAMETA

alvanizalvaniINFORMATON

eded

ed malleabd malleaburnish insuish in

METALMETAL C

tal conduital condui

r zinczinc--platplaNEMA FNEMA

ONLYhat meetshat meet


26 05 33 – 6

2.11 EXPANSION FITTINGS

A. Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron body, factory-installed packing and a bonding jumper.

B. Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX, or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.

C. Lubricant and Sealant

1. Lubricant and Sealant for Conduit Thread: Conductive compound providing anti-seize and corrosion protection. Thomas and Betts Corporation “KOPR-SHIELD®27,” or approved substitute.

2.12 PROTECTION TAPE AND CONDUIT SEALANT

A. Furnish pressure-sensitive, 10 mil thick. PVC based tape for corrosion protection of metal conduit and fittings. Manufacturer: 3M, Type 50.

B. Furnish plastic insulating tape that complies with UL 510.

C. Furnish electrical color-coding tape that complies with UL 510.

D. Furnish sealing compound for conduit: “Sealex®28” by Porcelain Products Company or “Duct Seal®29” by Gardner-Bender.

2.13 RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE

A. Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in 1-ft increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.

2.14 WIREWAY

A. Provide NRTL listed, wireway with covers, elbows, tees, hangers, and fittings required for a complete system. Wireway shall be rated for environment to be installed.

2.15 OUTLET BOXES

A. Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA OS 3 and the requirements of this Section.

B. Exterior Mounted Enclosures (terminal boxes) shall be: NEMA ICS 6, NEMA Type 4 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

27 KOPR-SHIELD is a registered trademark of Jet-Lube, Inc., Houston, Texas.28 Sealex is a registered trademark of Porcelain Products Company.29 Duct Seal is a registered trademark of Gardner-Bender, Inc.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 173 of 317

FOR TION TTION T

h pressureh pressureonduitonduiINFORMATON

anan

insulatingnsulating

lor--codingcoding

d for condud for conbyby GardnGardyy

ermanenrmanentbreakingbreakinONLYees, hangees, hang

for envirfor envir


26 05 33 – 7

C. For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL 514A.

1. For luminaire outlets use 4 in. x 1 1/2-in. deep (min.) boxes with fixture stud attachment as required to support luminaires.

2. For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 in. x 2 1/8-in. deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

D. For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems, provide outlet boxes that comply with UL 498, UL 514A, UL 514B, andNEMA FB1.

1. For lighting fixture outlets use 4 in. x 2 1/16-in. deep (min.) round cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs.

2. For surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4 11/16 square, 2 11/16-in. deep cast malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.

E. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosures: Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

2.16 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

A. Metallic boxes (junction boxes) shall be NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R, 16 or 14 gage steel.

B. For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments, use galvanized sheet steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 1 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 4-in. square x 1 1/2-in. deep with screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

C. For dry locations in dusty environments, use galvanized steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL 50 Type 12 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 6-in. square x 4-in. deep with gasketed covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.

D. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 in. trade size, provide 4 11/16-in. square, 2 11/16-in. deep (min.) cast malleable iron pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 174 of 317

FOR ems, ems,

EMA FB1MA FB1

For lightiFor lightlleabeaINFORMATON

e iroe ir

ace wallace wall--mmble iron boble iron b

red to fit ded to fit daluminumuminum

les for seces for se

, TyType 4 epe 4 eyyytings or setings or se

AONLYICS 6, TICS 6, T

mentsmen , useupe 1 ande 1 and

1


26 05 33 – 8

E. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 in. trade size and larger, provide galvanized sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 3R.

F. For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations that are subject to hose-directed water, provide pull and junction boxes and covers that comply with UL 50 Type 4.

G. For in-ground, non-metallic, open-bottom handholes, provide products that are NRTL-listed to SCTE 77.

1. Material: Polymer concrete.

2. Minimum SCTE 77 load rating:

a. Located in sidewalks: Tier 8.

b. Located in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway locations: Tier 22.

3. Size: As shown on drawings.

4. Cover: Non-skid cover with stainless steel cover bolts.

5. Identification: Permanent mark or logo on cover prominently identifying the function of the enclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.

6. Manufacturer: Quazite®30 “Style PC, PG, or PT.” or as shown on drawings.

H. Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.

I. For all entries into NEMA ICS 6, Type 3R enclosures: Type CGB for exposed cable, and Myers type watertight fittings or sealing-type locknuts for conduits.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Scale dimensions on the Drawings show desired and approximate locations of equipment. Actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by field conditions.

30 Quazite is a registered trademark of Hubbell Incorporated, Orange, Connecticut.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 175 of 317

FOR a.a.

b.b LLTTINFORMATON

erer

As shown os shown o

skid coveid cov

rmanent mmanent closure inclosure in

0 “StyStyle PCle P

groundinoundinONLYosures: Tysures: T

tytype lockpe locyyy


26 05 33 – 9

3.3 GENERAL

A. Perform work in accordance with NFPA 70, the Specifications, and the Drawings. Fasten equipment to structural members or metal supports attached to structure or to concrete surfaces

B. Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.

C. Install raceways and boxes according to the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and requirements in this Section.

D. Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

E. Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades. Route as required for a complete wiring system.

F. Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

G. Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements the National Electrical Code, Section 26 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

H. Identify raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

I. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

J. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.

3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 1000 volts) use conduit materials according to the NEC and the following:

1. Outdoors – in Tank Farm:

a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC, minimum 1” diameter. Install with 12-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade for in-farm traffic areas or a minimum depth of 6 in. in non-traffic areas.

2. Outdoors – exposed: Use RMC.

3. Outdoors – concealed: Use RMC for concealed outdoor work. Do not use bare RMC or IMC in direct contact with earth.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 176 of 317

FORcewayceway ro royyensioned. sioned.

as requiredas require

bb INFORMATON

ond raceond raced Bondingd Bonding

d boxes inboxes inn 26 05 29n 26 05 2

as requireas require

ain headroin headr

gs in bogs in boONLY use conduse cond


26 05 33 – 10

4. Outdoors – underground not in Tank Farm:

a. Direct buried: Use plastic-coated RMC or RNC Schedule 40 or 80 listed and marked for direct burial, 18-in. minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade.

b. All 90º Bends shall be PVC coated RMC or tape wrapped RMC.

5. Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or telecommunications rooms:

a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC.

b. Not exposed to deteriorating agents and not subject to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC or EMT.

6. Indoors – concealed:

a. Within concrete floors: Use RMC or RNC type EB.

b. Direct-buried under building floor slabs on grade: PVC-coated rigid or RNC type DB or EB. Locate top of conduits not less than 0 in. below the bottom of the concrete slab

7. Connection to vibrating equipment (including hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment) – Use a minimum of 24 in.; maximum length as determined by the NEC:

a. Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

b. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

c. Dry indoor locations: Use flexible metal conduit.

B. For medium-voltage wiring systems (1 kV or greater but less than 100 kV) use conduit materials in accordance with Section 26 10 00, “Medium Voltage Electrical Distribution.”

C. Use 3/4-in. above ground or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.

D. Install conduits with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions.

E. Use specified fitting for conduit except that threaded hubs and sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors and locations where moisture is present. Use couplings where required. Do not use running threads.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 177 of 317

FOR b.b.

doors doors INFORMATON

coc

Within coWithin co

t-buried uuried uRNC tRNC typeyp

the bottothe bott

equipmenequipmendriven equriven eq

ed byd by the Ntheyy

lexible mexible ONLYocations: cations

conduit.conduit.


26 05 33 – 11

F. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.

G. Use galvanized steel locknuts and insulated bushings for attachment to enclosures, except threaded hubs or sealing type locknuts shall be used outdoors or where moisture is present. Use watertight fittings for entries into NEMA 4 enclosures. Use sealing locknuts into bottoms of NEMA 4 or 3R enclosures.

H. Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect conductors or cables at conduit terminations.

I. Stub-Up Connections:

1. Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.

2. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 in. above the floor.

3. Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install threaded insert plugs set flush with the floor.

J. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduits dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

K. Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer’s instructions. Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

L. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with approved bending devices.

M. Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 in. trade size; use plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC.

N. Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104°F (40°C):

1. 6 in. at perpendicular crossings.

2. 12 in. between parallel runs.

O. Cut ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 178 of 317

FOR

eeand and

Extend coExtend cnduit muitINFORMATON

maymay

equipmentquipmentnsert plugssert plugs

t using cet using cend clean bd clean b

in fitting.in fitting

s accordins accordinfor use wifor use w

conduiconduONLY

ts.

mmmetricalmetric

size; ussize; us


26 05 33 – 12

P. Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

Q. Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil using half-lapped wrappings.

R. Install grounding bushings at the following locations:

1. At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100 amperes and higher.

2. On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric, or oversize knockouts.

3. On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.

S. Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 in. of slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install an NRTL approved firestop system at each electrical penetration in a fire-rated wall, floor, or partition.

B. At least two days prior to firestopping installation, notify TOC Construction Representative so that arrangements can be made for inspection during installation.

3.6 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise on the Drawings:

1. Receptacle, telephone and data outlets:

a. 48-in. above finished floor unless otherwise noted.

b. Outside 18-in. above grade, unless otherwise noted.

2. Light switches: Center 48-in. above finished floor and within 6 in. of door frame.

3. Thermostats: Center 60-in. above finished floor.

B. Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other and group them symmetrically.

C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26, “Wiring Devices.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 179 of 317

FOROn Oneffectiveffectiv

nduit mnduit mINFORMATON

easeand of thnd of th

ved firestoved fireston. .

opping inspping insts can be m can be

ONLYheights uheights


26 05 33 – 13

D. Install a multi-gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional type boxes.

E. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

F. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.

G. Support boxes independently of conduit.

H. Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.

3.7 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION

A. Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install pull boxes as required to comply with limits on conduit bends and distance between pull points in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section.

C. Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations. Position boxes so covers can be removed. Place boxes to maintain headroom.

3.8 WIREWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install wireways at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Mount plumb and level.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

B. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

C. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the manufacturer.


A. For conduits, junction boxes, associated fittings and supports, verify appropriate torque values are in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 180 of 317

FOR ces, taces, ta

ll pull boxpull boxn pull poin pull poINFORMATON

pull and jpull and moved. Pmoved. P

ONON

ns indicateindicate

brris, andis, andONLY

o

rich paint ich pain

coating rcoating


26 05 53 – 1

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Component identification tags.

B. Equipment nameplates.

C. Wire markers.

D. Voltage markers.

E. Warning signs.

F. Working space labels.

G. Underground warning tape.

H. Arc Flash labels.

I. Conduit labels.




A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI Z535.1 Safety Color Code

ANSI Z535.2 Environmental and Facility Safety Signs

ANSI Z535.3 Criteria for Safety Symbols and Labels

ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels

ANSI Z535.5 Safety Tags and Barricade Tapes (for Temporary Hazards)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 181 of 317

FOR

mm

ltage markltage mar

signs.signs.INFORMATON

ee labelslabels..

ng tape.ng tape.

ND STANND STAN

including includinapplyapplyONLY

o to t

form part form parte those cue those


26 05 53 – 2


29 CFR 1910.145 Danger and Caution Specifications

C. International Standards Organization (ISO)

ISO 3864 Graphical Symbols Package



NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace


UL 969 Marking and Labeling Systems

F. Washington River Protection Solutions, LLC


1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not used.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of the NEC, NFPA 70E, and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Conform to applicable requirements of ANSI Z535.1, Z535.2, Z535.3, Z535.4, and Z535.5.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Subcontract Documents, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project

B. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 182 of 317

FORderwritederwri

99

n RRINFORMATON

ver Prver P

01212

Work for Work fo

ONLYnd 29 CF29 C

35.235.2, Z5Z5


26 05 53 – 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; as identified in the SOW.

2.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Furnish component identification tags as specified and scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Provide tags made of materials shown on the drawings.

2.3 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Furnish equipment nameplates at each switchboard, disconnect switches, distribution panel, transformer, and variable frequency drive (VFD) as specified on the Drawings.

B. Equipment nameplates: Laminated plastic, as shown on Drawings. Engraved nomenclature sharp and clear. Engraved manufacturer’s standard nameplates may be used if equal in quality and legibility.

C. Post conductor color code on each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear assembly, motor control center. Use type-written, adhesive-backed labels.

D. Coordinate equipment nameplate schedule with equipment numbering scheme provided by TOC Construction Representative.

2.4 WIRE MARKERS

A. Provide wire markers for power circuit wires.

B. Furnish split sleeve or heat-shrinkable sleeve, wire markers.

C. Locate a wire marker on each conductor at each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and each load connection.

D. Provide typewritten lettering on wire markers for as-built branch circuit or feeder circuit number.

E. Manufacturer: LEM Products, Inc., Brady, Panduit.

2.5 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Furnish voltage markers for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and cabinets.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 183 of 317

FOR

NTNT

nish equiph equiution paneution pan

awingsawingINFORMATON

meplates: meplates: rp and clerp and cle

ualityity and andy

on each pon eachpepe--writtenwritt

schedule whedule esentativesentative

ONLYarkers.rkers

rd, dird


26 05 53 – 4

B. Provide flexible pressure sensitive vinyl markers with minimum 1-in. x 4-in.orange background and black letters.

C. Provide voltage markers with lettering indicating the highest voltage present:

1. 480Y/277 and 480 V system: 480 V.

D. Manufacturer: Electromark, LEM Products, Inc.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

A. Furnish warning signs for each switchboard, disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, and cabinets.

B. Use warning signs that conform to ANSI Z535.4 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

C. Provide minimum 2-in. x 4-in. warning signs.

D. Provide warning signs with format and lettering as follows:

1. Signal word: DANGER

2. Signal word panel color: red with safety alert symbol.

3. Word message:Keep Out!Hazardous voltage insideWill shock, burn, or cause death.

4. Safety symbol: ISO 3864 “lightning bolt” in yellow triangle.

E. Materials:

1. Use flexible, pressure sensitive, polyester base with polyester overlaminate.

F. Manufacturer: Seton Name Plate Co., Safety Label Solutions, Hazard Communication Systems, Electromark.

2.7 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Provide labels indicating required working clearance at electrical equipment that is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

B. Material:

1. Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL 969 and has a high-adhesion adhesive back.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 184 of 317

FORe warnine warnin

e minimue minimu

rnin INFORMATON

ng signsng sig

rd: DANGrd: DAN

nel color: nel color:

insidensideause deathuse deat

ng bolt”bolt” iONLYe with polwith po


26 05 53 – 5

2. Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.

3. Use a suitable thermal transfer process label-printing machine to generate labels and enter the application-specific information.

4. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for a high-UV environment.

C. Minimum dimensions: 3 1/2 x 1 1/4 in.

D. Use the following label design:

NOTICEKeep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for #-#/# feet. OSHA-NEC regulations.

1. Signal word: “NOTICE” in 24-point minimum white italic letters on safety blue panel.

2. Word message: 16-point minimum black or safety blue letters on white background.

a. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and no live or groundedparts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

b. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 1/2 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

c. Word message for 151 to 600 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on both sides of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 4 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

d. Word message for 0 to150 Volt equipment with exposed live parts on one side of the working space and live or grounded parts on the other side of the working space: “Keep area in front of this electrical equipment clear for 3 ft. OSHA-NEC regulations.”

E. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 185 of 317

FOR KeeKeeequipmquipOSHASHA--NN

FR

INFORMATON

word: word: “NNue panel.ue panel.

e: 161 -poinpoin

for for 151 t151 tof the worof the wor

de of the we of the wnt clear forclear fo

0 Volt0 VolONLY

equequspace anpace anKeep area Keep area

OSHAOSHA-

ent witnt w


26 05 53 – 6

2.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Furnish underground warning tape for underground cables, conduits and duct banks.

B. Use 6-in. wide, 0.004-in. thick, polyethylene detectable underground warning tape black lettering and the following background colors:

1. Electric: Red

C. Provide lettering that indicates the type service buried below.

1. Electric: “CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW”

D. Manufacturer: Utility Safeguard, LLC, Detectable Terra Tape, Reef Industries, Inc.

2.9 ARC FLASH LABELS

A. Install arc flash labels on electrical equipment as required by NEC.

2.10 CONDUIT LABELING

A. Conduit metal tags shall be affixed to all numbered conduit. Conduit numbers are shown on Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive identification products for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the identification products. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL

A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install electrical identification products only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 186 of 317

anufactuanufactu

ABELSABELINFORMATON

h labels onh labels on

be affixed e affixed

roducduONLYts forts fo

cting perfing perllation untllation un


26 05 53 – 7

E. Clean surface where electrical identification product is to be placed.

F. Use manufacturer’s recommended adhesive for engraved tags and nameplates.

G. Place electrical identification products centered and parallel to equipment lines.

3.3 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. Install component identification tag as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Position tags so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.4 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Install equipment nameplate or nameplates as indicated on the Drawings on the front of each piece of electrical equipment including switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Position nameplates so they can be read from floor or ground.

3.5 WIRE MARKERS

A. Install wire markers on power conductors at each appearance in locations such as switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs, and load connections.

B. Position markers so they can be read from the front of the enclosure.

3.6 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Install voltage markers at the following locations and position markers so they can be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each free-standing low-voltage switchboard section.

2. Front of each switchboard, MCC, distribution panel, transformer, and VFD.

3. Cover of each pull box containing low-voltage conductors.

3.7 WARNING SIGNS

A. Install warning signs at the following locations and position signs so they can be read from floor or ground:

1. Front of each switchboard disconnect switches, terminal box, distribution panel, transformer, VFD, pull boxes, and cabinets.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 187 of 317

FORENENT NT N

equipmenequipmenach pieach pieINFORMATON

e e nels, tranels, t

tes so theyes so they

er conducter conduon panels,on panels

om the from the fr

ONLYand positioand positio

rd secd s


26 05 53 – 8

3.8 WORKING SPACE LABELS

A. Install working space labels in front of switchboards, MCCs, distribution panels, transformers, and VFDs.

B. Any other equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.

3.9 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Install underground warning tape in trench above underground conduit.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 188 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


26 10 00 – 1

SECTION 26 10 00

MEDIUM VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements for material and installation of equipment for the 13.8 kV medium voltage systems.




A. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC)

AEIC C56 Specification for Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Shielded Power Cables Rated for 5kV through 69kV

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

ANSI C2, 2012 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

ANSI C37.47 High Voltage Current-Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnect Switches


ASTM B502 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Clad Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced

ASTM B549 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors, Aluminum-Clad Steel Reinforced (ACSR/AW)

ASTM D1535 Method for Specifying Color by Munsell System

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 189 of 317

FORand genand ge

and Divisd Div


s Sects Secotherwiseotherwise

on IIlluminllumi

SpeciSpecInsulateInsulathrough 69khrough 69

te (ANSI)e (ANSI

ectrical Strical SONLYrenten -LiLimim

e Disconne Disconn


26 10 00 – 2

D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska yellow cedar poles – preservative treatment of incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s document

AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray treatment

E. Factory Mutual (FM)

FM 3990 Less or Nonflammable Liquid-Insulated Transformers

F. Federal Specification (FS)

TT-S-00230C AMD 2 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

C57.12.00 General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers

H. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene Insulated Wire & Cable for the Transmission & Distribution

ICEA S-93-639 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA RN 1 PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit

NEMA C80.1 Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)

NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit

NEMA TC 3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduti and Tubing

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 190 of 317

FOR eral Specifl Specif

30C A30C AINFORMATON

MDMD

and Electnd Elect

GenerGenDistributDistribut

ation (Ion (ICEACE

PropyPropylenelenn & Dist& DisONLY

Power Caower Cstribution tribution


26 10 00 – 3

NEMA TC 6 & 8 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastics Utilities Duct for Underground Installations

NEMA TC 7 Smoothwall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit

NEMA TC 9 Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation

NEMA WC 74 5-46kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

J. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


K. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 6 Rigid Steel Conduit

UL 508A, 2014 Industrial Control Panels

UL 514B Conduit, Tubing and able Fittings

UL 514C Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers

UL 651 Standard for Schedule 40, 80 Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings

UL 651A Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethelene (HDPE) Conduit

UL 1072 Medium-Voltage Power Cables

L. Hanford Documents

TFC-ENG-STD-15 Raceway System Standard

TFC-PRJ-P-C-02 NEC Compliance Inspection

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for each enclosure, including dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 191 of 317

FOR PAPA 7070, 2, 2

writers Labwriters La

INFORMATON

CoCo

StandardStandaDevice BoxDevice Box

rdd for for SchSchduitduit and Fand

nd 8d 8ONLY0 High0 High

r CablesCables


26 10 00 – 4

side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type, enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the following:

a. Configuration and current ratings of equipment.

b. Short-circuit current rating of equipment.

c. Rated Voltage and BIL.

d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include specified certifications and all field test reports.


A. Inspections: The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of the NEC, as administered by the NEC electrical inspector and the MSA Electrical Utilities Group for the NESC portion.

B. Electrical Product Acceptability: Electrical equipment shall be listed or labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), such as UL, when a category exists.

Note: NRTLs are listed on the Occupational Safety and Health Administration web site at http://www.osha.gov/dts/otpca/nrtl/index.html#nrtls.

1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the listing is appropriate for the equipment specified. For equipment without a listing or label by a NRTL, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to obtain a listing or label. Any component, equipment, assembly, or system without a NRTL listing or label shall be subject to the approval of the NEC electrical inspector.

2. The Seller shall arrange for a WRPS Hanford NEC inspection to occur at Seller’s facility prior to shipping any assembly not covered in whole by a NRTL listing or label.

3. Cabinets containing assembled control systems shall be designed, constructed, and listed or labeled to the UL 508A Standard, as applicable.

C. Obtain EIPs (Electrical Installation Permit) (Form A-6005-707) prior to performing any electrical installation or modification. See TFC-PRJ-P-C-02, NEC Compliance Inspection.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 192 of 317

FORPPspecspec

SSURANSSURAN

TINFORMATON

he electhe eley the NECthe NEC

SC portionSC portion

eptabilityeptability: ed Testingd Testin

ccupationaupationotpca/nrtl/itpca/nrtlO

to ensuro ensuentONLY

withouwithounsibilitysibility tyy o

y, or systey, or sysof the NEof the N


26 10 00 – 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be substituted if approved by the TOC Construction Representative.

B. Materials

1. Solderless terminals for insulated aerial conductors: circumferential compression type: Burndy Corporation HYLUG Type YA for copper conductors and Type YA-A for aluminum conductors.

C. Conduit:

1. Rigid Steel NEMA C80.1 and UL 6.

2. Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid NEMA TC 9, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.

3. Type DB PVC RNC EPC 40 (Schedule 40) & EPC 80 (Schedule 80)NEMA TC 6 & 8, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.

4. Type HDPE RNC EPEC NEMA TC 7, UL 514B, UL 514C, UL 651, UL 651A.

D. PVC coating on rigid steel conduit: NEMA RN 1, Type A-40, factory applied.

E. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber. Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30-degree angle with normal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut so roof will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line. Roofs and gains shall be brush treated by manufacture with specified preservative. Each gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.

F. Crossarms: Straight-grained Douglas fir, free from twists to within 0.1 in. per foot of length, with bends and twists in only one direction. Apply preservatives to crossarms in accordance with AWPA C25, with retention of 8 pounds per cubic foot.

G. Line Conductors: #4 ACSR (Swanate) in accordance with ASTM B-230, ASTM B-502, and ASTM B-549.

H. Pole line materials: See Attachment A, “Hanford Electrical Utilities Distribution Guide Specifications & Standard Details.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 193 of 317

FORuituit

Rigid Rigid

onduit onduit11 INFORMATON

ndnd4C, 4C, ULUL

PVCPVC RNCRN& 8, UL 8, UL

EPEC NEEPEC N

t: NEMANEMA

edar, dar, or or Dn accordaccord

iveveONLYn singln singgle to swele to sw

of the polof the poe with specwith sp

be morebe more


26 10 00 – 6

I. Load Break Elbows: 15 kV Cooper Power Systems 500-10 Series.

J. The cables specified on Drawings as 15 kV shall be single-conductor, shielded, solid-dielectric type rated for 105°C normal operation. The cables shall be listed by UL as Type MV-150 and have a 15,000-V rating. All cables shall be “sunlight resistant.”

K. The conductor shall be stranded copper, sized in accordance with the drawings. The insulation level shall be 133% of rated voltage with a minimum thickness of 220 mils per requirements of ICEA S-68-516, UL 1072, and AEIC C56.

L. The cables shall conform to the following:

1. Cables shall be suitable for use in wet and dry locations, underground duct systems.

2. Conductors shall be Class B Compact Copper, per ICEA S-68-516, Part 2 and UL 1072.

3. Each conductor shall be covered with an extruded semi-conducting polymeric material applied over the surface of the conductor that is compatible with the insulation.

4. The insulation applied over the extruded strand screen shall be high-quality ethylene propylene blended and compounded within the cable manufacturer’s facilities under optimum conditions of cleanliness.

5. The type of insulation shielding – copper tape shielding: each conductor shall have a bare 5-mil minimum thick copper shielding tape helically applied over the insulation shield with a minimum 25% overlap of the tape width.

6. Wire pulling compound: Electro Compound Company “Y-er Eas,” orAmerican Polywater Corporation “Polywater.”

M. Tape

1. Plastic insulating tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 33+;”

2. Conduit protection tape: 3M Company “Scotchrap™17 No. 50;” and

3. Silicon rubber termination tape: 3M Company “Scotch No. 70.”

N. Insulating putty: 3M Company “Scotchfil™17,” General Electric Company No. 8389, or Kearney Company “Airseal.”

O. Provide medium voltage equipment as shown on the Drawings. Transformers are provided by others.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 194 of 317

FOR

CCsysystst

ConductoConductd UL ULINFORMATON

0707

nductor snductor smaterial amaterial a

ith the insh the ins

ied over thd over tyllene blendene blen

under optunder opt

ng – coppe– coppethick copthick cop

ith a mth a mONLY

nim

d Companyd Compa


26 10 00 – 7

P. Provide Load Break Elbows complete with inserts, on the transformer primary connection: 15 kV, 200A load break connector, Cooper 500-10 series.

Q. Lightning arrestors for transformer: Metal oxide, elbow shaped, with metal oxide varistor, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV), in premolded insulating elbow designed for use with the RTE 200 A 8.3/14.4 kV loadbreak bushings that are on the transformer.

R. Lightning arresters: Pole mounted, distributed valve type, rated at 18 kV (15.3 MCOV)

S. Provide cable terminations rated at 15 kV, heat shrink type with anti-tracking for shielded cable, Raychem HVT Series as shown on the Drawings.


A. Cable inspection: Upon delivery to the worksite, inspect cable and reels for shipping damage such as the following:

1. Marks caused by improper lifting equipment or techniques;

2. Breaks or cuts in outer covering;

3. Damaged jacket or insulation;

4. Reel damage from mishandling; and

5. Damaged or missing high voltage cable and seals.

B. Cable testing: Upon installation at the worksite, perform direct current (dc) over – potential tests on new cable. The specifics of how to perform the tests will be provided by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

C. Cable Reel Storage

1. Store reels with flanges resting on hard surface or pallet to prevent sinking into the ground;

2. Reel flanges shall not touch cable on other reels;

3. Do not store reels on sides. Store with reel axis horizontal; and

4. Cap or tape cable ends to prevent entrance of moisture.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 195 of 317

FOR RY, STORY, STO

nspectionnspectiondamagmagINFORMATON

su su

aused baused by iy

s in outer n outer

insulationinsulati

andling; andling; a

tage cableage cabl

rksite, peksite, pificifiONLY

s of hos of hup.up.

alletal


26 10 00 – 8

D. Cable Reel Handling

1. Slings and forklifts shall not contact cable or protective covering;

2. Use spreader bars when lifting reels with bar and sling; and

3. Do not drop reels.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Perform work in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-15, the NEC, and ANSI C2.

2. Install products as shown on the drawings, specifications and per the manufacturer’s recommendation for the pad mounted transformer. Use appropriate calibrated special tools when installing devices for which special installation tools are recommended by manufacturers.

3. Conduit excavation and backfill shall be as specified on the Drawings and Division 31.

4. Watthour/VAR meters: Before installation, have meters electrically calibrated by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group. All meter wiring to the current transformers will be by the MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

5. Provide all necessary final field adjustments for a complete installation

B. Setting Poles

1. Excavate holes large enough to admit tamping bar around pole at butt. Do not use explosives to excavate holes.

2. Use backfill materials that can be solidly compacted by hand tamping in 6 in. lifts. Compact surplus earth around pole in cone 1 ft high above grade. Add additional backfill where backfill has settled, and tamp before completion of work.

3. Minimum pole depth is 10% of pole height, plus 2’-0”, i.e., set 40-ft poles 6 ft, 0 in. in earth. Measure depth from lowest side, on moderately sloping ground and from point 2 ft, 6 in. from center of pole toward low side on steep slopes, cuts, embankments, or where soil is likely to be washed awayfrom pole.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 196 of 317

FORPePeANSIANS

nstall prostall prufuf INFORMATON

cturercturerriate calibrriate calib

stallation ttallation t

tion and btion and b

Before inBefore inctrical Utirical Ut

yy the the yy MSMS

justmentustmenONLYg bar arounbar arou


26 10 00 – 9

4. Set poles plumb and in line, except that corners and other strain points that are guyed shall have butts displaced to keep tops in line where feasible. At such locations, rake against strain shall be approximately 3 in. for each 10 ft of height.

5. Backfill holes created by removal of poles and other underground structures to finish grade and solidly compact by hand tamping. Where backfill has settled, place additional backfill and tamp before completion of work.

C. Crossarms

1. Mount at right angles to axis of poles or as shown on the drawings.

2. Bolts shall be of sufficient length for full-thread engagement of nut, but not protrude through poles or arms in excess of 2 in. Bolt ends shall not be cut off. Use square washers with each through-bolt and double-arming bolt to protect pole and crossarms.

D. Guys and Anchors

1. Install anchors to bear against undisturbed earth. Tamp backfill around anchors entire depth of hole. Provide temporary guying required during stringing of conductors. Remove at completion of work.

2. Set guy rods in earth in line with strand and install at least 6 in. above grade.

E. Insulators: Tighten pin insulators on pin threads and adjust top groove so it is parallel with line. Secure hold nuts with palnuts.

F. Aerial Conductors

1. Clearances shall be maintained for cables and conductors in accordance with the Drawings, and ANSI C2.

2. String conductors from rotating reels and do not drag along ground nor permit conductors to lie where they may be run over by vehicles. Pull conductors through stringing sheaves or stringing blocks hung on messenger cable, but do not pull around sharp corners. Inspect conductors as they leave reels and cut out weak or damaged sections and splice ends. Do not make splices in adjacent spans, dead end spans, or within 4 ft of support. Install conductors to proper stringing tensions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 197 of 317

FOR BoltBoltnot pronot probe cut offbe cut of

t to pto INFORMATON

rotecrotec

orsors

s to bear ato bear aepth of holepth of hol

tors. Remors. Rem

ine with stine with st

threads anthreads anlnuts.lnuts.ONLYconductorconducto


26 10 00 – 10

3. Make splices under tension mechanically, and electrically secure by compression fittings. Do not use self-gripping or automatic-tension splicing sleeves. Make taps between primary wires, jumpers, etc., with mechanical connectors.

4. Install hot-line stirrups on existing conductors where new feeder taps are made.

5. Sag conductors in accordance with ANSI C2 for medium loading district.

G. Aerial Equipment Grounding

1. Ground fused switches and lightning arresters in accordance with the Drawings. Bond together pole line hardware separated by less than 2 in.

2. Ground systems: Use stranded copper conductors for ground conductors installed in earth. Use solid copper conductors above grade. Make joints connecting copper and galvanized steel above grade and in dry location. Connections may be made with ground rod clamps or exothermic welds.

H. Conduits

1. Use galvanized rigid steel unless specified otherwise on the drawings.

2. Use PVC conduit in contact with earth. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3. Install concealed conduits as directed with PVC-coated rigid steel elbows with bend radii as long as possible.

4. Make elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical. Bend conduit with approved bending devices.

5. Cut conduit ends square, ream, and remove burrs. Conduit shall be clean, dry, and free of debris. Immediately after installation, plug or cap exposed ends with standard accessories until wires are installed.

6. Use one hole clamp equipped with clampbacks or framing strut with clamps to secure conduits as shown on drawings.

7. Set up joints in conduit installed exposed to weather, with high temperature, anti-seize, conduit thread lubricant and sealant.

8. Install exposed conduit stubbing up, straight and plumb, lined up, and uniformly spaced.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 198 of 317

FOR

DD

GroundGrouninstalled installed

nnectiectINFORMATON

ng cng cctions mctions m

rigid steel rigid steel

ontact wiontact wendationsndations

directed wdirected wle.e.

ormONLYm and sand sy

rrs. Condrrs. Conation, pluation, plu

ed


26 10 00 – 11

9. Install warning tape for underground conduit as shown on the drawings and with materials specified in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

I. Cable Pulling and Terminations

1. Use lubricant recommended by cable manufacturer, or wire-pulling compound specified, when pulling wire and cable through conduit.

2. Do not install or handle wires with thermoplastic insulation or jacket when ambient temperature is 15°F or below.

3. Make terminations with solderless connectors. Use connectors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Follow manufacturer’s instructions and directions for stress cones, and cable terminations. Final terminations to power source will be performed by Mission Support Alliance Electric Utilities.

5. Ground pad mounted transformers to ground grid with 4/0 cable.


A. Testing

1. Furnish equipment and instruments required to perform testing.

2. Use instruments which bear calibration stamps showing dates of calibration and expiration dates of stamps. Calibration and accuracy of instruments shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory having standards traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology.

3. Test the equipment and wiring for continuity and unintentional grounds, and verify proper phase sequence and voltage at equipment served before attempt is made to operate equipment. Notify the NEC electrical inspector and the Mission Support Alliance Electrical Utilities Group before start of tests. Record the results.

4. Reconnect devices disconnected during testing

B. Acceptance testing: After installation, and prior to energizing, coordinate with MSA Electrical Utilities to perform tests on cable to verify installation acceptability.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 199 of 317

FOR

aa

FollowFollocable termcable ter

MissiMissINFORMATON

on Son S

pad mounpad moun

ROOLL

nstrumentnstrumen

alibration alibrationof stamps.f stamp

indepenindepetitti ONLY

ute of Ste of

yy and uninand unyyat equipmat equipm

NECNEC elels Gr


26 10 00 – 12

C. Verification Points

1. Provide 24-hour notice and hold for release by MSA Electrical Utilities Group.

2. Prior to energizing, perform NEC inspection.

D. Deleted.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 200 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


26 22 13 – 1

SECTION 26 22 13

LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General-purpose dry-type low-voltage transformers




A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA TP 1 Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers

NEMA TP 2 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers

NEMA TP 3 Standard for the Labeling of Distribution Transformer Efficiency



C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory


UL 1561 Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 201 of 317

FORd gd g

s and Dis and D

g documendocumend in thisin thi

ssss INFORMATON

therwtherw

all ManufaManuf

GuGuDistrDist

Standard TStandard Tnsumptiumptionon

for the Laor the Lr EfficienEfficieONLYde (NEC) e (NEC)


26 22 13 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Statement of Work and the Project submittal procedures.

Not Used.

B. Submit the following for WRPS review/approval:

Not Used.



B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Provide products that comply with the following industry standards:

1. NEMA TP 1.

2. NEMA TP 2.

3. NEMA TP 3.

4. UL 1561.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work

2.2 GENERAL

A. Transformers shall be NRTL listed to UL 1561 and shall be tested and labeled according to NEMA TP 1, NEMA TP 2, and NEMA TP 3.

B. The efficiency of each transformer shall be NEMA TP 1 Class I when tested in accordance with NEMA TP 2. Transformer efficiency shall be indicated on a label that conforms to NEMA TP 3.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 202 of 317

FOR

plyply

vide produe prodatorytory (NRT(NRyy

ent in went in INFORMATON

hh

cts that cocts that co

GG ONLYording tording to


26 22 13 – 3

C. Transformer coils may be aluminum or copper with continuous wound construction and shall be impregnated with non-hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. Terminations shall be brazed or welded to the coil conductor.

D. Transformer cores shall be constructed of a high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities shall be kept well below the saturation point.

2.3 GENERAL-PURPOSE DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. The core and coil shall be bolted to the base of the enclosure, isolated by means of rubber vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and the enclosure. Sound isolation systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable.

B. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by a flexible grounding conductor sized following applicable UL and NEC Standards.

C. The transformer enclosure shall be ventilated and shall be fabricated of a heavy gauge, sheet steel construction. The entire enclosure shall be finished using a process consisting of degreasing, cleaning and phosphatizing followed by electrostatic deposition of polymer polyester powder and baking cycle to provide a uniform coating of all edges and surfaces. The coating shall be UL recognized for outdoor use. The coating color shall be light or medium grey.

D. Transformers shall be suitable for rack or floor mounting. Provide mounting accessories required for installation.

E. Provide weather shields for transformers installed outdoors.

F. Provide transformer manufacturer’s transformer lug kits with compression type equipment lugs and hardware for connecting conductors to transformer terminals.

G. Provide factory assembled and tested, energy-efficient, general-purpose, air cooled, two-winding, dry-type transformers with voltage and kVA ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

H. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50°C rise above a 40°C ambient.

I. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity above normal and four 2.5 percent full capacity below normal primary taps.

J. Manufacturers:

1. Square D Class 7400 Type “EE.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 203 of 317

pleteplete

core of there of thegroundingroundi

INFORMATON

er encloer encloel construel constru

of degreasof degrean of polyof polyyy

edges and dges andng colog color shr sh

r rack or fr rack or f

installed installed

ONLYlug kitslug kitsductors to ductors to

, general genera -pand kVAand kV


26 22 13 – 4

2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer “DS-3”and “DT-3.”

2.4 MINI-POWER ZONE

A. Provide mini-power zone, 480-120/240V, single phase transformer and 120/240V, panelboard in a weather-resistant enclosure. Minipower zone shall be UL listed, surface mounted and sized as shown on the Drawings. Branch and secondary main circuit breakers shall be provided as shown on the panel schedule. Locking mechanisms permanently affixed to the panel board to prevent casual operation of breakers shall be provided.

B. General-purpose transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be 150°C temperature rise above 40°C ambient.

C. Mini-power zone units shall have a minimum of two 2.5 percent full capacity below normal primary taps.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Square D, Class 7440 “MiniPower Zone”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned dry-type transformers as shown on design media.

B. Maintain access to existing dry-type transformers and other installations that are to remain active.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive transformers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the control system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install dry-type transformers where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be available at the construction site.

B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access, replacement, and for cooling air circulation. Locate the front and rear of each ventilated transformer at least 6 in. from the wall or any obstruction to allow proper air circulation.

C. Make conduit connections to transformer enclosure only at locations designated by the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 204 of 317

FOR nini-powerpower

w normal normal

urers: ers:INFORMATON

D, Class 7D, Class 7

ned dryned dry-tyty

nsformers sforme

ONLYnce with ince with f the contf the cont

havh


26 22 13 – 5

D. Connect conductors to transformer terminals using transformer manufacturer’s lug kits. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not furnished, use those specified Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” Attachment 1, “Recommended Tightening Torque per UL 486A-486B.”

E. Bond transformers and ground systems served by transformers according to Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

F. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean, inspect, test, adjust, and energize transformers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Inspect each transformer for physical damage, proper connection and grounding, and proper anchorage.

2. Place records of inspections, tests, and adjustments in the work package or fabrication document.

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.

D. Measure primary and secondary voltages and phase rotation, and make preliminary tap adjustments. After normal operating loads have been energized adjust taps to provide the following voltage at points of use; record voltages and tap settings.

System Nominal Voltage Minimum Load Voltage480Y/277 460Y/265208Y/120 200Y/115120/240 115/230


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 205 of 317

ALIALI

n, inspect,inspect,cturer’s incturer’s

INFORMATON

each traeach trang, and prong, and pro

of inspectf inspectmentment..

sts with thsts with th

ning, and tng, and t

nd phasnd phaONLY

e rating loating loints of useints of use

oltageltageY


26 24 13 – 1

SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Section covers installation of floor-mounted deadfront low-voltage switchboards which consist of an enclosure, circuit breakers, instruments and metering equipment, monitoring equipment or control equipment, with associated interconnections and supporting structures. Uses on Project include:

1. Main Switchboard and Distribution Switchboard – are shown on the Drawings and provided by RPP-SPEC-60125.


Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.

The following documents and others referenced therein, form part of the Contract to the extent designated in this section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this section unless otherwise indicated.

A. Factory Mutual (FM) Research Corporation

Approval Guide


RPP-CALC-60221 Electrical Power Distribution Study for A/AX Retrieval Infrastructure

RPP-CALC-60222 Electrical Power Distribution Study for A/AX Retrieval Water Building

RPP-SPEC-60125 Procurement Specification for A/AX Retrieval Project Switchboards

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

IEEE 100 The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms

D. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 206 of 317

MaMDrawiDrawi

CUMECUMEINFORMATON

NTN

provisionprovision01 Specifi01 Specifi

others refeothers refReferencReferen

cated.cated.

orporationporation

GuideGuide

ONLYstribution tribution

n StudS


26 24 13 – 2

NEMA PB 2.1 Proper Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

7 NFPA 0 National Electrical Code (NEC)

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 67 Panelboards


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in this Section are as defined in IEEE 100.



B. Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboard(s) according to the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards.


A. Verify field measurements against manufacturer’s shop drawings prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

A. Switchboards are provided by Procurement Specification RPP-SPEC-60125.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 207 of 317

FOR IONSIONS

otherwiseotherwison are aon are INFORMATON

NCENCE

EC for comfor co

listed andlisted anapplicationapplicatio

TINGTING

board(s) oard(s)ONLYter inster i


26 24 13 – 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive switchboard(s) for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboard(s) where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB-2, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard enclosure and components.

C. Ground and bond switchboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

D. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

1. Terminate conduits in the switchboard section containing the corresponding device.

2. Install plugged couplings set flush with the top of the concrete pad. After switchboard is set in place, extend conduits to 1 1/4-in. above the pad and terminate with insulated grounding bushings.

E. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

1. Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle and secure as recommended by manufacturer to withstand fault current.

2. Use compression type lugs to connect all service, feeder, and branch circuit cables greater than 100 amperes.

3. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including bus bar and grounding connections, according to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify switchboard and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 208 of 317

FORmove temmove tem

ing parts fg parts f

nd bonnd bonEINFORMATON

d swd slectricallectrical

required required

s in the sws in the s

et flush wt flush wtend condtend con

ng bushingng bushin

5 15 ONLY9, 9, ““LoLow

secure as secure a


26 24 13 – 4


A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize switchboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Verify that circuit breakers are in the proper locations and that setting of solid state trip devices and current sensor taps match values scheduled on the Drawings.

C. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.

D. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing switchboard.

E. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections in this Specification.

F. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.

G. Perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study and protective device coordination studies, RPP-CALC-60221 and RPP-CALC-60222.

H. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments, and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with an approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner.

3.5 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE

A. Provide the services of a factory trained representative from the manufacturer to inspect and certify the installation and to oversee energizing and testing as directed by TOC Engineering Representative.

B. Manufacturer’s representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 209 of 317

FORordinateordinatecificationication.

mpletingmpletinINFORMATON

ininatch origatch orig

ustments ostments operating corating co

uit studyuit study, p, pRPPRPP--CA

ces, adjustes, adjustance with nce with

hall be cahall be ca

ONLYive from tve fromgizing andgizing an


26 24 16 – 1

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Panelboards for feeder and branch circuit loads.




A. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality management systems – Requirements

B. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA)

NEMA AB 3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and their Application

NEMA PB 1 Panelboards

NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 volts or less

NEMA PB 2 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards


NFPA 70, 2014 National electrical Code (NEC)


UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations

UL 67 Panelboards

UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 210 of 317

FORd gd g

s and Dis and D


ssss INFORMATON

therwtherw

anization anization

QuQu

cturerturer’s Ass A

lded Caselded Case

ardsds

ctiontionONLY

s fors foraintenancintenan

witchboarwitchboar


26 24 16 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.



B. Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA AB 3.

D. Comply with UL 67, UL 50, and UL 489.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to manufacturer’s instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish spare keys of each type for panelboard cabinet locks.

B. Deleted.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Furnish panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.

B. Panelboards shall be UL 67 listed and shall conform to NEMA PB1.

C. Furnish panelboard cabinets for surface mounting as indicted on the Drawings.

1. Furnish enclosures as indicated below:

a. Outdoor – NEMA 3R: rated raintight minimum.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 211 of 317

FORratorat

vironmevironm

lyy with NEwith NEyy

h Uh INFORMATON

LL 67, 67

NG AG AND PND

le, and stoe, and sto

panelboardpanelboar

ONLYe requirequ


26 24 16 – 3

b. Indoor – NEMA 12: Dust tight.

2. Cabinets shall be not less than 20-in. wide.

3. Furnish steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50 requirements.

4. NEMA 12, and 4 boxes shall have end walls welded and sealed.

D. Furnish trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.

1. Each panelboard trim front shall include a door.

2. Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over cleaned, phosphatized steel.

3. Furnish a panelboard circuit directory card in a metal frame mounted inside the panelboard door. The directory card shall include spaces for circuit numbers and sufficient spaces to allow each circuit to be described in sufficient detail to be distinguished from all others.

a. Furnish cylindrical tumbler type locks for doors. Furnish sliding vault locks with 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48-in.high. Key all lock assemblies alike. Furnish two keys with each lock plus spares as required in the Extra Materials paragraph above.

E. Equip panelboards with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances, for the future installation of circuit breakers in the “spaces”scheduled on the Drawings.

F. Furnish panelboards having NRTL-listed short circuit current ratings not less than the available fault current indicated on the Drawings.

G. Furnish thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet the requirements of UL 489 and NEMA AB 3.

1. Furnish circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

3. Furnish multi-pole breakers with a common trip.

4. Furnish bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an independent mechanical locking device.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 212 of 317

FORFurnisFurninside theinside th

rcuit nurcuit nfff INFORMATON

mbmcient decient

rnish cyrnish cylinlocks wicks w t

eyey all lockall locyypares as repares as

brackets, bracketsion of circion of cir

rt ct ONLYircuit crcuit ings.ngs.

he requireme requir


26 24 16 – 4

5. Furnish UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers or UL Class B equipment protection circuit breakers where scheduled on Drawings.

6. Furnish circuit breakers with provisions for connecting the size and number of conductors indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,” for conductor connection requirements.

H. Furnish a permanently-installed handle lock-off device for each circuit breaker.

1. Furnish handle lock-off device that will accept a 1/4-in. padlock shackle.

2. Securely attach the device to the circuit breaker case; the attachment shall not depending on a friction fit or the presence of the panelboard front for the handle lock-off device to remain in place and be functional.

I. Manufacturers:

1. Eaton:

a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “PRL3a” and “PRL4”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “PRL1a” and “PRL2a”

2. Square D:

a. 480 V and 480Y/277 V: “NF” and “I-LINE”

b. 208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “NQ” and “I-Line”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards where indicated on the Drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and the NEC. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Furnish supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 29, “Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 213 of 317

FOR

SSnot dnot dthe hanthe han

urers:ers:INFORMATON

V and 480Ynd 480Y

V and 120V and 12

V: V: “NFNF”” a

V: ““NQNQ””ONLYwith inith


26 24 16 – 5

C. Position panelboards so the top circuit breaker handle is not more than 6 ft – 7 in.above the surface of the working space in front of the panelboard.

D. Ground and bond panelboards as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Furnish typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard.

1. Install a plastic-laminated copy of the panel schedule drawing on the inner side of the panelboard door.

B. Identify panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean, inspect, test, and energize panelboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.

B. Coordinate inspections and tests with those required by other Sections.

C. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 214 of 317

FORifyifyyy

uired uired inin

LITY COLITY CO

tINFORMATON

test, antest, xercise eaxercise ea

tion.ion.

and tests wand tests

, cleaning, cleaninghh

24 1624 16ONLY


26 27 26 – 1

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Receptacles.

B. Snap switches.

C. Wall plates.




A. Federal Specifications (FS)

FS W-C-596 G/GEN Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for

FS W-P-455A Plate, Wall, Electrical

FS W-S-896 Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification)

B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems -- Requirements

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices

NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices—Dimensional Specifications



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 215 of 317

FORplapl

D DOCUD DOCU

eneral prneral pvisiis INFORMATON

on 01 Son 01

ts and otheand othction. Reon. R

se indicatee indicat

nnector, Ennector, E

ElectricaElectricONLY(Toggle aToggle SpecificatiSpecificati


26 27 26 – 2


UL 20 General Use Snap Switches

UL 498 Electrical Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

UL 943 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters

UL 1492 Solid-State Dimming Controls

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.


A. Comply with the NEC.

B. Furnish products listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.



PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Provide back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade, and locking type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings. Receptacles shall meet the performance and design requirements of Federal Specification W-C-596G/GENand UL 498. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 6.

B. For 120 volt receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 216 of 317

FORproval Rproval

sed.sed.

RARAINFORMATON

NCENCE

NEC.NEC.

d and labeand labehe applicae applic

alled.lled.

TECTINGTECTING

ducts accoucts acc

ONLYe requirequ


26 27 26 – 3

Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5362” or equal.

C. For GFCI receptacles connected to individual branch circuits provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self-testing GFCI, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL 943. Provide units that can be installed in a 2 3/4-in. deep outlet box without an adapter. Manufacturer: Hubbell “GFR5362ST” or equal.

D. Provide straight-blade and twist lock receptacles for special applications as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Provide 480 VAC, 3 wire, 4 pole, receptacles, amperage as shown on drawings. Manufacturer: Crouse Hinds.

2.3 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Provide single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way and illuminated handle snap switches as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Switches shall be rated 20 amperes, 120-277 volts AC, back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, quiet type AC switch with yoke grounding screw. Switches shall meet the performance and design requirements of UL 20 and Federal Specification WS896.

C. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL1220” series.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. For surface mounted interior receptacles and switches, furnish galvanized steel 4-in. square raised surface covers. Receptacles installed in raised covers shall be secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO “800” series.

B. For GFCI receptacles in damp or wet locations provide weatherproof, in usecovers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26E”

C. Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices.

D. Use metal plate-securing screws to match plate finish.

E. Terminal Blocks

1. Terminal Blocks shall meet the requirements of UL 1059 or NEMA ICS 4.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 217 of 317

FOR ufacufac

TCHESCHES

ngle pgle INFORMATON

ole,ole,as indicaas indica

rated 20 amrated 20 amiet tyt t pe Ape Ay

nce and dence and de

2020”” seriesseries

d switcd switONLY

heinstallednstalleRACO “8RACO “8

e weatherpe weathe


26 27 26 – 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper locations and heights.

B. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices.

C. Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products following manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Install devices plumb, level, and secure.

C. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount devices with long dimension vertical, and grounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches and receptacles under single, multi-gang wall plates.

D. Do not use the duplex/split-wire break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors for connecting downstream devices.

E. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes on surface mounted outlets.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment groundingconductor.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.

B. Operate each operable device with circuit energized; verify proper operation.

C. Test 20 ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity using an NRTL listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at least 15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 218 of 317

FORl pl p

tallationtallatio

devices pdevices p

theh INFORMATON

rwise inrwise ical, and gical, and g

ptacles unptacles un

split-split-wirewirem devicesm device

n outlet bon outlet bo

brabrONLYnch cinch c

SectioSe


26 27 26 – 5

D. Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation according to manufacturer recommendations.

E. Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or damaged wall plates or devices.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 219 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


26 28 16 – 1

SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Safety switches.

B. Fuses.




A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

NEMA FU 1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses

NEMA KS 1 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum)

NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices



C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

UL 248 Low-Voltage Fuses


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 220 of 317

FORDD

and generaand genernd Divisiond Divisio

umemINFORMATON

nts annts anhis Sectionhis Section

herwise inerwise i

nufacturernufactureRMLow VoLow V

closed andclosed andment Switment Swit

quiremenquiremenONLYde (NECde (NEC))


26 28 16 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.



B. Provide safety switches that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.

C. Comply with the following standards as applicable:

1. NEMA KS 1.

2. UL 50.

3. NEMA FU 1.

4. UL 248.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store safety switches, enclosed circuit breakers, and fuses according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one spray can of touch-up paint that matches finish of switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Alternate products may be accepted; follow the guidelines set forth in the Contract Statement of Work.

2.2 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Provide NRTL-listed, NEMA Type 1, 3R, 3R/12 or 4 Heavy Duty safety switches with ratings and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the NEC suitable for the environment into which it is being installed.

B. Each safety switch shall have an equipment ground bar.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 221 of 317

FORng ng

vironmevironm

lyy with thewith thyy

MAMAINFORMATON

KS 1.KS 1

ECTINGECTING

ety switchy switchtten instrtten instrONLYs finish ofs finish


26 28 16 – 3

C. Each safety switch shall have provisions for padlocking in the OFF position.

D. Manufacturer: Square D “Class 3110” or Cutler Hammer “DH” Series.

2.3 FUSES

A. Provide NEMA FU 1 and UL 248 fuses with type, voltage, and current ratings as indicated on drawings.

B. Manufacturer: Cooper/Bussmann or Mersen/Ferraz Shawmut.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install safety switches and fuses where indicated on the Drawings, according to manufacturer’s instructions, and the NEC.

B. Ground and bond safety switches as required in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

C. Install conduits as required in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

D. Install conductors as required in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals to the manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify safety switches and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as required in Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”

B. Mark floor in front of safety switches to show NEC required working space according to Section 26 05 53, “Identification for Electrical Systems.”


A. Clean interior and exterior of safety switches.

B. Verify that ratings of fuses and safety switches match values indicated on the Drawings.

C. Verify proper torque of accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after installing safety switches, document in work package or fabrication document. After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 222 of 317

FORTITI

all safetsafety yactureracturer’’s s

bob INFORMATON

nd safnd saectricaectrical Syl S

equired in ired i

d in Sectiod in Sect

and termiand termues. es.

ONLYand arcand arc--flafla

trical Sical Sysst

ed wod


26 28 16 – 4


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 223 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


26 51 00 – 1

SECTION 26 51 00

INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Interior luminaires and accessories.




A. International Code Council

IBC International Building Code (IBC)

B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

NECA/IESNA 500 Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems (ANSI)

NECA/IESNA 502 Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems (ANSI)



1.3 SUBMITTALS



Not Used.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 224 of 317

FORd gd g

s and Dis and D


ssss INFORMATON

therwtherw

de Councie Counc

IntIn

ors Assocors AssoNA)NA)

mmended Pmmended cial Lal Ligightih

d PraPraONLYctice ctice

(ANSI)ANSI)

EC) C)


26 51 00 – 2


A. Comply with the NEC and the IBC for components and installation.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Luminaire: A luminaire is a complete lighting unit and parts required to distribute the light, and connection of the lighting unit to the power supply.

1. Average Life: The time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under specified operating and starting condition.

2. Total harmonic distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic components divided by the fundamental current.


A. Luminaires, shall perform satisfactorily in the following service conditions:

1. Ambient temperature limits: 32 to 104°F unless indicated otherwise for specific products in Part 2.


A. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to the following NECA National Electrical Installation Standards:

1. NECA/IESNA 500.

2. NECA/IESNA 502.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Refer to the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 225 of 317

FOR IONSIONS

aire: A lumaire: A luand coand coINFORMATON

nene

e Life: ThLife: Thll have surll have sur

tortion (Ttortion (s divided bdivided b

in the follin the fo

4°F°FONLYunlessunles

he fole


26 51 00 – 3

2.2 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES

A. Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below, indicated on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.

B. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

D. Steel parts shall be finished with manufacturer’s standard finish applied over a corrosion-resistant primer. Finish shall be free from runs, streaks, stains or defects.

E. Doors and frames shall be smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions.

2.3 LUMINAIRE ACCESSORIES

A. Provide supports, mounting brackets, frames, and other accessories required for luminaire installation.

B. Furnish hangers as specified below and as required by conditions of installation:

1. Stem hangers shall be made of steel tubing with swivel ball hanger fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish the same as the luminaire.

2. Rod hangers shall be made of 1/4-in. threaded zinc-plated steel rod.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.

C. Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wall-mounted fixtures.


A. Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver spare parts in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 226 of 317

FORs ans an

erating cerating c

E ACCES ACCES

INFORMATON

rts, mourts, mllalation.tion.

pecified bcified b

l be made l be madFinish theFinish th

of 1/4of 1/4--inin

ONLYthe NEC, the NEC,

at theat


26 56 00 – 1

SECTION 26 56 00

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Exterior luminaires and accessories.

B. Grounding.

C. Conduit and wiring.

D. Lighting controls.

E. Wood lighting poles





ANSI 05.1 Wood Pole – Specifications and Dimensions

B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)

ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures


ASTM A123/A123M Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA)

AWPA C7 Western red cedar, northern white cedar and Alaska yellow cedar poles – preservative treatment of incised pole butts by the thermal process (no s/s document

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 227 of 317

FOR

uituit

hting conthting con

ghting pohting pINFORMATON

MENTS / MENTS /

visions of tisions of pecificatioecificatio

rs referencs referenerenced doerenced

dd

(ANSI)ANSI)

SpecipecONLY

ficatificati

for Buildifor Buildi


26 56 00 – 2

AWPA P Standard for field cuts, creosote for brush or spray treatment

E. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA)

Lighting Handbook

F. International Code Council

International Building Code

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

UL 1598 Luminaires

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Approval Not Required.

Not Used.


A. Comply with the following codes and standards:

1. NEC for components and installation.

2. International Building Code.

3. ASCE-7.

B. Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which installed.

C. Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing, luminaires, lamps, similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful in-service performance.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 228 of 317

FOR

AA 77

derwriters writer

INFORMATON

atement ofment o

ndards:ndards:

ONLY


26 56 00 – 3


A. International Building Code and ASCE 7 design wind conditions:

1. Exposure Category: C

2. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (3-second gust at 33-ft above ground, mean recurrence interval of 50 years)

3. Importance Factor: 1.15

B. Ambient temperatures, °C (°F)

1. -25°F to 115°F

1.6 DEFINITIONS

A. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in this Section are as defined in the NEC or the IESNA Lighting Handbook.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS



2.2 FINISHES

A. Furnish luminaires and accessories with finishes as scheduled that are resistant to fading, chalking, and other changes due to aging and exposure to heat and ultraviolet light. Acceptable finishes for metals are:

1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel: ASTM A123/A123M.

2. Brushed natural aluminum.

3. Anodized aluminum: AAMA 611, Class I.

4. Powder coated aluminum: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per AAMA 2605, over chrome phosphate conversion coated aluminum.

5. Powder coated steel: Fluorocarbon polymer powder coating per AAMA 2605 over zinc phosphate conversion coated shot-blasted steel.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 229 of 317

FORONSNS

therwiseherwisoror INFORMATON

he IEShe IE

NG AND PG AND

le, and stoe, and sto

TIONSIONS

cordancecordancONLYeduled thaeduled thsure tour


26 56 00 – 4

B. Reject luminaires and accessories with finish having runs, streaks, stains, and defects.

C. Replace luminaires and accessories showing evidence of yellowing, fading, chalking, and other changes indicating failure during warranty period.

D. Use stainless steel for exposed hardware.

2.3 WOOD POLES

A. Wood Poles: ANSI 05.1, western red cedar, or Douglas fir cut from live timber. Pole shall be butt-treated by manufacture in accordance with AWPA C7, using AWPA P preservatives. Each pole shall be given single top cut at 30 degree angle with normal to axis of pole and at right angle to sweep. Gains shall be cut so roof will be at right angles to the line and sweep of the pole will be in line. Roofs and gains shall be brush treated by manufacture with specified preservative. Each gain shall fit crossarm tightly. Bolt holes shall not be more than 1/16 in. oversize.

2.4 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES – GENERAL

A. Furnish exterior luminaires that comply with requirements specified on the Drawings.

B. Luminaires shall be NRTL-listed as conforming to UL 1598.

C. Luminaire photometric characteristics shall be based on IESNA-approved methods for photometric measurements performed by a recognized photometric laboratory.

D. Luminaire housing shall be primarily metal.

1. Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.

2. Sheet metal components shall be fabricated from corrosion-resistant aluminum, formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.

3. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel.

E. Provide lenses, fabricated from materials that are UV stabilized to be resistant to yellowing and other changes due to aging or exposure to heat and ultraviolet radiation.

F. Doors shall have resilient gaskets that are heat-resistant and aging-resistant to seal and cushion lens and refractor.

2.5 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish photoelectric relays or timers to control exterior lighting as indicated on the Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 230 of 317

FOR

normnorml be at rigl be at ris shall be bhall be b

all fit crosall fit cro

INFORMATON

NAIRESNAIRES

minaires minaires

listed as isted as

ristics sharistics shaments perfoents perf

ONLYharp cornharp corn

om corrosim corroing and wing and


26 56 00 – 5

B. Furnish a “HAND-OFF-AUTO” control switch and enclosure to facilitate testing of the lighting system.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, spaces, and surfaces to receive exterior luminaires and poles for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the product. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved drawings.

B. Locations of luminaires and poles shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic. Coordinate luminaire locations with building finishes and building structure. Obtain approval for location changes through TOC Construction Representative.

C. Set luminaires plumb, square, level and secure.

D. Install surface mounted luminaires directly to exterior wall, building structural steel, or an outlet box which is supported from structure.

E. Install luminaires in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

3.4 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Install exterior lighting control system components in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions. Have installation instructions available at the construction site.

B. Install a HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch in the control system to allow for testing of luminaires.

C. Provide separate control of exterior lighting system as follows:

1. Safety, security, and pedestrian walkway: “ON” at dusk, “OFF” at dawn.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 231 of 317

FORtall prodtall prodwings.gs

of lumof lumINFORMATON

inainminaire minair

l for locat for locat

b, square, lsquare,

minaires dminairesis supports support

ith manufh manu

matematONLYerials arials aElectrical lectrica

rdancrd


26 56 00 – 6

3.5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Install conduit system for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 33, “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

3.6 BUILDING WIRE

A. Install wiring for exterior lighting using materials and methods specified in Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”


A. Inspect each installed lighting unit for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.

B. Verify proper voltage at equipment served.

C. Test installed luminaires for proper operation.

1. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

2. Replace or repair malfunctioning luminaires and components then re-test.

3. Repeat procedure until all luminaires operate properly.

D. Replace inoperative luminaires.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean each luminaire inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Aim adjustable luminaires to provide required light intensities as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the TOC Construction Representative.

C. Adjust exterior lighting controls to obtain the following performance unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the TOC Construction Representative:

1. “ON” at sunset “OFF” sunrise.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 232 of 317

FOR

ponepone

ify proper propery

alllled lumed luINFORMATON

minmin

e instrumee instrume

epair malfir ma

until all luuntil all

uding plauding planufacufaONLY

turerturer

ht intensitiht intensitepresentatiresentat

erformrfo


31 23 00 – 1

SECTION 31 23 00

EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section Includes:

1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade pavements.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.




A. ASTM International (ASTM)

ASTM D653 Standard Terminology Relating to Soil, Rock, and Contained Fluids

ASTM D1557 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ASTM D4491 Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity

ASTM D4632 Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles

ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 233 of 317

FOR DrainDrai

CUMECUMEINFORMATON

provisionprovisionn SectionsSection

others refothers re ReferencReferen

icated.cated.

TerminolTerminoFFluidsluids ONLY

Laboratoraboratoroil Using Moil Using

of Soil aof Soil aNucleauc


31 23 00 – 2


29 CFR 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction



TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 Implementation of DOE-0344, Excavating, Trenching, and Shoring

D. Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT)

WSDOT M41-10 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, Section 9-03.9, Aggregates for Ballast and Crushed Surfacing

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Borrow Material: Material from required excavations or from designated borrow areas on or near site.

D. Completed Course: A course or layer that is ready for next layer or next phase of Work.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimized upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Lift: Loose (un-compacted) layer of material.

H. Prepared Ground Surface: Ground surface after completion of required demolition, clearing and grubbing, scalping of sod, stripping of topsoil, excavation to grade, and subgrade preparation.

I. Selected backfill material: Materials available on-site that WRPS Construction Engineer determines to be suitable for specific use.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 234 of 317

FORNSNS

ili INFORMATON

materiamater

ckfill: kfill: BacBacsupport sidpport sid

ckfill placckfill pl

yer placeder placed

ed excavad excav

ONLYdy for nexdy for n

nn--grade rade


31 23 00 – 3

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Structural Fill: Fill materials as required under structures, pavements, and other facilities.

L. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS



1. Qualifications for Soils Technician (field inspector).

2. Shoring Plan (if required): Design of shoring shall be sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Washington.


1. Competent person: Before excavation and in writing, submit identity of individual designated Competent Person as defined in 29 CFR 1926.650 and as required by the approved safety and health program.


A. Provide survey control to avoid unauthorized over-excavation.

B. Deliverable Documentation: The following documents and records, required by this Section, shall be delivered to Construction Document Control.

Document Paragraph

Backfill Permit 1.6.A

Excavation Permit 1.6.B

In-Place Density Tests 3.13.C

Soil Compaction Test Report 3.12.C

Utility Location Marker Verification 3.12.D

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 235 of 317

FORovaova

QualifQualif

horihoring Png INFORMATON

lalaional enional

quiredquired

on: Beforon: Befoted Compted Com

e approvede approve

orized overized ov

docuocONLYumentsment

Documenocumen

ParagrapharagraphLY


31 23 00 – 4

1.6 PERMITS


B. Deleted.

1. Deleted.

2. Deleted.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

B. Material excavated during inclement weather shall not be used as fill or backfill until after material drains and dries sufficiently for proper compaction.

C. Do not place backfill or fill on frozen ground.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and trash for backfill and fill, bedding, and stabilization.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 in. in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within two percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Base Course: Top course conforming to WSDOT M41-10, Section 9-03.9(3), Crushed Surfacing Base Course.

E. Backfill and Fill: Obtain from excavation or locations designated by the Company.

1. Backfill within the Tank Farm using excavation (in-situ) material or 5/8 minus crushed rock.

2. Use of any other imported material will require TOC Construction Representative’s approval.

3. Controlled Density Fill (CDF): See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 236 of 317

FOR erial erial

il after mil after m

place bacplace baINFORMATON

ozen particozen particlization.zation

cation Grocation Groombinationmbination

on, debrison, debris

ONLYs GC, SCGC, Smbination mbination

oils not maoils not mof compof comp


31 23 00 – 5

F. Bedding for Underground Piping, Tubing, Conduit, and Utility Lines: Sand as defined in ASTM D653 or excavated sandy material having less than 20% gravel particles. Gravel particles shall have a maximum dimension of 1/2 in.

G. Location Marker: 3-in. wide, detectable plastic tape imprinted with warning such as “CAUTION – BURIED INSTALLATION BELOW” at maximum 4-ft intervals. “Terra Tape Sentry Line 620” with “Terra Clips,” both by Reef Industries, or approved substitute.

H. Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene, non-woven geotextile with grab tensile strength (ASTM D4632) of 90 lb/ft and water flow rate (ASTM D4491) of 150 gallons per minute per square foot. US Fabric Type US 90NW or similar.

I. Slope Stabilization: Ballast in accordance with WSDOT M 41-10, Section 9-03.9(1) or 9-03.9(2).

J. General Stabilization: Crushed rock with maximum fragment size of 3/4 in.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities sidewalks, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperature and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation work shall comply with TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30.

B. Excavation shall be defined to mean any hand digging or machine digging below original grade. These requirements constitute the need for an “Excavation Permit” (Form A-7400-373). If an excavation permit is not required, this section does not apply.

C. Notify TOC Construction Representative before excavation.

D. Locate and expose underground utilities using subsurface scanning and hand tools, or other methods if approved by the TOC Construction Representative.

E. If cultural properties (e.g., bones and artifacts) are encountered, stop excavation and notify the Company. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 237 of 317

FOR e Stae Sta

3.9(1) or3.9(1) or

StabilizaStabiliz

INFORMATON

ies sidewaies sidewaent, undermt, underm

edimentatidimentat

m freezim freezONLY

ngbsequenseque

30.30


31 23 00 – 6

F. If unexpected debris is encountered, stop excavation and notify the TOC Construction Representative. Obtain approval before resuming excavation.

G. Excavation of contaminated soil will be administered in accordance with contractor procedures and programs.

H. Excavate earth and establish protective systems in accordance with the approved safety and health program.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 2 in. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Trim to neat lines where concrete is to be deposited against earth.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Minimize disturbance to bottom of excavation. Some over-excavation will likely be needed. Excavation shall be trimmed out with crushed rock fill and compacted before placing foundations.

2. Make excavation bottom compact, level, true and free of loose material. Correct over-excavation by extending concrete down to undisturbed earth at time of concrete placement or by placing and compacting structural backfill and fill.

B. In-Situ Soils

1. If not contaminated, salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill material.

2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-place density tests or use existing testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compaction is to be completed via approved control procedure. Record results for use as standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraph 3.12.)

3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.

4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3 in.below elevations shown on Drawings.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 238 of 317

FOR

lacinlacinnstructionnstruction

sited againted agai

cavatiavatINFORMATON

ons onsof excaof excaion shall bon shall b

ing foundang found

n bottom cn bottom cation byion by ex eyy

cement orement o

ted soited soONLY

fo

ce densityce densitand compaand com

d resultd resultar


31 23 00 – 7

3.4 CONTOURS AND ELEVATIONS

A. Excavation for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line (HIHTL):

1. Excavate deep enough to allow laying HIHTL at line and grade shown on Drawings. Two inches of compacted bedding is required under HIHTL. Correct over-excavation by placing and compacting backfill and fill. Pare holes in trench bottoms for pipe couplings so pipe will bear full length of pipe barrel or pipe section.

2. The TOC Construction Representative or designee must review the trench for compliance with design requirements prior to backfilling.

B. Excavation for Conduit Trenches: Excavate to contours and elevations shown on Drawings.

C. Excavation for Common Earthwork: Excavate as needed for general purpose, or as shown on Drawings.

D. Trench bottoms. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to be uniform and even. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. Allow for pipe or conduit bedding as indicated.

1. Excavate trenches for HIHTL installation 2-in. deeper than elevation required to allow for bedding course. Over excavation for conduit bedding is not required if soil is free of projecting stones and sharp objects.

E. In-Situ Soils

1. Salvage excavated soil for use as backfill and fill material.

2. Using nuclear density gauge, conduct in-place density tests or use existing testing laboratory reports (proctors) if backfill and compaction is to be completed via approved control procedure. Record results for use as standard density during backfill compaction. (See Paragraph 3.7.)

3. Dispose of contaminated and excess soil in accordance with Construction Waste Management Plan.

4. If stabilization is required because of excavation, finish subgrade 3-in.below elevations shown on Drawings.

F. Shoring

1. If conditions require shoring, a Shoring Plan shall be submitted to WRPS for approval. Reference TFC-ESHQ-S-STD-30 for responsibilities and implementation requirements.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 239 of 317

FOR

vativatawings.awings.

tion for Ction for Con DrDrINFORMATON

winwin

. Excavat. Excavatg stones ang stones an

ng as indig as indi

for HIHTr HIHbedding cobedding co

f soil is fref soil is fre

fif ONLYl and filand f

ce densityce densitand compand com

rd resultrd resultara


31 23 00 – 8

2. Design of shoring shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-06, Section 3.7.

3.5 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slab and pavements to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll when subgrade is wet or saturated.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by WRPS Construction Engineer.

C. Test or inspect subgrade materials as required for compaction requirements as applicable.

3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile excavated material that is suitable for use as fill or backfill until material is needed.

B. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water.

C. Do not stockpile excavated soil materials adjacent to trenches and other excavations, unless excavation side slopes and excavation support systems are designed, constructed, and maintained for stockpile loads.

D. Do not stockpile excavated materials near or over existing facilities, adjacent property, if weight of stockpiled material could induce excessive settlement.

3.7 BACKFILL AND FILL PREPARATION

A. The subcontractor shall prepare a Backfill Permit (See Attachment 1) and obtain approval from the TOC Construction Representative prior to commencing backfill.

B. Remove debris and organic material from area to be backfilled or filled.

C. Do not backfill by sluicing or flooding unless written approval is obtained from TOC Construction Representative.

D. Allow concrete to cure before placing backfill against concrete.

E. Keep placement surfaces free of water, debris, and foreign material during placement and compaction of fill and backfill materials.

F. Do not place fill or backfill, if fill or backfill material is frozen or if surface upon which fill or backfill is to be placed is frozen.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 240 of 317

FORor inor in

plicable.plicable.

F SOIL MF SOIL

INFORMATON

vated mvated mdeded..

l materialsmaterialstockpilesstockpiles

oil materiaoil materiaside sloide slopespes

ned for stoed for sto

ar or over ar or over ould indould inONLY

duc

e AttachmAttachmor to comor to com


31 23 00 – 9

3.8 BACKFILL AND FILL


B. Perform backfilling and filling in accordance with an approved soil/gravelcompaction procedure (for example Attachment 2 or Attachment 3).

C. Place specified common or native backfill in even, loose layers not more than 8-in. deep if using Attachment 2, or not more than 6-in. deep if using Attachment 3, in a manner that avoids segregation, and compact each lift to specified densities prior to placing succeeding lifts. Slope lifts only where necessary to conform to final grades or as necessary to keep placement surfaces drained of water.

D. Perform initial backfilling and filling in presence of TOC Construction Representative/Engineering Representative.

E. Obtain test results (as applicable) and adjust compaction method, if required.

F. Obtain TOC Construction Representative approval before proceeding with backfilling and filling.

3.9 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL


B. The Controlled Density Fill (CDF) shall be placed in a uniform manner that will prevent voids or segregation of the bedding and filling materials. If required, the CDF shall be consolidated with internal vibrators.

C. The CDF shall not be subjected to load and shall remain undisturbed by construction activities for a minimum of 24 hours after placement.

3.10 BACKFILL AND FILL – FOUNDATIONS AND SLABS


B. Under Structures: Within influence area beneath structures, slabs, curbs, backfill with structural fill, unless otherwise indicated by design. A minimum of 6 in. of granular fill is required immediately below concrete footings, slabs and other concrete structures.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 241 of 317

FOR ssaryssary

ined of wined of w

m initial bm initial bativev /INFORMATON

ngingi

lts (as applts (as app

ction io ReprRepr

Backfill Peackfill PeRepresentRepresent

ONLYed in a ud in afiilling matlling mat

undisturundisturem


31 23 00 – 10

C. Place loose layers of specified structural backfill and fill evenly up sides of wall to avoid unbalanced loading. Limit each layer that is 24-in. below finish grade to 8-in. depth. Limit each layer in top 24 in. to 4-in. depth.

D. Compact each layer uniformly to 95% of maximum density as determined by specified compaction tests in Paragraph 3.12.

3.11 FINISH GRADING AND STABILIZATION

A. Grade each area disturbed by work to blend into existing contours. Slope area to drain away from structures. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Rake each area to remove surface cobbles larger than 6 in. Dispose of excess material and debris as directed by the Company.

C. Stabilize area with minimum of 1-in. and maximum of a 3-in. course of specified stabilization material.

D. After finish grading and stabilization, remove surface markers and flags.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified geotechnical/soils engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill lift. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously complete work comply with requirements.

C. Compaction Testing (not required if using Attachment 2, “Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of Existing Soils within Tank Farms” or Attachment 3,“Procedure for Backfill and Compaction of 5/8 Minus Crushed Rock”)

1. Test compacted backfill and fill at the following intervals.

a. Backfill and fill: one test of each layer, each layer shall not exceed 8 in.

2. Perform compaction testing in accordance with the following standards. Provide report required by each standard.

a. Compaction control: ASTM D1557.

i. In-place density: ASTM D6938. Each layer shall be as dense as the existing soil density (Paragraph 3.1.H.2) and compacted uniformly to 95% of maximum density as established by compaction tests (per ASTM D1557).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 242 of 317

FOR

e eace eacterial anterial an

ze area wize area won mamaINFORMATON

erieri

ding ding and sand s

ND TESTD TEST

or shall enor shall perform tperform t

d test stest subgubg onlg only aftaf

ts. s.

tact ONLYhment hmentarmsarms”” or o

nus Crusheus Crush

intervalsntervals


31 23 00 – 11

ii. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.

D. Buried Pipe and Utility Location Marker Verification

1. Prior to completion of backfill, perform random surveillance to verify buried utility marker tape has been installed and record results.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 243 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


31 23 00 – Att. 1–1


BACKFILL PERMIT FORM

Key to Backfill Permit Form

Item # Description

1 Permit No. – Sequential number, developed by the Project; i.e., “5-0001.”

2 Self-explanatory.

3 Project title.

4 Example – “22337 Release 5.”

5 Describe location of the backfill; i.e. “Conduit run 001, between Handhole-005 and Handhole-006.”

6 Enter the applicable drawings that show the backfill location.

7 Enter any other reference documents.

8 Discipline Foreman signature, signifying that their work in the excavation to be backfilled is complete. “N/A” will be entered if given discipline is not applicable to the specified backfill area.

9 Quality Signature, signifying that all the quality requirements for the backfill area have been met prior to backfill and backfill may commence.

10 Field Work Supervisor signature, signifying that the all contract requirements for the backfill area have been met and backfill may commence.

11 Enter backfill requirements, typically construction specification reference.

12 “Construction Representative,” this signature would be from the Construction Group, signifying that they agree that all of the requirements for the backfill area have been met and permission to proceed with backfill is granted.

13 Date that “Construction Representative” signed off the form.

14 Date that the applicable discipline foreman, Quality and Field Work Supervisor signed the form.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 244 of 317

ExampExam

Describe lscribendholendhole-0000

he ae INFORMATON

pplicabpplica

ther refereher refere

man signaman signmplete. mplete.

ified backfied bac

inging that al that abackfill anbackfill an

, signifysignifyininand backfind back

onstruconstruONLY

tion

e would bwould requiremequirem

th backfillh backfil

e form.e form.

RPP

-SPE

C-6

0023

, Rev

. 7

31 2

300

–A

tt. 1

–2

BAC

KFI

LL P

ERM

IT(1

) N

o.:

(2)

Proj

ect o

r Wor

k Pa

ckag

e N

o.:

(3)

Title

:(4

) C

ontra

ct N

o.:

(5)

Des

crip

tion

of B

ackf

ill W

ork

Appr

oval

s(1

4) D

ate

(8)

Elec

trica

l

(8)

Pipi

ng

(8)

Car

pent

ry

(6)

Dra

win

gs:

(8)

Con

cret

e

(8)

Layo

ut

(8)

Oth

er

(7)

Ref

eren

ce(8

) O

ther

(9)

Qua

lity

(10)

FW

S

(11)

Bac

kfill

Req

uire

men

tsAu

thor

izat

ion

to P

roce

ed b

y

(12)

WR

PS C

onst

ruct

ion

Rep

rese

ntat

ive

(13)

Dat

e

END

OF

ATT

AC

HM

ENT

1

RPP

-SPE

C-6

0023

Rev

.07

2/14

/201

8 - 2

:57

PM24

5 of

317

FORFORRFOROR R(

ORORORFORMATON

ININPipi IN

FONFO

arpe

ntry

INFORORFOORORORRRRRMR

ATON

YONLYONLYY


31 23 00 – Att. 2-1


PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTION OFEXISTING SOILS WITHIN TANK FARMS

PURPOSEThis procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of soil backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density gauge.

SCOPEThis procedure defines the requirements for placement and compaction of soil backfill including inspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areas defined on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken from Fluor Federal Services Job Bulletin No. JB-RPP-041, Rev. 1, which has been accepted standard practice in the Tank Farms.

In-place testing of compacted backfill including sand bedding by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this procedure. Random periodic visual observation and monitoring of the backfill operation and compactive effort shall be the basis for acceptance.

PROCEDURECompaction of backfill within the Tank Farms shall be controlled by adherence to this procedure and defined compactive effort within established variables as defined below. Determination of maximum standard density, from testing laboratory reports (proctors) or in situ values obtained from nuclear gauge testing of undisturbed ground is not covered by this procedure.

Only materials as defined by the project specifications will be used for backfill. Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensure that the area to be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material.

If sand is encountered during excavation perform the following for installation and compaction.A. Excavate to proper installation depth. Use trench box if necessary.B. Install pipe on stone free earth. Rake native soil or sand bed if required.C. Cover pipe with 6” of 5/8” minus top course material.

Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.

Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 8 in. in depth.

If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to achieve optimum moisture content.

Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 8.5% and may vary as much as plus or minus 2.5% depending on different soil types and gradations. The addition of water to cohesive soil

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 246 of 317

FOR fines thfines t

ds to verifys to verifawings. Twings. T

o. JB. JB--RPRINFORMATON

ackfill inclckfill indure. Ranre. Ra

effort shaeffort sha

shalshall be cl be cvariables aariables a

eports (proorts (procovered bcovered b

ONLYused for sed for

re that there that therial.rial.

llation alation a


31 23 00 – Att. 2-2

types shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure.

Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by use of either pneumatic or gas powered compaction equipment such as a Wacker®31, model BS-600 manufactured by Wacker Corporation or equivalent. Alternatively, a pneumatic “Pogo Stick” such as that manufactured by Jet Equipment or equivalent may be used. The use of “Pogo Stick” compaction equipment shall be limited to use in small confined areas such as that found in and around pipes and conduits and small excavations. Alternative compaction equipment may be used if acceptable to the TOC Construction Representative. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards.

The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:

! If a Wacker or equivalent is used, a minimum of three complete passes shall be made.! If a “Pogo Stick” type device is used, a minimum of eight complete passes is made.

One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute.

Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content within the optimum range.

Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the Tank Operations Contractor, Washington River Protections Solutions, LLC, for variations from this process that may result in uneven load distribution.

If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundation walls before the curing period is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill Permit.

INSPECTIONControl of backfill placement, optimum moisture content, and compactive effort shall be accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified soils technician.

Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification, excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction equipment and methods and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.

31 Wacker is a registered trademark of Wacker Neuson Production Americas, LLC, Menomonee Falls, Wisconsin.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 247 of 317

FORer or equiver or equi

ickck” tytype pe yyybe defibe defINFORMATON

nedneonce ovonce ovpproximatproximat

etween inween in

de of wallde of wallading. Obading. Ob

ions Solutons Solut

wlly poury poun ONLY

edtrength rengthon walls bon walls b

obtained onbtained


31 23 00 – Att. 2-3

Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by visual and physical examination of the wetted material. Cohesive soil containing the correct optimum moisture content shall exhibit no evidence of saturation yet shall have enough moisture to maintain shape when deformed. Physical examination of soil cohesion and plasticity shall be the basis for determining proper moisture content.

The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts, number of passes and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on surveillance reports.

The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.

END OF ATTACHMENT 2

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 248 of 317

INFORMATON

E

ONLY


31 23 00 – Att. 3-1


PROCEDURE FOR BACKFILL AND COMPACTIONOF 5/8 MINUS CRUSHED ROCK

PURPOSEThis procedure identifies a process for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill by a controlled method. This procedure also defines the degree of compactive effort required to produce acceptable in-place densities as an alternative to performing density tests with a nuclear density gauge.

SCOPEThis procedure defines the requirements for placement and compaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill including inspection methods to verify the acceptability of the compacted backfill within Tank Farm areas defined on project drawings. The compaction details in this were taken from American Electric test plan 54891-006-TP-001.

In-place testing of compacted backfill by use of the nuclear density gauge is not required for this procedure. Random periodic visual observation and monitoring of the backfill operation and compactive effort shall be the basis for acceptance.

PROCEDURECompaction of 5/8 minus crushed rock backfill shall be controlled by adherence to this procedure and defined compactive effort within established variables as defined below.

Keep materials free of frozen particles, lumps, organic matter, and debris. Ensure that the area to be backfilled is not frozen and the backfill material does not contain frozen material.

Backfilling by means of sluicing or flooding with water is not permitted.

Backfill material shall be placed in loose uniform lifts not to exceed 6 in. in depth.

If needed, water shall be added and mixed with the backfill material before it is compacted to achieve optimum moisture content.

Optimum moisture content shall be approximately 9.5 percent and may vary as much as plus or minus 1.5 percent. The addition of water shall be such that the material is easily compactable by mechanical manipulation as defined in this procedure.

Backfill shall be brought up in layers. Each layer shall be compacted full width and length by use of a Wacker, model BS 50-2 or model WP 1550 AW manufactured by Wacker Corporation or equivalent. All equipment used shall be in good working order capable of performing to manufacturer’s standards.

The compactive effort for each layer of backfill shall be as follows:

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 249 of 317

FOR fines thefines the

ing inspecg inspecs defineds define

est plt INFORMATON

n 54n 54

ackfill byckfill byal observaal observa

or acceptar accepta

l shall be cshall be cstablishedablishe

matter, anmatter, anot contot conONLY

in

ermitted.ermitted.

in.in. in depdep

it


31 23 00 – Att. 3-2

If a Wacker BS 50-2 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 4 complete passes shall be made.If a Wacker WP 1550 or equivalent is used, a minimum of 2 complete passes shall be made.

One complete pass shall be defined as full rotation over the area being compacted. As a minimum, a rotation shall be once over and once back across the area being compacted. The rate of equipment travel shall be approximately 15 lineal feet per minute.

Water shall be added as necessary between individual passes to maintain the moisture content within the optimum range.

Bring up backfill material evenly on each side of walls, structures, and pipeline in order to avoid damaging or displacing them by unbalanced loading. Obtain written approval from the TOC Construction Representative for variations from this process that may result in uneven load distribution.

If backfill material is to be placed against or on top of newly poured concrete, ensure that the concrete curing period has been achieved and concrete design strength achieved as required by ACI 301. Backfill material shall not be placed against foundation walls before the curing period is completed, unless written approval from the design engineer is obtained on the Backfill Permit.

INSPECTIONControl of backfill placement, optimum moisture content and compactive effort shall be accomplished by visual surveillance. Surveillances shall be performed by a trained and qualified soils technician.

Personnel performing oversight and surveillance of the backfill operations shall possess a thorough working knowledge of earthwork and soils relative to material types and classification, excavation methods and procedures, material gradation, fill and backfill operations, compaction equipment and methods, and moisture control. Oversight personnel shall have received training to perform visual surveillances of backfill operations.

Verification that soil moisture content is within the specified range shall be accomplished by visual and physical examination of the wetted material.

The oversight person shall visually observe the backfill and compaction operation to verify adherence to this procedure. Type of compaction equipment, use of equipment, depth of lifts, number of passes, and rate of travel shall be observed. Surveillances shall be documented on surveillance reports.

The frequency of surveillances for backfill operations shall as a minimum be at the beginning of backfilling for a project or job and at least daily thereafter while work is in progress.

END OF ATTACHMENT 3

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 250 of 317

FORto be placto be placas beenas been

l sINFORMATON

hall not hall nopproval frpproval fr

oisture conisture colances shaances sh

e backfill backfilltive to mve to m

andandONLYbackfbackf

onnel shalnnel sha

l be accol be acco


33 10 00 – 1

SECTION 33 10 00

WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of below grade piping from the raw water main line to the backflow preventer in the Air and Water Service Building and of sewer piping to tie into the existing chemical drain line.



The following documents and others referenced therein form part of Contract to the extent designated in this Section. Referenced documents are those current as of the date of this Section unless otherwise indicated.


ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/ Inch Standard

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Services Piping

ASME B40.1 Gauges: Pressure Indicating Dial Type — Elastic Element


Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels



ASNT SNT-TC-1A Personnel Qualifications and Certification inNondestructive Testing

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 251 of 317

FORDODO

and generageneron Sectionon Sectio

ummINFORMATON


erwise inerwise i

MechanicalMechanica

Forged FForged

e Flanges Flanges 4 Metric/ Metric/

rvicesvices PiPONLYIndicatingndicatin

el Codeel Code


33 10 00 – 2

C. American Society of Safety Engineers®32 (ASSE®32)

ASSE 1013 Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Principle Fire Protection Backflow Preventers


ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting

ASTM A194 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure

ASTM A865 Standard Specification for Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for use in Steel Pipe Joints

ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A234 Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C552 Specifications for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM D2321 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications

ASTM D2661 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

32 ASSE is a registered trademark of American Society of Safety Engineers, Des Plaines, Illinois.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 252 of 317

FOR TM TM A1A1

865865 INFORMATON

StandaStanWroughtWroughtnd High Ted High Te

rd Specificd Specif

forONLYCellulaCellul

ndergrounndergrouwers andwers and


33 10 00 – 3

E. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fitting for Water

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. Through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids

AWWA C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings

AWWA C151 American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water

AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service

AWWA C223 Fabricated Steel and Stainless Steel Tapping Sleeves

AWWA C509 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service

AWWA C511 Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly

AWWA C600 Standard for Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA C800 Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings

AWWA M14 Recommended Practice for Backflow Prevention and Cross-Connection Control

F. AWWA Pacific Northwest Section

Cross-Connection Control Manual Accepted Procedures and Practices

G. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)

UPC Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)

H. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

NFPA 24 Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances

I. University of Southern California Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 253 of 317

FOR WWA WWA CC

AA C223C223

INFORMATON

ReReAssemAsse

tandard foandard fons and Thes and Th

und Servicund Serv

PraPrONLYctice fctice tion Contion Con

anuaan


33 10 00 – 4

Manual of Cross-Connection Control

J. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 246-290 Cross Connection Control

K. American Society for Nondestructive Testing (ASNT)


L. American Welding Society (AWS)


1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Gauges: After testing submit for approval vendor information showing that gauges used in testing are calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times test pressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.

2. Flushing: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the flushing operations were performed for a sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning.

3. Mainline: After testing submit for approval verification showing that the mainline is capable of sustaining a 200 psi load for 2 hours or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum static pressure. Measure leakage in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9 for underground piping.

4. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use or start of fabrication, submit each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.

5. Welding Personnel Qualifications: Five days before start of fabrication, submit welder qualification as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.

6. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for information/record.

7. Weld Examinations as required by Paragraph 3.4.A.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 254 of 317

FOR

QQ

ALSLS

Contract ontracINFORMATON

uireduired

ter testingtestind in testind in testin

sure, but nsure, but

submit forsubmit forperformed formed

approvalpprova00 pspONLY

i loadi loadMeasure lMeasure

d piping.piping.

rd Weldird Weldif fabrf f


33 10 00 – 5


1. Filter Vendor information: Submit two copies: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.



B. Qualifications

1. Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and Underground Piping in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.B.3.

2. Qualification of Inspectors: A certified independent testing agency shall perform all required inspections and testing.

3. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

4. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

5. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at the jobsite.

6. Pressure Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 255 of 317

CCUndUnd

QualificaQualificrform rformINFORMATON

ll rll

nel performel perform(CWIs) w(CWIs) w

in accordaaccorda

ing other ning othee with appe with app

SNTNT--TCTC--11

nation pronation procation. ation. ONLY

Ma

ng procedug procecation. Mcation.


33 10 00 – 6

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Materials shall be ABS plastic sewer pipe conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2661.

B. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings Below Grade

1. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, Class 150.

a. Joints: Push-on joints, AWWA C111 rubber gaskets.

b. Fittings: AWWA C110, Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron, Class 250 or AWWA C153, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, Class 250 or XTRA FLEX®33 restrained joint high-deflection fittings.

c. Pipe and Fittings: Cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104.

2. Galvanized Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A53, type E or S, galvanized, standard weight, Schedule 40.

a. Joints: Threaded.

b. Fittings: ASTM A865, threaded and galvanized

C. Valves

1. Gate Valves over 2 in.: AWWA C509, Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed or FM approved, Class 250, non-rising stem, open left, mechanical joint inlet and outlet with mechanical joint unassembled accessories or Mueller AquaGrip®34 System.

D. Tapping Sleeve: AWWA C223, fabricated steel, suitable for PVC, steel, ductile iron, and cast iron pipe, outlet flange size and sleeve O.D. to suit piping system.

E. Valve Boxes: Cast-iron with top section and cover with lettering “WATER”stamped on the cover, bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, barrel approximately 5 in. in diameter, adjustable cast-iron extension of length required.

F. Gaskets: Gaskets containing asbestos are not permitted.

G. Tracer Wire: #10 AWG THHN/THWN, yellow, solid copper.

33 XTRA FLEX is a registered trademark of United States Pipe and Foundry Company, LLC, Birmingham,Alabama.34 AquaGrip is a trademark of Mueller International, LLC, Atlanta, Georgia.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 256 of 317

FORc.cAA

INFORMATON

ized Steized Sd weight, Sweight,

s: ThreadThrea

ASTM A86ASTM A

WA C509, A C5090, non-0, non-risri

cal joint al jointONLYuitable fortable for

O.D. to suO.D. to su

teringer


33 10 00 – 7

H. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings

1. Copper Tubing: AWWA C800.

2. Dielectric: Watts Series 3003.

3. Mechanical or Push-On Type Pipe, and Fittings Below Grade.

a. UL listed or FM approved.

b. Megalug®35 malleable iron retainer/restraint gland with epoxy or bituminous outside coating and 1/2-in. minimum diameter asphalt coated tie rods.

c. For PVC, use a compression connection and restraint system, Mueller AquaGrip System.

I. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings from the Inlet to the Backflow Preventor

35 Megalug is a trademark of EBAA Iron Inc., Eastland, Texas.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 257 of 317

FOR c.c

er Pipe er PipeINFORMATON

anan

ONLY


33 10 00 – 8

Service Design Pressure(psig)

Hydrostatic Test Pressure (psig)

Design Temp(°F)

Inlet to Backflow Preventor 150 225 +10/-0 140Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. & largerPipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamlessWall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S.Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L,

Class 3000, socket weld or threaded in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced in accordance with MSS SP-97.Unions Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L,

Class 3000, threaded or socket welded in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F 304L, Class 3000, socket weld in accordance with ASME B16.11.

Flanges None. ASTM A182, Grade F 304L, CL 150, forged, raised face or flat face, slip-on or weld neck in accordance with ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Bolting None. ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8F, heavy hex nuts.

Gaskets None. For raised face: aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/8-in. thick, Garlock®36 Blueguard, Style 3700.

For flat face flanges: EPDM, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Series 8314.

Ball Valves (2 way)

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000 (V-004 & V-014).

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000 (V-009 & V-010).

Gate Valves See associated Drawings.

J. Pipe Casing

1. Raw Water: AWWA C151, Class 150, Ductile Iron Pipe

a. Spacers: Calpico Inc., Model M-Series Casing Insulators or equivalent.

b. End Seals: Calpico Inc., Model W End Seals or equivalent.

K. Pipe Insulation: Cellular glass block or mineral fiber preformed insulation in accordance with ASTM C547 or ASTM C552. Foamglas®37 by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

L. Threaded Pipe Joint Sealant: Permabond®38 MH052 or approved substitute.

36 Garlock is a registered trademark of Garlock Sealing Technologies LLC, Palmyra, New York.37 Foamglas is a registered trademark of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.38 Permabond is a registered trademark of Loxeal srl, Cesano Maderno, Italy.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 258 of 317

ORRINFORMATON

I

1 Gr CF8M1 Gr CF8Min in

t wt weld eld ekfil fil

T

ORATTTTOON

ONLYtile Iron Pile Iron P

asing Inasing In


33 10 00 – 9

M. Solder: Lead-free type.

N. Raw Water Filters: Filter Specialists, Inc. Liquid Bag Filters, Model FSPN-250 #6-3” Flange, Dwg. 1901747. 316 Stainless Steel, hinged lid, 150-lb raised face flanges, ASME Section VIII Division 1 stamped, 150 psi @ 250°F, 800 micron, polypropylene filter bags. Contact: Gary Schulz, Control Factors – Portland, Inc., 503-669-1185.

O. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: The Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be ASSE Listed 1013 and AWWA Compliant C511and supplied with Clow R/W Model 2640 (FxF) – full port OS&Y gate valves. The main body and access cover shall be epoxy coated ductile iron (ASTM A536 Grade 4), the seat ring and check valve shall be NORYL™39, the stem shall be Stainless Steel (ASTM A276) and the seat disc elastomers shall be EPDM. The internals shall be series 300 Stainless Steel. The checks and the relief valve shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from the line. The Reduced Pressure Backflow Prevention Assembly shall be a ZURN WILKINS®40 Model 375. The Reduced Pressure Backflow assembly shall be fully assembled at the factory and shipped for field installation. Products shall be listed on the Department of Health Approved Assemblies List with the Washington State Department of Health.

P. Water Inlet Pressure Control Valve: The Pressure Reducing Control Valve with Low Flow By-Pass shall be a pilot operated diaphragm valve designed to automatically reduce a fluctuating higher upstream pressure to a constant lower downstream pressure regardless of varying flow rates. Assembly shall be a globe style with all internal cast components CF8M (316) Stainless Steel with a 250 psi rating. The valve shall be Watts ACV Model 3” either LFF115-74 or LFM115-74, 150# flanged raised-face, EPDM seal, with low flow by-pass.

Q. Five-valve Block and Bleed Manifold: Valve manifold for differential pressure transmitter across the filter canisters shall be a 5 valve with 2 test ports, a vent valve, and 2 equalize valves (as shown in Fig. 1). Unit shall be Stainless Steel with hard seats and 1/2” FPT inlet and outlet ports in the configuration shown in the diagram to the right. Assembly part number shall be a PGI International M-578-SCT/HTAS.

39 NORYL is a trademark of Sabic Global Technologies B.V., Netherlands.40 ZURN WILKINS is a registered trademark of Zurco, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 259 of 317

FOR nless nless

ernals shaernals shacessible foessible fo

d PressurPressu®4040INFORMATON

ModeModed at the fad at the fa

artment ofrtment oepartmentartmen

trol Valverol Valva pilot opea pilot op

ing highering higherf varyvarying ing

ts CF8M (s CF8M Model 3”Model 3”

DM sealDM seaONLYanifold fonifold f

alve with ve with it shall bet shall b

configuconfiguPGIP


33 10 00 – 10

R. Differential Pressure Transmitter: Pressure transmitter for the filters shall be a 4-20mA with communication, Stainless Steel wetted parts, 1/2” FPT process connections, and a 5 to 500 kPa range. Part number shall be a Yokogawa®41

EJA110E-JHS4G 912DN/FF1.

S. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range, and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft™42 45-1109-SD-04L-0/300#.

T. Thermal Expansion (Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be Hydropads®43 as manufactured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm-type Stainless Steel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be exposed internally to line pressure and all material in contact with line fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unit shall have sufficient volume between bellows and other shell to limit pulsation to values noted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID. Assembly shall be either model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet) or part number 320500 (32 in³) (threaded inlet).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. All underground utility locations shall be identified by means of marking tape. Place tape in backfill directly above the utility line at approximately 12-in. below grade.

41 Yokogawa is a registered trademark of Yokogawa Electric Corporation, Tokyo, Japan.42 Ashcroft is a trademark of Ashcroft Inc., Stratford, Connecticut.43 Hydropads is a registered trademark of Güntner GmbH & Co., Germany.

Figure 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 260 of 317

mAmAnnectionnnectioA110E0E-JHJH

Indicatondicat” dd INFORMATON

l sizel sizeGrade 1A Grade 1A

ulsation Dulsation Dctured by ctured by

eel belloweel bellone pressure pressur

shall havhall havalues notealues not

&ID. Unit ID. Unit&ID&ID. . A

nuONLY

Assmber 32mber 3


33 10 00 – 11

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Raw Water Pipe and Fittings

1. Install pipe and pipe accessories in accordance with AWWA C600 (Ductile Iron), ASTM A234 (Steel), manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 24, UPC, the drawings, and this Section.

2. Install thrust restraint at all bends, tees, plugs, and caps in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8-6. If concrete thrust blocks are used, size in accordance with details shown on the contract drawings.

3. Fabricate and install Stainless Steel welded pipe and fittings and components in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

4. Make joints in threaded piping system with specified joint sealant. Apply sealant to male threads only.

5. Coat buried carbon steel accessories, such as tie-rods and clamps, with 16.0 mils of Bitumastic in one or two coats (10-24 hours between coats). Allow 8 hours for Bitumastic to dry before backfilling.

6. Painting and Markings: See Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” for preparation and painting.

B. Valve Orientation




C. Sewer Drain Piping

1. Slope line 1/8 in. per ft (minimum) or as specified on drawings.

2. Install ABS or PVC pipeline in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the drawings. In-line service testing of sewer pipe is permitted.

D. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer

1. Install in accordance with WAC 246-290 recognized cross-connection control manual installation specifications including but not limited to the specifications found in “Cross Connection Control Manual, Accepted

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 261 of 317

FOR

ccSecSec

Make joinMake joalant tant INFORMATON

ma m

ried carboried carbof Bitumasf Bitumas

s for Bitumfor Bitum

ngs: See Sgs: See S

ings wherengs where

edd ONLYlocate aocate

used as mused as


33 10 00 – 12

Procedures and Practices,” “Manual of Cross-Connection Control” or AWWA M14.

E. Flanged Joints

1. Install flanges in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Clean joint surfaces of the pipe, fittings and valves being joined.

3. Align flange of pipe, fitting, or valve to be installed with flange of receiving pipe, fitting, or valve.

4. Support pipe, fittings, and valves being joined so that flanges are properly aligned.

5. Lubricate bolts/studs and nuts prior to installation of bolts and nuts.

6. Clean gasket of sand, dirt, and other foreign matter. Inspect gasket for damage/defects.

F. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.

G. Weld Identification

1. Prepare weld identification drawings, isometric or spool, using existing project Drawings as applicable which show relative positions of pressure-containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components.

2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.

3. Do not reuse weld numbers. If a weld is completely replaced, assign a new number.


A. Flushing/Testing Preparation


2. Obtain direction for disposal of flushing water from TOC Construction Representative. See the Contract Statement of Work.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 262 of 317

FORaa

LubricLubric

lean gaean gaINFORMATON

kekee/defecte/defe

abricate anbricate aninstructiostruct

ed procedued proced

n drawingsdrawinge which se which

t welds to welds t

tainai ONLYing weng w

de. Recorde. Reco

telytel replareplay


33 10 00 – 13

B. Raw Water Line Flushing

1. Flush raw water in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, for below ground piping.

a. The underground pipe trench shall be partially backfilled between joints before testing to prevent movement of pipe.

b. Notify Project Engineer at least five working days before flushing of piping system for witnessing flush. Flushing to verify that new lines are clean and acceptable.

c. Flush piping with water for five minutes minimum, and until effluent is clean and contains no visible particulate matter. Flushing pressure shall not exceed maximum operating pressure specified for the system. Flushing water supply shall have sufficient capacity to produce a full pipe (largest pipe size) flush.

d. Document flushing of each piping system on NFPA Form “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground and Underground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and submit in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.



1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Perform visual examination (VT) on all completed welds in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

4. Examination Documentation

a. Document examination of pressure containment welds for piping systems on weld examination and test record. Record weld identification drawings, weld numbers, welder identification, welding procedure numbers, weld filler material, visual examinations and notation of satisfactory completion of pressure testing in accordance with instructions on form.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 263 of 317

FOR sus

INFORMATON

DocumeDocumContractoContracto

derground ergroundbmit in acmit in ac

ESTS STS

DE) of WeDE) of We

idual pipeidual pipe, shall be , shall be

ONLYompleted ompleted

elds in aelds in a


33 10 00 – 14



5. Final closure welds that cannot be isolated for testing shall be examined in-process.

B. Raw Water Line Testing

1. Furnish instruments, facilities, and labor required to conduct tests.

2. Test gauges shall be calibrated and capable of measuring at least 1.5 times test pressure, but no more than 4 times test pressure.

3. Document leak/pressure testing of each piping system on NFPA Form “Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground or Underground Piping,” in accordance with NFPA 24, as applicable, and submit in accordance with 1.3.

4. Perform tests after lines have been flushed and before joints have been backfilled for underground piping.

5. Remove all air from piping and adequately restrain pipe prior to hydrostatic test for underground piping. The last thrust block poured shall have cured a minimum of 7 days prior to test.

6. Test mainline at 200 psi for two hours or at 50 psi in excess of the maximum static pressure and measure leakage of raw water lines in accordance with NFPA 24, Article 8.9, for underground piping. Service test trailer piping less than 3 in., use full mainline pressure for at least 30 minutes with no visible leaks or loss of test water. Repair any unsatisfactory joints and retest.

7. Install a temporary relief valve during pressure test. Relief valve shall have a discharge capacity of at least 125 percent of the pressurizing device and be set to not more than 110 percent of the test pressure. Demonstrate proper operation of relief valve before relief valve is attached to system for leak test and whenever there is cause to question operating accuracy of valve.

C. Sewer Line Testing

1. Before connecting to existing manhole, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code. Document test results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 264 of 317

FORFF

Test gaTest gatest presstest pres

INFORMATON

ment leakent leakctorctor’s Mat’s Mat

nd Pipingnd Pipingordance wdance w

lines havenes haveound pipinound pipi

and adequand adeqund piping. nd piping.

prior to teprior to te

ONLYat 50 pat 50

akage of rakage of randergrounndergro

ne pressurne press Repair Repair


33 10 00 – 15

D. For Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer, verify and document the following characteristics by visual inspection:

1. Device is installed in its proper orientation.

2. Device has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 265 of 317

FOR INFORMATON ONLY


40 05 13 – 1

SECTION 40 05 13

PROCESS PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of inside water piping beginning after the backflow preventer and of outdoor below and above grade water piping from the Air and Water Service Building to the Tank Farm Process Piping manifolds.





ANSI/ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems


ASME B&PVC, 2013 Boiler and Pressure Vessel CodeSection IX Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing

Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operations


ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ASME B31.9, 2014 Building Service Piping



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 266 of 317

D DOCD DOC

general pgeneral pSectionSectioINFORMATON

s, s,

ents and otents and oSection. RSection. R

wise ie indicdi

ards Instituards Inst

cheme focheme fo

gineers (Aineers (A

Pressure Vessure on Sn ONLY

tandartandaWelders, Brelders, B

onss

uttweldinuttweldin


40 05 13 – 2


ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges

ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service



ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts

ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings









MSS SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends





RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 267 of 317

FOR TM A351A35

33 INFORMATON

ng Societyg Societyy

StrSt

StructurStructu

uctural Weural We

tion of Weon of W

SS)S) ONLYupports –upports –

n, ApplicaApplica

S


40 05 13 – 3

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications and or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use or start of fabrication, submit each in accordance with Paragraph 1.4.B.


3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.4 for information/record.



6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.


1. O&M manuals for equipment.


A. Misrepresented Products: See Contract Statement of Work for required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.

a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 268 of 317

FOREEdocudocuinforminfor

echaniechanP INFORMATON

al alaragrapharagraph

minations minations

ak Testingak Testining proceding proc

ONLYof Work ff Work

ures.ur


40 05 13 – 4

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDE) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

C. Qualification of Pressure Boundary Welders

1. For low-pressure systems, personnel and procedures for welding pressure-retaining components, along with attachments hereto, shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX, except as modified by ASME B31.9,Chapter V, Section 927.6.

D. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Sec V as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1. Qualification of Nondestructive Examination (NDE) personnel:

a. Visual weld examinations shall be performed and appropriate documentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification in accordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding Inspections (CAWIs), certified in accordance with above standard, may perform examinations when under immediate direction of CWIs.

b. Personnel performing other NDE of welds shall be certified in accordance with written practice, which shall meet requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret test results.

2. Welding-related examination documentation shall be signed or stamped by individuals performing examinations.

E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 269 of 317

FOR SS D1D1

ecificatioecificatio

QualificaQualific

INFORMATON

Visual wVisual wdocumentadocumenta

ccordanceccordancetions (CAons (CA

orm examm exam

ming otherming othertten practiten practi

se LLevel Ivel I

ONLYtion shalion shal

g procedurg proceduintainntain


40 05 13 – 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and Components List section below.

B. Pipe Supports: See details specified on the Drawings and in Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications.” U-bolts to be Stainless Steel or plastic coated.

C. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints. Use anaerobic acrylic sealer.Henkel Corporation: Loctite 5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specification.

D. Pipe covering protection saddle: B-Line B3160 and B3162, Stainless Steel, plain. Diameter to match pipe diameter and insulation thickness as specified in Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

E. Protective Coating for above and below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Exterior epoxy protection system, SEAGUARD MP, 5-6 mil thick, per Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and per manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Valves: Specified in the Components List section below, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

G. Hoses: UFBX1 T316L hose, with series 300 SS braid, and with T304L Schedule 40S pipe ends for socket welding. Lengths, reducers, and 90° long and shortradius elbows, as shown on the Drawings, and within the specifications of B31.9. Each hose description in the Bill of Materials on the Drawings is described in order of hose assembly. All lengths shall be ±1/4” of the indicated dimension on the Drawings. Hose braid collars shall be 3/4” long for 1” hose and 1” long for 1.5”, 2”, and 3” hose. Long and short radius elbows shall be according to ASME B16.9 dimensions. Pipe end dimensions called out on the Drawings are intentionally long. Field verify dimensions, and cut to length during installation as required. Follow all manufacturers’ specifications, especially the minimum live length for vibration, minimum static bend radius, and maximum offset.

H. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified in the Components List section below.

I. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

J. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 270 of 317

FORpe Joint Se Joint

kel Corpol Corpothreads anhreads an

INFORMATON

protprotectecatchtch pipe dpipe d

s Piping ans Piping an

above andabove andSEAGUASEAGU

urer’s insturer’s inst

ents Lnts List seist

00 SS br0 SS bedudONLY

ucers, ancers, aithin the sithin the s

e DrawingDrawinthe indicathe indic

”” hose ahose ae a


40 05 13 – 6

K. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping.”

L. Buried Pipe Marker Tape: See Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

M. Penetration Sealants: RTV Silicone.

N. Anchors:

1. Concrete Anchor Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”


3. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Thermal Expansion (Pulsation Dampeners): Thermal Expansion units shall be Hydropads as manufactured by FLEXICRAFT, and shall consist of a diaphragm-type Stainless Steel bellows unit enclosed by the outer shell. Bellows shall be exposed internally to line pressure and all material in contact with line fluid shall be Stainless Steel. Unit shall have sufficient volume between bellows and other shell to limit pulsation to values noted on drawings. Unit shall have a nominal gas capacity as noted on the P&ID. Unit shall be pre-charged with nitrogen gas to the values as noted on the P&ID. Assembly shall be either model 22 (200 in³)(socket weld inlet), model 21 (100 in³) (socket weld inlet), or part number 320500 (32 in³) (threaded inlet).

B. Pressure Indicators: Pressure gauges shall be Stainless Steel, 0 – 300 psi range, and a 4 1/2” dial size with 1/2” MPT bottom inlet fitting. Accuracy shall be to ASME B40.1 Grade 1A (1%). Part number shall be a Ashcroft 45-1109-SD-04L-0/300#.

C. Flow Orifice: Flow orifices for outside building accessory lines shall be a 2”O-ring union with orifice insert sized to approximately 5/8 in., Class 3000, socket weld and Stainless Steel. Hart Industries, p/n O-3333-8-E-304L. Orifice shall be sized for the flow specified on the P&ID and adjusted accordingly.

D. Leak detector elements as indicated in the Drawings.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut,

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 271 of 317

FORAncAnc

TT

pap INFORMATON

nsion (Pnsion manufactumanufactu

el bellowsel bellowso line presne pres

t shall havt shall havalues notevalues n

P&ID. UnP&ID. UnAssembAssembin³)n³) (sock(sock

be Stainbe StailONLY

nleet fittingt fittin

be a Ashbe a Ash

y lines s lines syn


40 05 13 – 7

reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.

2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.9.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal (except Stainless Steel pipe) in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Stainless Steel piping shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of items to Site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Fabricate and install pipe and fittings and components in accordance with ASME B31.9, the Drawings, and this Section.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 272 of 317

FOR cific ficific f

heses

me fee INFORMATON

rouron 09 91 0n 09 91 0

surfaces urfaces mayma extenexteny

ping shalling shall

all be cleaall be clea

ONLYnd instructnd instruct

nd miscelnd miscCoordinateCoordin


40 05 13 – 8

B. Valve Orientation





C. Identification

1. An identification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment, valves, and components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be used on a Stainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment identification number (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.

2. Piping Identification: Identify in-building and above grade piping systems as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also Attachment 1.

D. Pipe


2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs before assembly.

3. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system.

4. Install piping with slope specified on the Drawings.


6. Field verify lengths of make-up spool pipe sections as called out on the Drawings. Cut and weld to fit after all other spools are in place.

E. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 273 of 317

FORntificatntifica

An idenAn idenalves, anlves, a

d ono INFORMATON

a Staia Stacation numcation num

ification: ificationed and dired and dir

ent 1. nt 1.

result in cresult in c

meter aftermeter afte

ONLYtion has sttion has st

s. Cap or p. Cap oon in pipinon in pip


40 05 13 – 9

F. Flanged Joints







7. Install flange isolation kits per manufacturer instructions on every flange adjacent to a below grade section of piping.

8. All flange bolt hole orientations straddle the centerlines (“two-holed”industry standard alignment).

G. Pipe covering protection saddles: Pressure boundary weld to pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and located per drawings. Locate one centered on bottom of pipe for all piping roller support locations. Locate one centered on top of pipe for all piping roller support locations, except vertical expansion loops as called out on the Drawings.

H. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.

I. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

J. Tools marked for Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainless Steel only. Tools previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on Stainless Steel. Areas on Stainless Steel pipe that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of all free iron.

K. Below Grade Piping:

1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00 “Excavation and Fill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 274 of 317

FOR

CCdamdam

Install flaInstall fldjacent jacentINFORMATON

o o

nge bolt hnge bolt htandard andard al

on saddlesn saddleructions anuctions a

ping ing rollerrollesupport losupport lo

shown onhown on05 50 0005 50 00

S SPSPONLY

8.8.

-Installed-Installed

ss Steel ss Steel ss


40 05 13 – 10

3. At piping bends provide cushions for thermal expansion according to Section 40 42 00, Paragraph 2.2.D.

L. Exterior Protective Coating for all Outside Above and Below Grade Piping:

1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.

2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe, fittings, and pipe covering protection saddleswith coating specified above in Paragraph 2.2, “Materials,” in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and manufacturer’s instructions.

3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Do not install insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Welding

1. Weld piping and attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.9.




N. Weld Identification


2. Assign weld numbers to pressure containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.


4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 275 of 317

FORdd

RepairRepairrecommerecomm

INFORMATON

install iinstall ince with mnce with m

ttachmentstachmenME B31.9.ME B31.

permittedpermitte

e--in weldin wel

rdardONLYnce wnce w

or spool, or spool, posip


40 05 13 – 11

O. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing, and connecting of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.

P. Heat Trace: Install per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

Q. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”





B. Cleaning and Flushing


2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or other mechanical method approved by the TOC Construction Representativeuntil there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

a. When high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressure testing will not be performed immediately after cleaning, remove all water.





RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 276 of 317

FORFurnFurncleanincleanin

btain dbtain dINFORMATON

recreentativeentative

hinghing

on is compon is comysstem inttem i

al cleaningal cleanin

move looseve loosetting, blowtting, bl

the the TOC TOr debrisr debriONLY

or other mor other meak/pressueak/pres

remove alremove

to e


40 05 13 – 12

1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.

3. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”








1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform leak testing of pipe in accordance with ASME B31.9 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times testpressure.

2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 277 of 317

exetINFORMATON

estinestin

Required eRequired eting leak ting leak t

aminationminationd on a singon a sing

ion of attaon of attang on sketon sket

ONLYed for ted for te

per


40 05 13 – 13

3. Pipe joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.

4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.




8. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.

9. Purge air from piping systems during filling, before applying pressure.

10. Continuously maintain test pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine joints and connections. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.

11. Remove water from piping systems after testing using low point drains or by applying low air pressure at connection points and blowing down the lines.

12. Perform leak/pressure testing in accordance with ASME B31.9, Chapter VI, Section 937, and this Section.

13. Support the final in-service leak test of the whole system to the extent directed by the TOC Construction Representative.

3.5 SCHEDULES


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 278 of 317

FOR VisuVisuincludiincludiduring tesduring te

INFORMATON

ete testinete testin

rom pipirom pipingng

aintain tesaintain tesons. Pipinns. Pipin

valve packvalve pack

tems aftertems afteonnection onnection

ONLYce with Ace with

sysystem stem


40 05 13 – 14

NDE/NDT Method Raw Water Piping

Legend:A. All completed welds to have visual

examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld inspector shall be in accordance with ASME B31.9, Paragraph 936.4.1 and fulfill the minimum requirements.

B. Full penetration welds on branch connections.

C. Attachment welds to pipe.D. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.

Visual A Fit Root Pass Cover Pass ALiquid Penetrant Root Pass Cover PassMagnetic Particle Root Pass Cover PassRadiographic Completed WeldUltrasonic Completed WeldLeak/Pressure Completed Joints B, C, DOther

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 279 of 317

FOR

plepleasonicasonicFmpleted Wleted WFO

ressureressureO

edd Joointsint

ORRINFORMATON

IINNNN

ONLY


40 05 13 – 15

B. Components List



Design Temp(°F)

Inlet and Cold Water Discharge up to Manifold Piping 150 225 +10/-0 140

Cold Water Discharge Piping(Inside – after the Manifold, Below Grade, or

Above Grade Outside)150 225 +10/-0 180

Hot Water Inlet and Recirculation Piping 250 375 +10/-0 140Hot Water Discharge Piping

(Inside, Below Grade, or Above Grade Outside) 250 375 +10/-0 180

Sizes 3/4 in. & smaller 1 in. to 4 in. 6 in & largerPipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP304L, seamless. Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated

spools as specified on the Drawings.Wall Thickness Schedule 80S. Schedule 40S and Schedule 80S (only if indicated as threaded

on the Drawings).Fittings Stainless Steel, ASTM A182 Grade F or ASTM A403 Grade

WP, 304L, Class 3000, socket weld, threaded, or butt weldin accordance with ASME B16.11 or B16.9.

Stainless Steel, ASTM A403 WP304LClass S, full penetration butt weld in accordance with ASME B16.9

Branch Fittings Integrally reinforced Stainless Steel in accordance with MSS SP-97.

O-ring Unions 304L Stainless Steel, Socket Weld or Threaded, EPDM o-ring, Class 3000, Manufacturer: Hart Industries.

None.

Flanges None. ASTM A182, Grade F 304L, CL 150 and CL 300, forged, raised face, slip-on or weld neck in accordance with ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Flange Isolation Kits

Flange Isolation Gasket Kit, Type F Raised Face, ASME B16.5, Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/16 in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700, match pipe size, single washer 1 piece phenolic, Nomex Sleeve (GPT Industries or equivalent).

Bolting None. ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex nuts.

Gaskets None. Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700.

Ball Valves (2 way)

Stainless Steel body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M, Full port, threaded end connections in accordance with ASME B1.20.1, socket weld ends in accordance with ASME B16.11, Tekfil seat, Flowtek series 7000.

None.

Globe Valves None. Stainless Steel body ASTM A351, Class 300, OS&Y bonnet, plug type disc, socket weld ends, Powell Figure 2447 (1).

Gate Valves See associated Drawings. None.

Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside location: either Below Grade or Above Grade).

Heat Trace On any outside piping whether below or above grade with 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 280 of 317

FORtainless Stainlessools as spes as spF

dule 80S.dule 80S.O

eeee

RINFORMATON

ASTMASTMass 3000, soass 3000, so

h ASME Bh ASME

IStainless Sinless FO

ket Weld oket Weldrer: Hart Ir: Har

ORASTASTraised faraised fASMEASME B16B

RMMMMAsed Face, Aed Face, A

00, m0, match patch

TO3 G3

NONLYrade B8rade Bheavy hexheavy heO

h EPDM biEPDM b0

ONLY


40 05 13 – Att. 1-1


IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

1. GENERAL

Identification of piping systems shall be in accordance with the American Standard Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems, ANSI/ASME A13.1, as supplemented herein, and with TFC-ENG-STD-12, “Tank Farm Equipment Identification Numbering and Labeling Standard.”

2. LOCATION

a. Except as provided below, identification shall be located adjacent to outlets, valves, flanges, unions, changes-in-direction, where pipes through walls, floors, or ceilings, and along an uninterrupted length of pipe at maximum intervals of50 ft. Each line or branch in shall have a least one identification.

b. Where a number of outlets, valves, flanges, unions, or changes of direction make identification at each item impracticable, they may be spaced at approximate 6-ft intervals, preferably adjacent to valves.

c. Legend shall be located on pipe so that it can be read easily from operator’s normal viewing position. Labels shall be placed on readily visible lower quadrant of overhead pipes, an on an upper quadrant of pipes below normal eye level.

3. LEGEND

a. Positive identification of piping system content shall be by lettered legend giving name of content in full or abbreviated form. Legends may also be as specified on the Drawings or in other specifications.

b. Abbreviation of words in legend may be used only where unavoidable due to space limitations.

c. Legend shall include nominal operating pressure and/or temperature when specified.

d. An arrow indicating direction of flow shall be placed near legend on pipes normally having a flow in 1 direction only. Color and size of arrow shall be consistent with color and size of legend letters.

e. Legend shall be located on or adjacent to classification color band.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 281 of 317

cept as pcept as pves, flange flange

ngs, and angs, and ch line ch lineINFORMATON

r r

er of outler of outleach item imach item im

adjacent tojacent t

n pipe so thn pipe sobels shall bels shall

er quadraner quadran

ntent shatent shLeL ONLY

gends mends m

here unavoere unav


40 05 13 – Att. 1-2

4. APPROVED LABELS

a. Legend and color classification may be accomplished by use of approved labels that conform to this Standard and are suitable for temperature of surface to which they are applied. Approved labels include the following:

Stock System #4 Pipe Markerswww.pipemarker.com

Brimar Industries P.O. Box 467 / 64 Outwater LaneGarfield NJ 07026 Ph: 800-274-6271

High Performance Pipe Markerswww.bradyid.com

Brady WORLDWIDE6555 W. Good Hope RdMilwaukee, WI 53223

b. Single-word labels may be combined to form complete legends. Individual-letter labels shall not be combined.

c. Labels shall be installed after painting is complete.

5. CLASSIFICATION COLOR shall conform to ANSI/ASME A13.1

END OF ATTACHMENT 1

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 282 of 317

FORgh Performgh Perfor

.bradbradyiyid.cd.cOR

RLDRLINFORMATON

WIDWIDHope RdHope Rd532233223

be combibe combed..

inting is cinting is c

rm to ANrm to ANOONLY


40 05 22 – 1

SECTION 40 05 22

HOSE-IN-HOSE TRANSFER LINE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The hose-in-hose transfer line (HIHTL) will be located within the 241-AX Tank Farm, 241-AZ Tank Farm, and the intra-farm area between the two tank farms. The HIHTL system will connect the 241-AX waste retrieval equipment to a portable above ground valve box assembly within the 241-AX Tank Farm and from the valve box to designated connections in the 241-AZ tank farm. The furnished HIHTL assemblies will consist of a flexible primary hose installed within a secondary encasement hose. The primary hose will be wrapped with heat tape and the secondary hose with insulation to prevent significant cooling of the conveyed fluid as it flows through the assembly, minimizing the risk of plugging.





ASME B31.3, 2012 Process Piping


ASTM D380 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Hose


TFC-ENG-STD-21 Hose-in-Hose Transfer Line

RPP-14859 Specification for Hose-in-Hose Transfer Lines

D. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)

RMA IP-2 Hose Handbook, Washington D.C.

E. Washington Administrative Code (WAC)

WAC 173-303 Dangerous Waste Regulations

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 283 of 317

FOR

thethenished Hnished H

in a secona second the secod the sec

fluid auid INFORMATON

s it s it

ENTS, COENTS, CO

sions of thns of thons, applyons, apply

referencereferencerenced docenced doc

eers (ASMers (ASM

ONLYr Rubber r Rubber


40 05 22 – 2

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit two copies of testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.B and 3.4.A.


1. Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs): With delivery, submit two copies of legible reports, certified by responsible manufacturer of materials used in fabrication of pipe, fittings, flanges, and weld filler material for the individual pipe sections listed below. Reports shall present results of chemical analysis and physical tests specified in ASME, ASTM, or AWS Codes or Standards as applicable and Standard Specifications for production lots and heats of materials. Submit separate reports for the individual pipe sections.

2. Material traceability shall be maintained through fabrication for material requiring CMTRs.



B. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

C. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection methods for HIHTL assemblies.

D. Deleted.



B. Storage of the HIHTL materials shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Hose assembly shall be stored as shipped, on reel, in either vertical or horizontal position.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 284 of 317

FOR

ccmatmatmateriamateripresent represent r

STM, M,INFORMATON

r Ar Acations fcations for the indor the ind

ability shability shaRs. s.

ntract Stateract Stateucts.ucts.

essure tessure tfii ONLY

stiation. Mtion.

nd are famnd are fand the cond the co


40 05 22 – 3

2. Hose assembly should be stored in its original shipping/packing materials so that plastic wrapping and cardboard covering will provide some protection against possible deteriorating elements. Additionally, if stored outside, the material shall be covered with a tarpaulin or other protective covering.

3. Hose ends shall be kept covered by wrapping in plastic and securing.

4. Exposure to direct and reflected sunlight should be avoided. If the hose is exposed to the sun for a prolonged period, a section of hose should be inspected for deterioration every two years. Inspect hose for any damage to or holes in insulation and inspect fittings for visible damage.

5. Optimum storage area is in a covered area that is cool and dark, and free of dampness and mildew.

6. Maximum shelf life is 7 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, HIHTL system materials, including the portable valve box, will be Government Furnished Equipment (GFE).

1. The HIHTL is classified as Safety Significant.

2. HIHTLs shall be in accordance with TFC-ENG-STD-21.

B. Bolt thread lubricant (high stress compound, anti-seize).

C. Calibrated torque wrenches.

D. Deleted.

E. Shielding materials as indicated on Drawings.

F. Deleted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine designated routing for the HIHTL systems and notify TOC Construction Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been addressed and/or corrected.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 285 of 317

FOR of dof d

MaximuMaximu

INFORMATON

nt of Wort of Wor

ngs, HIHTngs, HIHTment Furniment Furni

y Significay Signific

FCF ONLY--ENGENG

eize).ize).


40 05 22 – 4

B. Assigned personnel to perform work have reviewed and are familiar with the HIHTL system, associated handling recommendations, and the connection methods for HIHTL assemblies.

C. Prepare routing path and tie-in connections for installation of HIHTL assemblies. Coordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of materials to the site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install HIHTL assemblies as shown on the Drawings.

B. Use care in unwrapping plastic and cardboard to avoid damage to hose, fittings, and heat trace.

C. If a spindle is used to unroll hose, provisions must be in place to slow the reel as it unwinds to control the roll off of the hose.

D. Never pull on HIHTL assemblies by the ends alone. Use a choker strap at some point along the hose length.

E. If temperatures have been below 32ºF, the hose may be stiff and require warming before installation. Notify TOC Construction Representative for instructions if warming is required.

F. Leave assembly connections covered and protected until in place to actually connect assembly to equipment.

G. Connect primary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per manufacturer’s directions.

1. Primary hose connections are male to female ChemJoint.

2. The male and female threads have been treated with Everlube, a dry film lubricant. No additional lubricant or anti-seize material should be applied.

3. The o-ring should have one white and two yellow dots visible indicating it is the specified material, EPDM.

4. Verify cleanliness, correct o-ring, and then join the hose assembly.

5. Torque for the ChemJoint fitting is 200 ft-lbs or hand tight plus 1 to 1-1/2 notches of the nut. Contact TOC Construction Representative for clarification on turn of the nut torque method from vendor information.

6. Apply set screws and tighten with 1/8-inch Allen wrench to the point that the ChemJoint nut cannot turn.

H. Test primary hose in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 286 of 317

FORheatheat

spindle is ndle is ds to contrs to cont

INFORMATON

HIHTL HIHTL hose lengthose leng

been beloeen beloify ify TOC CTOC

vered and vered and

lified quallified qua

ONLYmale Chemmale Che

d with Evewith Evaterial aterial shs


40 05 22 – 5

I. Prior to final joining of secondary hose connections, verify heat trace is spliced and/or heat trace lead is clear of the joint and available for termination.

J. Connect secondary hose joints using a qualified quality controlled procedure per manufacturer’s directions.

1. Secondary hose connections will be one of two types. One joint will be flange connector consisting of 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would bolt directly to a mating flange on equipment/valve box. The other joint will be a threaded union end connector consisting of a 6 inch, 150 lb raised face flange that would connect to another hose assembly and/or equipment.

2. Make both of these connections in accordance with details shown on the Drawings.

3. Verify cleanliness of the visible area of hose and connection.

4. Apply approved lubricant to flange bolt threads and tighten in sequence that uniformly loads the gasket. For connections using raised face flanges with EPDM gaskets, final torque bolts to 40 ft-lbs.

K. Below Grade HIHTL

1. Trenches: Excavate in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Deleted.

3. Deleted.

4. Backfill and compact in accordance with the drawings.

L. Deleted.

1. Deleted.

2. Deleted.

3. Deleted.

4. Deleted.

5. Deleted.

M. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 287 of 317

FOR MMDrawDraw

VerifyVerify clecy

INFORMATON

approvedapproveformlyormly loa loayy

M gaskets, gaskets,

n accordann accorda

ONLYthe drawthe draw


40 05 22 – 6


A. Notify TOC Construction Representative prior to installation of HIHTL for witnessing of activities by Independent Qualified Registered Professional Engineer (IQRPE), as required by WAC 173-303.

B. Perform visual inspection of encasement hose for damage. Minor cosmetic damage to the insulation is acceptable. If visible damage is present, inspect for potential leak paths and notify TOC Construction Representative. If suspect, remove hose from service and retest.

C. Inspect the HIHTL assembly end connections and ensure they are clean and free of debris.

D. Inspect the hose assemblies and connections described in Paragraph 3.2. Verifyfinal connections have been properly assembled and torqued.

E. Refer to Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing,” for heat trace testing requirements.

F. Perform visual inspection of equipment insulation for excessive damage. Minor cosmetic damage to the insulation is acceptable. Record results.

G. Verify a minimum of 2 inch of soil cover is in place above the hose assembly prior to installation of cover plates.


A. Pressure and Leak Testing

1. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect HIHTL against over-pressurization. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.

2. Joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.


4. Deleted.

5. Deleted.

a. Deleted.

i. Deleted.

ii. Deleted.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 288 of 317

FOR pect the hpect the

connectioonnectio

ectiontioINFORMATON

4040quiremequireme

pection ofpection ofhe insulatie insulat

h of soil cof soil cplates.lates.

ngONLYtesting estinge used to e used to

e and ace and ac


40 05 22 – 7

b. Deleted.

6. Perform leak test for primary hose connection per TFC-ENG-STD-21.

Note: Leak testing per this section will be performed on components that have already been hydrostatically tested as subassemblies per ASME B31.3.

a. Leak testing of the HIHTL primary hose assembly connections shall be performed by visual observation. The connection leak testing shall be performed with water at the interfacing water system pressure except when (a) there is no waste transfer system valve downstream of the connection; or (b) closing the valve with water flowing causes a flow transient (water hammer) that could damage safety-significant waste transfer system structures, systems, or components (SSCs). For this leak test, the interfacing water system pressure is maintained at the connection for at least 10 min. If there is no valve downstream of the connection or closing the valve causes an unacceptable water hammer, leak testing is allowed with water flowing through the connection. This leak test requires a minimum water flow of 200 gal through the connection after flow is established in the line. If leak testing with water is not practical (i.e., no available water source), leak testing may be performed at the beginning of the initial waste transfer through the connection. This leak test also requires a minimum waste flow of 200 gal through the connection after flow is established in the line.

Leakage observed at the HIHTL primary hose assembly connections during the leak test shall be eliminated. Subsequent leak testing of HIHTL primary hose assembly connections is not required unless the connection is unmade and remade.

7. Secondary Hose

a. Perform pneumatic pressure test of the encasement hose at 10 +/- 2 psig. Maintain pressure for 10 minutes. Apply soap bubble solution to ensure no leakage at connections and any other location specified by the TOC Construction Representative. Where isolation of a connection is not possible, perform a final visual examination of the joint configuration/makeup to verify it conforms to the Drawings. Record results. The PRV shall be set at ≤ 50 psig. The secondary hoses have a minimum design pressure of 60 psig (or greater) and therefore a PRV setting of 50 psig does not pose a safety concern.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 289 of 317

FOR wwINFORMATON

0 m0 mclosing tclosing t

sting is alting is atest requirtest requ

tion after ion after ot practicat practic

rmed at thrmed at tnection. nection. T

gal througl throug

IHTL priHTL prst sht sONLY

hall behall beose assemse assem

made andmade and


40 05 22 – 8

8. Document testing of each HIHTL system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each system. Under “Description” describe HIHTL system in enough detail for correlation to Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 290 of 317

INFORMATON ONLY


40 24 10 – 1

SECTION 40 24 10

CHEMICAL PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Material, fabrication, installation, and testing of above and below grade chemical piping, equipment, and fittings for transferring sodium hydroxide (up to 50% solution) and oxalic acid (up to 8%).





ANSI/ASME A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems



Section V Nondestructive Examination


ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings


ASME B31.3, 2012 Process Piping



RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 291 of 317

FORDODO

and generagenerpecificatiopecificati

ummINFORMATON


erwise inerwise i

ndards Insndards In

SchemeSchem

Engineersngineers

d PressurPressu

uctivctivONLYExaExa

tandard fotandard foes, Welder, Welder

g Operatiog Operatio


40 24 10 – 2


ASTM A182 Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless Steel Pipe Flanges

ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications

ASTM A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service



ASTM A351 Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts

ASTM A403 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings









MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings – Socket Welding, Threaded and Buttwelding Ends


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 292 of 317

FOR M A312A312

INFORMATON

WrouWro

WS)WS)

ural Weldural Weld

Welding CWelding C

ONLYg Code Code

ng Inspectng Inspec


40 24 10 – 3




1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Welding Procedure Specifications and/or Standard Welding Procedure Specifications: Five days before first use or start of fabrication, submitprocedures as required by Paragraph 1.4.B.


3. Examination Documentation: Five days before start of fabrication, submit documentation in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.A.6 for information/record.



6. Pressure and Leak Testing and Certification: Five days before pressure testing, submit testing procedure in accordance with Paragraphs 1.4.C and 3.4.B.


1. O&M manuals for equipment.

2. Vendor information: Before installation, submit the following information.

a. For Filter, submit: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.

b. For Flow Meter, submit: Dimensional drawings; Specifications; Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions; Spare Parts List.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 293 of 317

FORSpeSpeprocedproced

Welding eldingii INFORMATON

PePewelder welde

on Documon Documon in in accorcco

ord.ord

VerificatiVerificatr informatinformat

ed byd by ParaParyy

tificationificatiocorcoONLY

dance dance


40 24 10 – 4



B. Qualifications of Structural Welding Personnel and Procedures.

1. Personnel and procedures for welding structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications.”

2. Qualification of Examination Personnel: Maintain copies of examination personnel certifications and written examination performance procedures at jobsite.

a. Personnel performing visual examinations shall be Certified Welding Inspectors (CWIs) who have received certification (current or previous certification) in accordance with AWS QC1.

b. Personnel performing other nondestructive examinations (NDEs) shall be certified in accordance with approved procedure, which shall meet the requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret results.

C. Qualification of Pressure Boundary Welders

1. For low-pressure systems, personnel and procedures for welding pressure-retaining components, along with attachments hereto, shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX, except as modified by ASME B31.3, Chapter V, Paragraph 328.2.

D. Examination Procedures: Examination procedures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, AWS D1.3, AWS D1.6, ASME Section V, and ASME B31.3 as applicable, and this Specification. Maintain copies of examination procedures at jobsite.

1. Qualification of NDE personnel:

a. Visual weld examinations shall be performed and appropriate documentation prepared by CWIs who have received certification in accordance with AWS QC1. Certified Associate Welding Inspections (CAWIs), certified in accordance with above standard, may perform examinations when under immediate direction of CWIs.

b. Personnel performing other NDE of welds shall be certified in accordance with written practice, which shall meet requirements of ASNT SNT-TC-1A. Use Level II or III personnel to interpret test results.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 294 of 317

FOR a.a.

(c(

INFORMATON

PersonnPersonnshall be cehall be ce

ll meet thell meet thepersonnel rsonnel

Boundaryundaryy

s, personns, personng with attawith atta

on IX, excon IX, exc

dd ONLYres shalles shaionion V, andV, and

of examinof exam


40 24 10 – 5

2. Welding-related examination documentation shall be signed or stamped by individuals performing examinations.

E. Pressure and Leak Testing Procedures: Pressure testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 and this Specification. Maintain copies of procedures at jobsite.

1.5 PERMITS




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piping and Fittings: See details specified on the Drawings and in Paragraph 3.5.B, “Components List.”

B. Pipe Supports: Unless otherwise specified in the details on the Drawings and in Section 05 50 00 “Metal Fabrications,” use standard components in accordance with MSS SP-69 that satisfy the criteria of MSS SP-58. U-bolts to be Stainless Steel or plastic coated.

C. Pipe Joint Sealant (Lubricant) for Threaded Joints. Use anaerobic acrylic sealer.Henkel Corporation: Loctite 5452 or 567 or engineering approved equivalent. Clean threads and apply according to manufacturer’s specification.

D. Pipe covering protection saddle: B-Line B3162, Stainless Steel, plain. Diameter to match pipe diameter and insulation thickness as specified in Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

E. Protective Coating for above and below grade Stainless Steel Piping: Exterior epoxy protection system, SEAGUARD MP, 5-6 mil thick, per Section 09 91 00, “Painting,” and per manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Valves: As shown on the Drawings.

G. Pipe Flanges and Gaskets: Specified on the Drawings and in Paragraph 3.5.B, “Components List.”

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 295 of 317

FOR

ConCon

UCTSTS

INFORMATON

tatement otatement o

details spedetails sp

pecified inecified is,” use sta,” use sta

of MSS Sof MSS

ONLYts. Use as. Use

eering appering apspecificatpecifica

Steel,te


40 24 10 – 6

H. Heat Tracing: As shown on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

I. Pipe Insulation System: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

J. Cathodic Protection: See Section 13 47 13.13, “Cathodic Protection for Underground and Submerged Piping.”

K. Flange and Valve Safety Spray Shields: TFE Spra-Gard®44 (Ramco Manufacturing Company, Inc) or equivalent.

L. Buried Pipe Marker Tape: See Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

M. Penetration Sealants: RTV Silicone.

N. Anchors:

1. Concrete Anchor Blocks: See Section 03 30 00, “Concrete.”


3. Anchorage must be designed to TFC-ENG-STD-06.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. As specified on the Drawings.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General

1. Verify measurements, including field measurements, before fabrication. Provide miscellaneous bolts and anchors, supports, braces, and connections necessary for completion of metal fabrications. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications shown to receive finish hardware and similar items. Weld or bolt connections as shown on the Drawings.

2. Perform welding of steel connections in accordance with AWS D1.1, sheet steel in accordance with AWS D1.3, and Stainless Steel in accordance with AWS D1.6 and ASME B31.3.

B. Miscellaneous Steel Items: Supply required clips, frames, equipment supports, and other fabrications not shown on the Drawings. Fabricate parts from standard structural sections or shapes, to sizes required. Wherever miscellaneous parts are

44 Spra-Gard is a registered trademark of Ramco Manufacturing Company, Inc., Kenilworth, New Jersey.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 296 of 317

FORnetrationnetration

rs:rs:

INFORMATON

te Anchte An

n AnchorsAnchorss.”

e designede design

ONLYements, bements, brts, bracesrts, braces

ricatioca


40 24 10 – 7

exposed, grind edges, corners, and rough cuts smooth and free of snags. Shop paint parts except those to be embedded in concrete, or those that require other specific finishes.

C. Finishes

1. Prime ferrous metal (except Stainless Steel Piping) in accordance with Section 09 91 00, “Painting.” Do not coat members to be embedded in concrete, surfaces and edges to be field welded, or items to be galvanized. Shop paint may extend into embedded areas where impractical to remove.

2. Stainless Steel piping shall not come in contact with galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION


B. Prepare setting drawings, diagrams, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate with TOC Construction Representative for delivery of items to Site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Fabricate and install pipe, fittings, and components in accordance with ASME B31.3, the Drawings and this Section.

B. Valves

1. Install valves orientated as shown on Drawings where clearly illustrated.



C. Identification

1. An identification tag shall be supplied and attached to the equipment, valves, and components. 1/4” stamped or engraved characters shall be used on a Stainless Steel tag. The tag shall include the equipment identification number (EIN) as identified on the P&ID.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 297 of 317

FORTIOTIO

TIONIO

o receio receINFORMATON

ve ved other foother fo

awings, diawings, diconcrete inncrete in

to be emb to be emve for delifor deli

and comnd comSecS ONLY

ption. ion.

where clewhere cle


40 24 10 – 8

2. Piping Identification: Identify above grade piping systems as to fluid carried and direction of flow as specified in ANSI/ASME B13.1 and also Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” Attachment 1, “Identification of Piping Systems.”

D. Pipe


2. Ream pipe to nominal inside diameter after cutting. Remove burrs before assembly.

3. Keep piping systems clean. Once fabrication has started, plug or cap ends of piping when installation is not in progress. Cap or plug openings in fabricated pipe spool assemblies until installation in piping system.


5. Field verify lengths of make-up spool pipe sections as called out on the Drawings. Cut and weld to fit after all other spools are in place.

E. Make joints in threaded piping systems with joint sealant specified. Apply sealant sparingly to male threads only.

F. Flanged Joints







7. Install flange isolation kits per manufacturer instructions on every flange adjacent to a below grade section of piping.

8. Field install flange safety spray shields at all temporary hose connectionsper manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 298 of 317

FOR

oofabrfabr

AlignmenAlignmegnmennmeINFORMATON

t fot foibited.ibited

lengthlengthssut and weand we

ping sng sysyste

h manufach manufac

gs aONLYand valvnd val

installed wnstalled

at flt


40 24 10 – 9

9. All flange bolt hole orientations straddle the centerlines (“two-holed” industry standard alignment).

G. Pipe covering protection saddles: Pressure boundary weld to pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and located per drawings. Locate one centered on bottom of pipe for all piping roller support locations. Locate one centered on top of pipe for all piping roller support locations, except vertical expansion loops as called out on the Drawings.

H. Pipe supports: Fabricate and install as shown on the Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and applicable recommended procedures of MSS SP-58.

I. Expansion Anchors: See Section 03 15 00, “Post-Installed Concrete Anchor Bolts.”

J. Tools marked for Stainless Steel shall be used on Stainless Steel only. Tools previously used on carbon steel shall not be used on Stainless Steel. Areas on Stainless Steel pipe that show signs of coming in contact with carbon steel (rust marks or streaks) shall be cleaned of all free iron.

K. Below Grade Piping:

1. Trenches: Excavate, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.”

2. Install insulation using temporary supports on undisturbed soil, or on backfill placed and compacted in accordance with Section 31 23 00, “Excavation and Fill.” Install below grade insulation system prior to backfilling trench in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

3. At piping bends, provide cushions for thermal expansion according to Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation,” Paragraph 2.2.D.

L. Exterior Protective Coating for all Outside Above and Below Grade Piping:

1. Before coating application over joints, perform NDE, flushing, and leak/pressure testing specified in this Section.

2. Protect Stainless Steel pipe, fittings, and pipe covering protection saddleswith coating specified in Paragraph 2.2, “Materials,” in accordance withSection 09 91 00, “Painting,” and manufacturer’s instructions.

3. After installation, examine pipe, joints, and fittings with electrical holiday detector in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 299 of 317

FOR

ansioansiolts.” lts.”

marked formarked foused sedINFORMATON

n npipe thapipe thas) shall bes) shall be

e, backfillbackfillcavation acavation a

poraryorary supsupyd in accordin accord

low gradelow gradeh Sectih SectONLY

on

al expansial expanent Insulatent Insu


40 24 10 – 10

4. Repair damage to coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

5. Do not install insulation system or backfill until coating has cured in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

M. Welding

1. Weld piping and attachments to pressure-retaining components in accordance with ASME B31.3.




N. Weld Identification


2. Assign weld numbers to pressure-containing welds and attachment welds to pressure-retaining components as made. Record weld number on weld identification drawings as welds are made.


4. Show heat/lot numbers on weld identification drawings for materials requiring Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs).

O. Perform examination, flushing, and leak/pressure testing, and connecting of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.

P. Heat Trace: Install per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

Q. Piping Insulation System: Install per Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”




RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 300 of 317

FOR

CC

Weld Weld

ntificatintificaINFORMATON

nn

e weld iden weld idenawings asawings as

elds and ads and a

bers to preers to prcomponencomponen

as welds as welds a

If a weld if a weld

ficficONLYation dtion ds (CMTRs(CMTR

ing, and cng, and cer joints er joints


40 24 10 – 11


B. Cleaning and Flushing


2. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, high-pressure water jetting, blowing compressed air, or othermechanical method approved by the TOC Construction Representativeuntil there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

a. When high-pressure water jetting or other mechanical cleaning method utilizing water is used, and leak/pressure testing will not be performed immediately after cleaning, remove all water.





1. Perform examination for individual pipe sections listed below in Paragraph 3.5. Acceptance Criteria, unless otherwise noted by design, shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, “Normal Service.”

2. Visual examination (VT): Perform in accordance with ASME B31.3, Paragraph 341.4.1(a). Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with Table 341.3.2.

3. Perform in-process examination in accordance with ASME B31.3, Paragraph 344.7. Liquid penetrant inspection shall be performed in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section V, Article 7 on root and final weld surfaces when in-process examination is performed.

4. Radiographic examination (RT): Perform in accordance with ASME B&PVC, Section V, Article 2 and ASME B31.3, Paragraph 344.5.2. Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, Table 341.3.2.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 301 of 317

FOR a.a.

pep

INFORMATON

Use draUse dradrainage andrainage an

anliness. nliness.

nted evidented evideas specifis specifi

f Weldsf Welds

pipe sepipe slONLY

ctiess otherss oth

, “Normal, “Norma

nce with Ance withe in accoe in acco


40 24 10 – 12

a. Identify radiographic film with weld identification number, weld spool identification and project or work order number assigned to work covered by this Section.

b. Prepare radiographic examination reports as follows:

i. List each radiographic exposure location (0-1, 1-2, etc.) individually on radiographic examination report.

ii. Indicate location acceptability or rejectability and note discontinuities whether rejectable or not.

iii. When report includes radiographs of welds that have been repaired, indicate which welds are repair welds and how many times each weld has been repaired.

c. If additional welding is performed on weld area that has already been examined radiographically; this area is a repair area. Identify subsequent radiographs by “R-1, R-2,” etc.

5. Perform random examination of piping support welds in accordance with Section 05 50 00, “Metal Fabrications,” and ASME B31.3, Paragraph 341.4.1.







RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 302 of 317

FOR c.c IfIbINFORMATON

een eensubsequsubsequ

ndom exandom exa00, “Met0, “Met

1.1

ntationntation

tion of preon of preination anination a

weld numbweld numbweld fweld ONLY

illesfactoryfactoryions on foions on fo

ted and doted and


40 24 10 – 13

8. Spray shield installation verification: Provide documented evidence that spray shields have been installed on all temporary hose connections along the chemical route piping.


1. After completion of mechanical cleaning and NDE, perform hydrostatic leak/pressure testing of individual piping sections and of the whole assembly in accordance with ASME B31.3, Chapter VI, Paragraph 345 and this Section. Use calibrated gages with an accuracy of ± 1 psi and with ranges 1-1/2 to 4 times test pressure.

2. Document testing of each piping system on Pressure Test Certification. Use separate forms to describe and record each piping system. Under “Description,” describe piping system in enough detail for correlation to weld identification drawings, and Drawings, as applicable. For systems tested segmentally, indicate continuity in “Description” to ensure that entire systems have been tested.

3. Pipe weld joints and connections to be tested shall be visible and accessible during tests.

4. Install one temporary relief valve during testing to protect piping against over-pressurization. Relief valve shall have a discharge capacity of 125% of capacity of pressurizing device, and be set to operate at 110% of the maximum of test pressure for hydrostatic testing. Tag each relief valve used to show serial number, inspector, date, and pressure setting.




8. Complete testing of piping before field application of insulation.

9. Purge air from piping systems during filling, before applying pressure.

10. Continuously maintain test pressure for 10 minutes minimum. Examine joints and connections in accordance with ASME B31.3. Piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of weeping or leaking.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 303 of 317

FOR UU“DesDesweld idweld idested segested se

ire se INFORMATON

sstemtem

d joints anjoints anduring testuring test

oraryary reliefrelieyy Relief vaRelief v

zing devicing devi for hfor hydroydro

inspector,inspector,

es, beforees, beforf pipinpipONLY

ng. Rng. R

uld be damd be dam


40 24 10 – 14

11. Remove water from piping systems after testing using low point drains or by applying low air pressure at connection points and blowing down the lines.

12. Where impractical, and as approved by TOC Construction Representative, an in-service leak test may be performed in lieu of a hydrostatic test on final closures as per ASME B31.3 Paragraph 345.1(a).

13. Support the final in-service leak test of the whole system to the extent directed by the TOC Construction Representative.

3.5 SCHEDULES


NDE/NDT Method Chemical Piping

Legend:A. All final welds for pressure boundary and

pressure boundary attachments to have a visual examination by AWS QC1 qualified weld inspector shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3, Paragraph 341.4.1(a) and fulfill the minimum requirements.

B. Circumferential butt-welds.C. Full penetration welds on branch

connections.D. Hydrostatic pressure test all joints.E. Liquid penetrant inspection required

when in process examination is performed.

F. Attachment welds to pipe.

Visual Fit Root Pass Cover Pass ALiquid Penetrant Root Pass E Cover Pass EMagnetic Particle Root Pass Cover PassRadiographic Completed Weld (5%) BUltrasonic Completed WeldLeak/Pressure All Joints B, C, D, FOther

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 304 of 317

FOR

duledule

/NDT MetDT MetFOORRR

TON D

INFORMATO

INNNNNNFNFNFNFNFFFFOFORRMMMAATTONONNNNNNNN ONLY

HE. LiquE. Liq

when whenperformedperformedAttachment tachment


40 24 10 – 15

B. Components List



Design Temp(°F)

Chemical Piping (CHEMB) 200 300 +10/-0 180

Sizes All SizesPipe Stainless Steel per ASTM A312, Grade TP316L, seamless. Pre-fabricated heat-traced and

insulated spools as specified on the Drawings.Wall Thickness Schedule 40S.

Fittings Stainless steel, ASTM A403, Grade WP, 316L or 316, butt-welding in accordance with ASME B16.9.

Flanges ASTM A182, Grade F 316L, CL 300, forged, raised face, weld neck in accordance with ASME B16.5. Bore to match pipe ID.

Flange Isolation Kits

Flange Isolation Gasket Kit, Type F Raised Face, ASME B16.5, Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/16 in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700, match pipe size, single washer 1 piece phenolic, Nomex Sleeve (GPT Industries or equivalent).

Bolting ASTM A193, Grade B8 CL 2, alloy steel studs, and ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex nuts.Gaskets Aramid fibers with EPDM binder, 1/16-in. thick, Garlock Blueguard, Style 3700.Valves See associated Drawings.

Insulation See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation” (according to outside location: either Below Grade or Above Grade).

Heat Trace –below grade

On any Chemical Piping below grade: 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. Quantity 2 (one on each side of the pipe near the bottom) so as to provide 10 Watts per foot and to provide redundancy and meet the required lengths. See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

Heat Trace –above grade

On any Chemical Piping above grade: 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable. Quantity 2(one on each side of the pipe near the bottom). See Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 305 of 317

FORM AM A

MEME B16B1nge IsolatioIsolat

1/16 in. th1/16 in. thNomex SNomex

FOG

R

TON /ft SelfSelf--fff RegRe

INFORMATO

rade B8rade BIwith EPDM ith EPDMIN

wings.wings.NF

rocess Pipinocess Pipie or Above or Above

Ograde: 5 Wgrade: 5

the bottomhe bottom)uired lengthuired length

RM

See SectiSee Sect

TOONLYO


40 41 00 – 1

SECTION 40 41 00

PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT HEAT TRACING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Installation and testing of above and below grade water and process piping and hoses heat tracing.





ANSI A13.1 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems




TFC-ENG-STD-02 Environmental and Seasonal Requirements for TOC Systems, Structures, and Components

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. Submit test procedures to be used with acceptance criteria prior to testing.

2. Submit records of inspections, tests, and adjustments described in 3.3.


1. Catalog Data: With delivery, submit two copies of catalog data for heater cable, thermostat, controls, fittings, indicator lights, and pipe markers.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 306 of 317

FORand genand ge

and Divisd Div



Standards ndard

ScheSche

iation (NFiation (NF

nal Electrinal Electri

ONLYd SeasonSeason

, and Com, and Com


40 41 00 – 2

2. Includes rated capacities, operating characteristics, specialties, and accessories.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data: With delivery, submit two copies of operation and maintenance instructions.

4. Warranty: Manufacturer agreement for replacement of electric heating cable due to failure in materials or workmanship.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Products shall be obtained from qualified suppliers, meeting NEC requirements, or be commercial grade items (CGI) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this Section. Commercial grade dedication will be performed by Buyer.



B. Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General

1. Furnish electric heat tracing system(s) as shown on the Drawings with all components, controls, and accessories required for a complete and operating system.

2. Self-Regulating, Parallel-Resistance Heating Cable System

3. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 120V. Raychem 5BTV1-CT(for truck fill piping on the northwest corner of the 241-A-285 building, and where specified on the drawings).

4. 5 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 240V. Raychem 5BTV2-CT.

5. 8 W/ft Self-Regulating Heat Trace Cable, 240V. Raychem 8BTV2-CT.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 307 of 317

FORoducts shoducts sh

e commercommern. Comme. Comm

R INFORMATON

AGE, AAGE, A

Statement Statement

and handland hand

n approvapprovONLYthe Dth


40 41 00 – 3

6. End Seal Kit. Raychem E-150.

7. Power Connection box with Red Indicating Light. Raychem JBM-100-L-A.

8. Splice Kit. Raychem S-150. For all below grade splices.

9. Above Insulation Splice Kit Tee. Raychem T-100. For all above grade splices.

10. Above Insulation End Seal Kit with Light. Raychem E-100-L-A.

11. Glass Tape. Raychem GS-54.

B. Pipe Markers: Furnish pipe markers with the words “ELECTRIC TRACED”printed with UV-stable black ink on a durable yellow background. Meet the requirements of the ASME (ANSI) A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems and also Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping” Attachment 1, “Identification of Piping Systems.” Provide materials and styles that are suitable for outdoor environments.

C. Piping: See Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,” and Section 40 24 10, “Chemical Piping.”

D. Insulation: See Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Surfaces to receive heat tracing shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, scale, rust, and other foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost during installation of heat trace cable.

2. Ensure surfaces and pipe in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and sharp protrusions.

B. Heat tracing cabling shall fit within the piping insulation as shown on the Drawings and as described in Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 308 of 317

FORpe Markee Marke

ted with Ud with Uments of tments of

and alsond alsINFORMATON

SSof Pipinof Pipinironmentironment

40 05 1305 13, ,

00, “Proc00, “Proc

ectec ONLYric heaic hea

d other conother co

of all dirtof all dirtf frof


40 41 00 – 4

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Heat trace piping and hoses in accordance with individual pipe sections listed in Paragraph 3.5 of Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,”Section 40 24 10, “Chemical Piping,” the Drawings, and TFC-ENG-STD-02.

2. Install electric heating cable according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and in accordance with NECA 202.

3. Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed.

4. Wrap ratio for hoses shall be 1.3.

5. For hoses and for pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools 5 ft of extra heating cable shall extend on each side of every hose or pipe spool. Coil extra heating cables and protect during shipping.

6. During field installation of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools, wrap flanges on both ends with extra heat trace wire as provided. Trim extra length and splice each connection with splice kit strapped to the pipe in close proximity to the flanges.

7. Install heater cable to allow easy removal on maintenance items such as pumps, valves, strainers, or filters.

8. Waterproof all terminations and electrical connections.

9. Attach heater cable directly to the pipe using the heating cable manufacturer’s adhesive backed glass fiber tape at 1-ft intervals.

10. Connect wiring in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 19, “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.”

11. Ground equipment in accordance with the Drawings and Section 26 05 26, “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

12. Notify Buyer after heat trace cabling has been applied, and prior to backfilling or installing insulation on the piping (with the exception ofpre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools). Obtain approval from Buyer prior to beginning backfill or covering piping.

13. Perform examination on connection of heat tracing before application of insulation and jacketing over joints and other materials and components.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 309 of 317

FORii

Wrap rWrap r

r hosehoseINFORMATON

anaa heatinga heatingCoil extra Coil extra

nstallationtallationnges on bonges on bo

nd splice d splice mitymity to thto thyy

easy remeasy remters.ters.

ctrical cctrical ONLY

on

sing the heing the hetape at ape at 11-

and Secand Secbles


40 41 00 – 5

14. Install insulation over piping or hoses with electric heating cables in accordance with Section 40 42 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Insulation.”

15. Install signs at maximum 20-ft intervals along pipe insulation reading: “ELECTRIC TRACED.” Install labels so they will be visible during normal operations.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform tests after cable installation but before application of insulation or covering, with the exception of pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spools (see next line).

2. Heat-traced hoses and Pre-fabricated heat-traced and insulated pipe spoolsshall be tested and show compliance before shipping.

3. Test cable for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.

4. Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current simultaneously.

B. Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal insulation on pipe mounted cables.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Remove and replace damaged heat trace cables.

F. Protect installed heat trace cables from damage during construction and transportation.


RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 310 of 317

FOR

ccpipepipe

HeatHeat--tractraall be beINFORMATON

esteeste

ble for elecle for elec

erifyerify ratingratingyysimultaneimultane

lation resiation resid cables.cables.

eyey do not do not yy

ONLYonstructionstructi


40 42 00 – 1

SECTION 40 42 00

PROCESS PIPING AND EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Installation of above and below grade insulation and jacketing systems.





ASME NQA-1, 2008 with 2009 Addenda Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Facility Applications


ASTM C534 Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C547 Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation

ASTM C795 Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel

1.3 SUBMITTALS



1. None.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 311 of 317

FORd gd g

s and Dis and D


ssss INFORMATON

therwtherw

y of Mechof Mech

with 2009 with 2009NuclNuc

ard Specifard Speciferic Celluic Cellu

r Formr FormONLYation for tion for

r Thermar Thermatic Staic


40 42 00 – 2


1. Certificate of Conformance: With delivery, submit a legible certificate stating that the insulation materials meet the requirements of the Drawings and this Section.


A. Misrepresented Products: See the Statement of Work or required measures to prevent use of misrepresented products.

B. Documents and records for the insulation jacket examinations as described in 3.4.B.1 shall be delivered to Construction Document Control in accordance with the Contract Statement of Work.

1.5 PERMITS




B. Deliver insulation and associated adhesives to site in manufacturer’s containers with manufacturer’s stamp or label clearly shown.

C. Protect insulation and associated components against dirt, water, and chemical damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTES

A. See the Statement of Work for substitution approvals.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Inside Piping Insulation System:

1. Armaflex NH flexible expanded closed-cell elastomeric thermal insulation in accordance with ASTM C534 Grade 1. Thermal conductivity of 0.27BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 75°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.

a. Products that come in contact with Stainless Steel pressurized pipeshall be in accordance with ASTM C795.

2. Outer covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone rubber (min temp resistance 500° F), secured with Hook and Loop fasteners or similar

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 312 of 317

FOR

ontont

re are addrddINFORMATON

essess

AGE, AGE, ANDND

tement of ment of

ociated adociated ar label cler label cle

omponentmponen

ONLY


40 42 00 – 3

(do not use aluminum wire) according to manufacturer’s specifications. All horizontal joints to be on the bottom.

3. Flashing compound: Non-shrinking, flexible, clear, 94% non-volatile, for service temperatures of -30°F through 250°F, RTV silicone.

B. Pre-fabricated Heat-traced and Insulated Pipe Spools:



2. Pipe Spool Outer covering: Stainless Steel roll jacketing at least 0.016” thick with a 3 mil integrally bonded moisture retarder over the surface for contact with the insulation (ITW Insulation Systems, or equivalent).


C. Outside Above Grade Piping, Hoses, and Pipe Spool Field Joints Insulation System:



2. Armaflex WB water-based latex enamel insulation coating.

3. Field Piping Outer Covering: Fiberglass fabric impregnated with silicone rubber (min temp resistance 350° F), color to be white, secured with Hook and Loop fasteners or similar (do not use aluminum wire) according to manufacturer’s specifications.


D. Below Grade Pipe Insulation System:

1. Insulation shall be Foamglas insulation, ASTM C 552, “Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation,” by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 313 of 317

FOR

aa

PPipe ipe SpooSpock witk wINFORMATON

h a h a with thewith th

ompound: ompound:ratures of tures of

ngg, Hoses, Hoses

nded closended clos34 Grade 34 Grade

tion thicktion thick

ONLYhh StainlesStainle

C795.795.

n coatincoatin


40 42 00 – 4

Thermal conductivity of 0.28 BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F at 50°F. Insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 1.


2. The pipe and fittings outer covering insulation jacket shall be PITTWRAP®45 SS jacketing (FI-179A) with sealant PITTSEAL®45 727 (FI-255) by Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.

3. Oversized insulation shall be at least 2” thick, of the same material as described in 2.2.D.1 above, per Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed on the Drawings.

4. Support blocks within oversized insulation shall be procured/fabricated as specified in Pittsburgh Corning Corporation specifications and as detailed on the Drawings.

2.3 MATERIAL QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Products shall be obtained from qualified suppliers, or be commercial grade items (CGIs) meeting acceptance criteria specified in this Section. Commercial grade dedication will be performed by Buyer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surfaces to receive insulation shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil, scale, rust, and foreign matter, and shall be dry and free of frost during application of insulation.

B. Verify that examination and leak/pressure testing of line or pipe spools have been completed, and installation of heat tracing has been completed, as applicable.

C. Verify that insulation is configured to accommodate the heat trace as shown on the Drawings.

D. All standing water shall be removed from underground trenches prior to installing insulation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

45 PITTWRAP and PITTSEAL are registered trademarks of Pittsburgh Corning Corporation, Pittsburgh,Pennsylvania.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 314 of 317

FOR SuppSuppspecifiespecifieon the Dron the D

INFORMATON

ITY ASSITY AS

obtained frobtained frptance critance crit

rmed byrmed by By

eaned ofeaned ofrost dufrost dONLY

urin

g of line oof line ococompletemplet

heat tracheat trac


40 42 00 – 5

1. The adhesives of self-adhesive labels, tape, and marking materials used for temporary marking of Stainless Steel shall contain less than 210 ppm total halogens (free and chemically combined).

2. Warning tape should be applied on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.

B. Cracked or broken insulation shall be replaced or repaired as required in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect to be certain there are no openings or pinholes in the jacketing.

C. Apply insulation over welds after weld examination and satisfactory leak testing, and after application of epoxy coating.

D. Heat Tracing: Ensure heat trace is installed as specified on the Drawings and per Section 40 41 00, “Process Piping and Equipment Heat Tracing.”

E. Insulation shall be applied over the electrical heat tracing and secured using glass fiber reinforced tape. Pipe insulation shall accommodate the heat trace cable shown on Drawings.

F. Pre-fabricated Heat-traced and Insulated Pipe Spools for Above Grade Piping Runs as Specified on the Drawings

1. Install insulation and roll covering. Maintain a 6” setback to all flange locations.

2. Fill voids inside pipe covering protection saddle with insulation.

3. Install Stainless Steel roll jacketing over insulation with minimum overlaps per manufacturer’s instructions. Seam to be located on the bottom. Install directly over pipe covering protection saddles. Use Stainless Steel banding, installation and spacing per manufacturer’s specifications. Also locate banding at both edges of every pipe covering protection saddle.

4. Permanently mark all the way around jacketing, with paint or otherwise, the center location of each pipe covering protection saddle that is hidden directly below the roll jacketing.

5. Install two piece Stainless Steel jacketing elbows with minimum overlaps and banding per manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Seal all gaps to be watertight.

G. Above Grade Field Piping Insulation System

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 315 of 317

FOR at Tracinat Tracin

on 40 41 n 40 41

shall hallINFORMATON

be abe ad tape. Pd tape.

ings.ings.

raced andced ande Drawinge Drawing

roll coveriroll cover

protectioprotectio

over inover inONLY

u SSeamamng protectng protect

cing per ming per es of everes of ev


40 42 00 – 6

1. Install insulation over joints only after NDE and leak/pressure testing of line has been completed.

2. After heat trace and heat trace splice kit installation, and before insulation, all field joints and below grade to above grade transitions are to be wrapped with petrolatum, composite, or wax adhesive sealing tape, installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Insulate valves using removable insulation pads, and any fittings not accommodated with straight jacketed pipe insulation.

4. Coat insulation with Armaflex WB finish per manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Install fiberglass fabric outer coating over Armaflex WB finish. Overlap distance of the fibergrlass fabric installed over flanged joints or valves shall be at least 2 inches over the edge of the pipe spool Stainless Steel roll jacketing. All horizontal joints to be on the bottom. Cut jacketing to fit tightly around heat trace splice kit protrusions.

6. Seal jacketing and any protrusions with flashing compound so as to be watertight.

H. Hose Insulation System

1. Install Armaflex insulation, covered with silicon impregnated fiberglass fabric.

I. Below Grade Piping Insulation System

1. Install insulation and jacketing per the manufacturer’s instructions. Ensure that the all joints and seams are properly sealed.

2. Verify piping is supported, anchored, and guided as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings.

3. Backfill insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the Drawings.

4. Expansion loops, piping supports, and fill in the bends and expansion loops shall be as specified in the manufacturer’s instructions and on the Drawings.

J. Transition from Below Grade to Above Grade Piping Insulation

1. Extend below grade insulation and PITTWRAP jacketing with PITTSEALa minimum of 4” above grade.

2. Overlap with above grade fiberglass fabric covering down to within 1” of grade.

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 316 of 317

FOR didishall shalljacketingjacketin

ghtlyghtly arayyINFORMATON

cketing ancketing ant

mm

sulation, clation, c

stemem

per the maer the ms are proare proONLY

d guided guidedwings. wings.

ufacturerfacture s


40 42 00 – 7

3.3 INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Piping and Hose Insulation Schedule:

Table 1. Piping

(see corresponding Section) Location Design

Temperature

Minimum Required Insulation Thickness

Insulation Purpose

“Hot Water” Inside See Section 40 05 13, “Process Piping,”

Paragraph 3.5

3/8” Incidental Human Contact

“Cold Water” Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection“Cold Water” Above Grade 1”“Hot Water” Below Grade 1.5” Freeze Protection &

Maintain Process Temperature“Hot Water” Above Grade 1”

Chemical Piping Below Grade See Section 40 24 10,

“Chemical Piping”

1.5” Freeze Protection & Maintain Process

TemperatureChemical Piping Above Grade 2”


A. Cleaning

1. Mechanical cleaning: Remove loose dirt, scale, and debris by brushing, wiping, or other mechanical method approved by the Buyer until there is no visible dirt, scale, or debris.

B. Examinations

1. Insulation Jacket: Visually examine all laps, seams, and field applied coated areas to ensure that these areas are sealed from water entry in accordance with this Specification and product data sheets.


END OF SPECIFICATION

RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 317 of 317

FOR

WaWa

ot Waterot WaterF

PipingPipingO

gg

RINFORMATON

AbANINNNTROTROL L

Remove Remove cal methocal metho

ris.is.

ll ONLYaps, seaaps, se

sealed frosealed frouct data shuct data

Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM · RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 1 of...

Documents

Transcript of Release Stamp DOCUMENT RELEASE AND CHANGE FORM · RPP-SPEC-60023 Rev.07 2/14/2018 - 2:57 PM 1 of...